2022

Rules
Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships

Part 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems

2022

Guidance
Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel ships

Part 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems

 2022

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships

Part 6

Electrical Equipment and

Control Systems

RA-06-E KR
 APPLICATION OF
PART 6 "ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS"

1. Unless expressly specified otherwise, the requirements in the Rules apply to ships for
which contracts for construction are signed on or after 1 July 2022.
2. The amendments to the Rules for 2021 edition and their effective date are as follows;

Effective Date : 1 January 2022 (based on the contract date for ship construction)

CHAPTER 1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Section 3 Rotating Machinery

- 309. 15 has been amended.

Effective Date : 1 July 2022

CHAPTER 1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Section 5 Cables
- 509. 5 has been amended.

Section 12 Semi-Conductor Converters

- 1203. 2, 3 (1), 4 (2) and 6 have been amended.

Section 15 High Voltage Electrical Installations

- 1501. 1 (2) has been amended.
- 1502. 2 (1) and 3 (2) have been amended.
- 1503. 3 has been amended.
- 1504. 1 has been amended.
- 1505. 1 has been amended.
- 1506. 1, 2 (1), 2 (5) and 4 have been amended.

- i -
 CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ··········································································· 1

Section 1 General ············································································································ 1
Section 2 System Design ······························································································ 6
Section 3 Rotating Machinery ····················································································· 18
Section 4 Switchboards, Section Boards and Distribution Boards ······················ 28
Section 5 Cables ············································································································ 32
Section 6 Transformers for Power and Lighting ···················································· 40
Section 7 Controlgears for Motors and Magnetic Brakes ···································· 42
Section 8 Fuses, Circuit-breakers and Electromagnetic Contactors ·················· 47
Section 9 Explosion-protected Electrical Equipment ············································· 49
Section 10 Lighting Fittings, Heating Appliances, Wiring Accessories and
Miscellaneous Equipment ········································································ 51
Section 11 Internal Communications ········································································· 53
Section 12 Semi-Conductor Converters ··································································· 55
Section 13 Accumulator Batteries ·············································································· 60
Section 14 Lightning Conductors ··············································································· 62
Section 15 High Voltage Electrical Installations ······················································ 63
Section 16 Electric Propulsion Unit ··········································································· 69
Section 17 Tests after Installation on Board ··························································· 75
Section 18 Spare Parts, Tools and Instruments ····················································· 77

CHAPTER 2 CONTROL SYSTEMS ····················································································· 79

Section 1 General ·········································································································· 79
Section 2 System and Control ···················································································· 81
Section 3 Tests ·············································································································· 90
Section 4 Computer Based Systems ········································································ 92

- iii -
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

CHAPTER 1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Section 1 General

101. General
1. Application 【See Guidance】
(1) The requirements of this Chapter apply to the electrical equipment and electric propulsion ma-
chinery intended for ships without special limitations for their service or purpose. For electrical
equipment and electric propulsion machinery intended for ships with special limitations for their
service or purpose and intended for small ships of less than 500 ton gross tonnage, the require-
ments in this Chapter may be modified within an extent considered appropriate by this Society.
(2) Except where a specific statement is made to the contrary, all requirements specified in this
chapter are equally applicable to a.c. and d.c. installations.
(3) When the Society considers necessary, requirements specified in international electrical standards
may apply.
2. Special electrical equipment 【See Guidance】
Electrical equipment and electric propulsion machinery not specified in this Chapter are to be as
deemed appropriate by the Society.
3. Passenger ships
The electrical equipment of passenger ships engaged on international voyages is to comply with the
requirements in this Part and in addition, attention is to be paid to compliance with the require-
ments of passenger ships specified in the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea
(hereinafter referred to as the "SOLAS Convention").
4. Terminology
Terms used in this Chapter are as follows:
(1) Dangerous spaces are the following areas or spaces where flammable or explosive substances
are placed and where it is likely to arise flammable or explosive gases or vapours from these
substances and they are classified according to generation frequency and period of life for ex-
plosive gas atmosphere. 【See Guidance】
(A) Zone 0 : area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is present continuously or is present for
long periods.
(B) Zone 1 : area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is sometimes likely to occur in normal
operation..
(C) Zone 2 : area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal oper-
ation and, if it does occur, is likely to do so only infrequently and will exist for a short peri-
od only.
(2) Selective tripping is such an arrangement that only the protective device nearest to a fault point
is opened automatically in order to maintain the power supply to the rests of sound circuits, in
the event of a fault in the circuit having protective devices connected in series.
(3) Preference tripping is such an arrangement that the protective devices for unimportant circuits
are opened automatically in order to ensure the power supply for vital services, when any one
generator becomes overloaded or likely.
(4) Normal operational and habitable condition is a condition under which the ship as a whole, the
machinery, services, means and aids ensuring propulsion, ability to steer, safe navigation, fire and
flooding safety, internal and external communication and signals, means of escape, and emer-
gency boat winches, as well as the designed comfortable conditions of habitability are in working
order and functioning normally. All electrical services necessary for maintaining the ship in normal
operational and habitable conditions are essential services and services for habitability.
(5) Emergency condition is a condition under which any services needed for normal operational and
habitable conditions are not in working order due to failure of the main source of electrical
power.
(6) Main source of electrical power is a source intended to supply electrical power to the main
switchboard for distribution to all services necessary for maintaining the ship in normal opera-

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 1

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

tional and habitable conditions.

(7) Main generator is a generator for generating the main source of electrical power.
(8) Main generating station is the space in which the main source of electrical power is situated.
(9) Main switchboard is a switchboard which is directly supplied by the main source of electrical
power and is intended to distribute electrical energy to the ship′ s services.
(10) Emergency source of electrical power is a source of electrical power, intended to supply the
emergency switchboard in the event of failure of the supply from the main source of electrical
power.
(11) Emergency switchboard is a switchboard which in the event of failure of the main electrical
power supply system is directly supplied by the emergency source of electrical power or the
transitional source of emergency power and is intended to distribute electrical energy to the
emergency services.
(12) Electrical services are classified into essential services and services for habitability.
(13) Essential services are those services essential for propulsion and steering, and safety of the
ship, which are made up of "primary essential services" and "secondary essential services".
Definitions and examples of such services are given in (A) and (B) below.
(A) Primary essential services are those services which need to be in continuous operation to
maintain propulsion and steering. Examples of equipment for primary essential services are
as follows:
(a) Steering gears
(b) Pumps for controllable pitch propellers
(c) Scavenging air blower, fuel oil supply pumps, fuel valve cooling pumps, lubricating oil
pumps and cooling water pumps for main and auxiliary engines and turbines necessary
for propulsion
(d) Forced draught fans, feed water pumps, water circulating pumps, vacuum pumps and
condensate pumps for steam plants on steam turbine ships, and also for auxiliary boilers
on ships where steam is used for equipment supplying primary essential services
(e) Oil burning installations for steam plants on steam turbine ships and for auxiliary boilers
where steam is used for equipment supplying primary essential services
(f) Azimuth thrusters which are the sole means for propulsion/steering with lubricating oil
pumps, cooling water pumps
(g) Electrical equipment for electric propulsion plant with lubricating oil pumps and cooling
water pumps
(h) Electric generators and associated power sources supplying the primary essential service
equipment
(i) Hydraulic pumps supplying the primary essential service equipment
(j) Viscosity control equipment for heavy fuel oil
(k) Low duty gas compressor and other boil-off gas treatment facilities supporting boil-off
gas usage as fuel to main propulsion or electric power generation machinery
(l) Control, monitoring and safety devices/systems for equipment to primary essential serv-
ices
(B) Secondary essential services are those services which need not necessarily be in continuous
operation to maintain propulsion and steering but which are necessary for maintaining the
vessel's safety. Examples of equipment for secondary essential services are as follows:
(a) Windlass
(b) Fuel oil transfer pumps and fuel oil treatment equipment
(c) Lubrication oil transfer pumps and lubrication oil treatment equipment
(d) Pre-heaters for heavy fuel oil
(e) Starting air and control air compressors
(f) Bilge, ballast and heeling pumps
(g) Fire pumps and other fire extinguishing medium pumps
(h) Ventilating fans for engine and boiler rooms
(i) Services considered necessary to maintain dangerous spaces in a safe condition
(j) Navigation lights, aids and signals
(k) Internal safety communication equipment
(l) Fire detection and alarm system
(m) Lighting system
(n) Electrical Equipment for watertight closing appliances
(o) Electric generators and associated power sources supplying the secondary essential serv-

2 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

ice equipment
(p) Hydraulic pumps supplying the secondary essential service equipment
(q) Re-liquefaction plant on liquefied gas carriers
(r) Ventilation fans for hazardous areas
(s) Auxiliary and main engine starting installations
(t) Inert gas fans and scrubber and deck seal pumps
(u) Watertight doors, shell doors and other electrical operated closing appliances
(v) Jacking motors
(w) Water ingress detection and alarm system
(x) Thrusters not part of steering or propulsion
(y) Control, monitoring and safety systems for cargo containment systems
(z) Control, monitoring and safety devices/systems for equipment to secondary essential serv-
ices
(14) Services for habitability are those services which need to be in operation for maintaining the
vessel's minimum comfort conditions for the crew and passengers. Examples of equipment for
maintaining conditions of habitability are as follows:
(A) Cooking
(B) Heating
(C) Domestic refrigeration
(D) Mechanical ventilation
(E) Sanitary and fresh water
(F) Electric generators and associated power sources supplying the above equipment
(15) Dead ship condition means a condition under which:
(A) the main propulsion plant, boilers and auxiliary machinery are not in operation due to the loss
of the main source of electrical power, and
(B) in restoring propulsion, the stored energy for starting the propulsion plant, the main source
of electrical power and other essential auxiliary machinery is assumed to be not available. It
is assumed that means are available to start the emergency generator at all times.
(16) Section board is an assembly of switchgear, control gear, etc for controlling the supply of elec-
trical power from a switchboard and distributing it to other section boards, distribution boards or
final sub-circuits.
(17) Distribution board is an assembly of one or more protective devices arranged for the dis-
tribution of electrical power to final sub-circuits.
(18) Diversity factor is the ratio of the estimated total load of a group of consumers under their
normal working conditions to the sum of their nominal ratings. (2019)

102. Drawings and data

The drawings and data to be submitted for approval before the commencement of work are gen-
erally as follows:
1. Drawings and data to be submitted by the shipyard
(1) Investigation table of electrical load analysis (main and emergency sources including batteries)
(2) Wiring diagram for power systems (including emergency source)
(3) Wiring diagram for lighting systems (including emergency lightings)
(4) Wiring diagram for control systems
(5) Wiring diagram for navigation and communication systems
(6) Wiring diagram for radio systems
(7) Wiring diagram for fire detection and alarm systems
(8) General arrangement for electrical systems (bridge, radio room, accommodation space, engine
room, all decks, etc.)
(9) Arrangement for navigation and signal lights
(10) Drawings indicating dangerous spaces (if necessary)
(11) Drawings of measuring equipment for cargo tanks (if necessary)
(12) List of particulars of high voltage electrical equipment(if necessary)
(13) Calculation sheets of short-circuit current in the circuits(if the sum of rated power is 500 kVA
( kW ) and over)
(14) Drawings and data as deemed necessary by the Society (in case of special construction ships)
【See Guidance】

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 3

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

2. Drawings and data to be submitted by the manufacturers of electrical equipment

Drawings and data are to be submitted and approved by manufacturers of electrical equipment in ac-
cordance with 103. 1. Table 6.1.1.

103. Testing and inspection

1. General
(1) The electrical equipment and cables in Table 6.1.1 are to be approved(drawing approval, type ap-
proval) by the Society or to be tested in accordance with relevant requirements of this Chapter
at the manufacturer's works or at other works having the adequate apparatus for testing and
inspections.
(2) The electrical equipment and cables specified in the Table 6.1.1 are to be type approved in ac-
cordance with the「Guidance for Approval of Manufacturing Process and Type Approval, etc.」be-
fore being taken into use. 【See Guidance】
2. Inspections based on Quality Assurance Scheme
Where the electrical equipment is manufactured by Quality Assurance Scheme specified in「Guidance
for Approval of Manufacturing Process and Type Approval, etc.」, a part or all of the tests and in-
spections in the presence of the Society's Surveyor may be omitted.
3. Tests after installation on board
Electrical equipment and cables, after installation on board the ship, are to be tested and inspected
in accordance with the requirements in Sec 17.
4. Additional tests and inspections 【See Guidance】
The Society may require, when it deems necessary, other tests and inspections than those specified
in this Chapter.
5. Exemption from tests and inspections
Electrical equipment having the certificate considered acceptable by the Society may be exempted
partially or wholly from the tests and inspections.
6. Tests and inspections on type approved products 【See Guidance】
Tests and inspections on type approved products are to be in accordance with the requirements
which the Society considers appropriate.

4 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.1 Electrical equipment and cables subject to the approval and test (2019)

Drawing Test and Type

No. Electrical equipment and cables
approval inspection approval
1 Generators(1) X(2) X
2 Motors(3)(4)(5) X(6) X
(3)(4)(5) (6)
3 Control gears for Motors X X
4 Main switchboards and emergency switchboards X X
Battery charging and discharging board
5 X X
for emergency sources of electrical power
6 Electronic coupling and frequency changer for electric propulsion unit X X X
7 Control gears for electric propulsion unit X X X
(7)(8) (9)
8 Transformers X X
(10)
9 Power semi-conductor rectifiers X
10 Uninterrupted power supplies(11) X X
11 Cables X X
12 Fuses, Circuit-breakers, Protection relay, Electro-magnetic contactors X
(12)
13 Explosion-protected electrical equipment 【See Guidance】 X X
14 Cable splices X
15 Navigation light control panel X
(9)
16 Shore connection box X X
(13)
17 Electric fuel oil heating systems X X
(14)
18 LED lighting X
19 Cable trays/protective casings made of plastic materials X
(15)
20 Busbar trunking systems X X
(Notes)
(1) Only applicable for main and emergency generators, except harbor generators.
(2) Only applicable for generators of 100 kVA and above.
(3) Only applicable for Control gears for the motors, and motors which drive essential auxiliaries specified in
Pt 5, Ch 1, 102. of the Guidance and exceed the output 7.5 kW .
(4) Only applicable for motors for electric propulsion.
(5) For the output of not more than 50 kW , if there are manufacturer's own test reports, a part or all of tests and in-
spections in the presence of the Society's Surveyor may be replaced subject to the Society's permission. (2018)
【See Guidance】
(6) To be complied with note (9) in the table for tests of rotating machinery of 309. 16. (2018)
(7) Only applicable for transformers for power and lighting of single phase 1 kVA and above or 3 phase 5
kVA and above.
(8) For the transformer with running capacity of less than 100 kVA , if there are manufacturer's own test
reports, a part or all of tests and inspections in the presence of the Society's Surveyor may be replaced
subject to the Society's permission. (2018) 【See Guidance】
(9) Only applicable for high voltage electrical installations(1 kV and above).
(10) Only applicable for Power semi-conductor rectifiers of 5  or more.
(11) Type approval apply for Uninterrupted power supplies for essential services 5  or more and emergency source of
electrical power of 50  or more. Test and inspection apply for Uninterrupted power supplies of 50  or more
(2019)
(12) Only applicable for rotating machines. And note (5) can be applied. (2018)
(13) To be carried out test and inspection in accordance with Table 6.1.18. (2019)
(14) Only applicable for LED lighting installed in navigation bridge.
(15) To be carried out test and inspection in accordance with Table 6.1.19 and to be carried out type appro-
val in accordance with Ch 3, Sec 37 of the「Guidance for Approval of Manufacturing Process and Type
Approval, etc.」 (2019)

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 5

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 2 System Design

201. General
1. Requirements of electrical installation
(1) All electrical auxiliary services necessary for maintaining the ship in normal operational and habit-
able conditions will be ensured without recourse to the emergency source of electrical power.
(2) Electrical services essential for safety will be ensured under various emergency conditions.
(3) The safety of crew and ship from electrical hazards will be ensured.
2. Construction and installation
(1) Construction
Electrical equipment is to be so constructed as to provide easy accessibility to all parts requiring
inspection, overhaul and repair.
(2) Protection against corrosion
(A) Bolts, nuts, pins, screws, terminals, studs, springs and such other small parts are to be
made of corrosion resistant materials or those suitably protected against corrosion.
(B) If electrical fittings, not of aluminium, are attached to aluminium, suitable means are to be
taken to prevent corrosion.
(3) Protection against electrical shock 【See Guidance】
(A) Where the operators are liable to inadvertently touch the live part of electrical apparatus due
to ship′ s inclination and vibration, such parts are to be protected with suitable means to
prevent electrical shock.
(B) The moving parts, reciprocating parts, high temperature parts or charged parts of electrical
equipment are to be provided with suitable protections for one who watches, operates or
approaches the equipment to avoid injury.
(C) To minimize shock from high-frequency voltage induced by the radio transmitter, handles,
handrails, etc. of metal on the bridge or upper decks are to be in good electrical connection
with the hull or superstructure.
(4) Installation of propulsion machines
Means are to be provided to prevent the accumulation of bilge under propulsion machines
(generators, motor-generators, motors, electro-magnetic slip couplings).
(5) Installation and protective enclosure 【See Guidance】
Electrical equipment is to be accessibly placed in well ventilated and adequately lighted spaces
in which inflammable gases cannot accumulate and where it is not exposed to the risk of me-
chanical injuries or damage from water, steam or oil, and is to be so installed that space is
available for maintenance. Where, however, electrical equipment are unavoidably installed in
spaces not fulfilled the above conditions, they are to be of the following construction.
(A) Drip-proof construction where water drip and oil are liable to drop.
(B) Water-proof construction where installed on exposed decks liable to get wet by sea water,
rain or bilge water.
(C) Submersible construction where employed in water.
(D) Explosion-proof construction where explosive or inflammable materials are stored or liable to
accumulate.
(6) Insulating materials and insulated windings
Insulating materials and insulated windings are to be of resisting quality against moisture, sea air
and oil vapour.
(7) Power source control switches
Electrical equipment is not to remain alive through the control circuits or pilot lamps when
switched off by the control switch.
(8) Mechanical lock
All nuts and screws used in connection with current carrying parts and working parts are to be
effectively locked.
(9) Consideration of magnetic compass 【See Guidance】
Electrical equipment and cables are to be placed at such a distance from the magnetic com-
passes that the interfering external magnetic field is negligible, even when circuits are switched
on and off.
(10) Electromagnetic compatibility
Electrical and electronic equipment on the bridge are to be so installed that electromagnetic in-

6 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

terference does not affect the proper function of navigational systems and equipment.
3. Earthing of electrical equipment 【See Guidance】
(1) Fixed electrical equipment
All accessible non-current-carrying metal parts of fixed electrical equipment are to be effectively
earthed. Where earthing connections are necessary, the sectional area of the earthing conductor
is to be as deemed appropriate by the Society. (refer to the Guidance)
(2) Exposed metal parts of electrical machines or equipment which are not intended to be live but
which are liable under fault conditions to become live are to be earthed unless the machines or
equipment are:
(A) supplied at a voltage not exceeding 50 V d.c. or 50 V a.c., root mean square between con-
ductors; auto-transformers are not to be used for the purpose of achieving this voltage; or
(B) supplied at a voltage not exceeding 250 V by safety isolating transformers supplying only one
consuming device; or
(C) constructed in accordance with the principle of double insulation.
(3) Additional safety means are to be provided for portable electrical apparatus for use in confined
or exceptionally damp spaces where particular risks due to conductivity exist.
4. System of supply
The following systems of supply are considered as standard:
(1) Two-wire for direct current.
(2) Three-wire for direct current (three-wire insulated system or three-wire mid-wire earthed sys-
tem).
(3) Single phase two-wire for alternating current.
(4) Three phase three-wire for alternating current.
(5) Three phase four-wire for alternating current.
5. Voltage and frequency (2017)
(1) Supply voltage
Supply voltage is not to exceed:
(A) 500 V for cooking and heating equipment permanently connected to fixed wiring.
(B) 15,000 V a.c. or 3,000 V d.c. for electric propulsion equipment.
(C) 15,000 V a.c. or 500 V d.c. for generators and power equipment.
(D) 250 V for lighting, heaters in cabins and public rooms and other applications not mentioned
(A), (B) and (C) above.
(2) Standard frequency
Frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz is recognized as a standard.
(3) Voltage and frequency variations
(A) All electrical appliances supplied from the main or emergency systems are to be so designed
and manufactured that they are capable of operating satisfactorily under the normally occur-
ring variations in voltage and frequency.
(B) Unless otherwise stated in the national or international standards, all equipment are to oper-
ate satisfactorily with the variations from its rated value shown in the Tables 6.1.2 on the
following conditions.
(a) For alternative current components, voltage and frequency variations shown in the Table
6.1.2 (a) are to be assumed.
(b) For direct current components supplied by d.c. generators or converted by rectifiers, volt-
age variations shown in the Table 6.1.2 (b) are to be assumed.
(c) For direct current components supplied by electrical batteries, voltage variations shown in
the Table 6.1.2 (c) are to be assumed.
(C) Any special systems, e.g. electronic circuits, whose function cannot operate satisfactorily
within the limits shown in Table 6.1.2 is not to be supplied directly from the system but by
alternative means, e.g. through stabilized supply.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 7

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.2 Voltage and frequency variations

(a) Voltage and frequency variations for a.c. distribution systems

Variations
Type of variations
Permanent Transient

Frequency ±5 ± 10  (5 sec)

Voltage + 6  , -10  ± 20  (1.5 sec)

(b) Voltage variations for d.c distribution systems

Parameters Variations

Voltage tolerance (continuous) ± 10 

Voltage cyclic variation deviation 5

Voltage ripple(a.c. r.m.s. over steady d.c. voltage) 10 

(c) Voltage variations for battery systems

Systems Variations

Components connected to the battery

+30  , -25 
during charging (see Note)

Components not connected to the battery

+20  , -25 
during charging

(Note)
Different voltage variations as determined by the charging/discharging characteristics, including
ripple voltage from the charging device, may be considered.

6. Ambient conditions
(1) The ambient conditions given in Table 5.1.2 and Table 5.1.3 in Pt 5, Ch 1 are to be applied un-
less otherwise specified, to the design, selection and arrangement of electrical installations as to
ensure proper operation. However, ambient temperatures for electrical equipment installed in en-
vironmentally controlled spaces are to be in accordance with the requirements which the Society
considers appropriate. 【See Guidance】
(2) The operation of all electrical equipment is to be sufficient under such conditions of vibration as
to arise in normal practice.
7. Clearance and creepage 【See Guidance】
(1) The clearances and creepages between live parts and between live part and earthed metal
(hereinafter to be called the “clearance and creepage”) are to be adequate for the working volt-
age having regard to the nature and service condition of the insulating material.
(2) The clearance and creepage for the inside terminal box of rotating machinery, the switchboard
busbar and the controlling equipment, etc. are to conform to the values as required in each rel-
evant Section in this Chapter.
8. Harmonic distortion (2020)
(1) General
(A) The total harmonic distortion (THD) of electrical distribution systems is not to exceed 8 %
and any single order harmonics not to exceed 3 %.
(B) This limit may be exceeded where all installed equipment and systems have been designed
for a higher specified limit and this relaxation on limits is documented (harmonic distortion
calculation report) and made available on board as a reference for the surveyor at each peri-
odical survey.
(2) Harmonic distortion for ship electrical distribution system including harmonic filters
(A) Application

8 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

The these requirements apply to ships where harmonic filters are installed on main busbars
of electrical distribution system, other than those installed for single application frequency
drives such as pump motors.
(B) Monitoring of harmonic distortion levels for a ship where harmonic filters are installed
(a) The ships are to be fitted with facilities to continuously monitor the levels of harmonic
distortion experienced on the main busbar as well as alerting the crew should the level
of harmonic distortion exceed the acceptable limits. Where the engine room is provided
with automation systems, this reading is to be logged electronically, otherwise it is to be
recorded in the engine log book for future inspection by the surveyor.
(C) Mitigation of the effects of harmonic filter failure on a ship's operation
(a) Where the electrical distribution system on board a ship includes harmonic filters the
system integrator of the distribution system is to show, by calculation, the effect of a
failure of a harmonic filter on the level of harmonic distortion experienced.
(b) The system integrator of the distribution system is to provide the ship owner with guid-
ance documenting permitted modes of operation of the electrical distribution system
while maintaining harmonic distortion levels within acceptable limits during normal oper-
ation as well as following the failure of any combination of harmonic filters.
(c) The calculation results and validity of the guidance provided are to be verified by the
surveyor during sea trials.
(D) Protection arrangements for harmonic filters
(a) Arrangements are to be provided to alert the crew in the event of activation of the pro-
tection of a harmonic filter circuit.
(b) A harmonic filter is to be arranged as a three phase unit with individual protection of
each phase. The activation of the protection arrangement in a single phase is to result in
automatic disconnection of the complete filter. Additionally, there is to be installed a cur-
rent unbalance detection system independent of the overcurrent protection alerting the
crew in case of current unbalance.
(c) Consideration is to be given to additional protection for the individual capacitor element
as e.g. relief valve or overpressure disconnector in order to protect against damage from
rupturing. This consideration should take into account the type of capacitors used.

202. Main source of electrical power (2019)

1. Capacity and arrangement of generating sets
(1) A main source of electrical power of sufficient capacity to supply essential services and services
for habitability is to be provided. This main source of electrical power is to consist of at least
two generating sets.
(2) The capacity of these generating sets is to be such that in the event of any one generating set
being stopped it will still be possible to supply essential services and services for habitability
necessary to provide normal operational conditions of propulsion and safety. Minimum comfort-
able conditions of habitability shall also be ensured which include at least adequate services for
cooking, heating, domestic refrigeration, mechanical ventilation, sanitary and fresh water.
(3) Where the main source of electrical power is necessary for propulsion and steering of the ship, the
system is to be so arranged that the electrical supply to equipment necessary for propulsion and
steering and to ensure safety of the ship will be maintained or immediately restored in the case of
loss of any one of the generators in service. Preference tripping or other equivalent arrangements
are to be provided to protect the generators against sustained overload. 【See Guidance】
(4) The arrangements of the ship's main source of electrical power is to be such that the essential
services and services for habitability can be maintained regardless of the speed and direction of
rotation of the propulsion machinery or shafting. 【See Guidance】
(5) The generating sets are to be such as to ensure that with any one generator or its primary
source of power out of operation, the remaining generating sets are to be capable of providing
the electrical services necessary to start the main propulsion plant from a dead ship condition.
The emergency source of electrical power may be used for the purpose of starting from a dead
ship condition if its capability either alone or combined with that of any other source of electrical
power is sufficient to provide at the same time those services required to be supplied by 203.
2. (2) (A) to (E).
2. Transformers and Converters
(1) Capacity and number of transformer 【See Guidance】

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 9

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Where essential services are supplied, the number and ratings of transformers are to be suffi-
cient to ensure the operation of essential services even when one transformer is out of service.
(2) Transformers and converters for battery charger
(A) Where batteries connected to a single battery charger are the sole means of supplying DC
power to equipment for essential services, failure of the single battery charger under normal
operating conditions are not to result in total loss of these services once the batteries are
depleted. In order to ensure continuity of the power supply to such equipment, one of the
following arrangements is to be provided:
(a) Duplicate battery chargers
(b) A single battery charger and a transformer/rectifier (or switching converter) which is in-
dependent of the battery charger, provided with a changeover switch
(c) Duplicate transformer/rectifier (or switching converter) units within a single battery charg-
er, provided with a changeover switch
(B) The above requirements are not applicable for equipment for essential services, which con-
tains a single transformer/rectifier with a single AC power supply feeder to such equipment.

203. Emergency source of electrical power

1. Application
(1) A self-contained emergency source of electrical power is to be provided.
(2) The emergency source of electrical power, associated transforming equipment, if any, transitional
source of emergency power, emergency switchboard and emergency lighting switchboard are to
be located above the uppermost continuous deck and are to be readily accessible from the open
deck. They are not to be located forward of the collision bulkhead, except where permitted by
the Society in exceptional circumstances.
(3) The location of the emergency source of electrical power, associated transforming equipment, if
any, the transitional source of emergency power, the emergency switchboard and the emergency
lighting switchboard in relation to the main source of electrical power, associated transforming
equipment, if any, and the main switchboard are to be such as to ensure to the satisfaction of
the Society that a fire or other casualty in spaces containing the main source of electrical power,
associated transforming equipment, if any, and the main switchboard, or in any machinery space
of category A will not interfere with the supply, control and distribution of emergency electrical
power. As far as practicable, the space containing the emergency source of electrical power, as-
sociated transforming equipment, if any, the transitional source of emergency electrical power
and the emergency switchboard are not to be contiguous to the boundaries of machinery spaces
of category A or those spaces containing the main source of electrical power, associated trans-
forming equipment, if any, or the main switchboard.
(4) Provided that suitable measures are taken for safeguarding independent emergency operation un-
der all circumstances, the emergency generator may be used exceptionally, and for short periods,
to supply non-emergency circuits. 【See Guidance】
2. Capacity of emergency source of power
(1) The electrical power available is to be sufficient to supply all those services that are essential
for safety in an emergency, due regard being paid to such services as may have to be operated
simultaneously.
(2) The emergency source of electrical power is to be capable, having regard to starting currents
and the transitory nature of certain loads, of supplying simultaneously at least the following serv-
ices for the periods specified hereinafter, if they depend upon an electrical source for their op-
eration: 【See Guidance】
(A) For a period of 3 hours, emergency lighting at every muster and embarkation station and
over the sides as required by regulations III/11.4 and III/16.7, Amendments to SOLAS 1974.
(B) For a period of 18 hours, following emergency lighting.
(a) In all service and accommodation alleyways, stairways and exits, personnel lift cars and
personnel lift trunks ;
(b) In the machinery spaces and main generating stations including their control positions ;
(c) In all control stations, machinery control rooms, and at each main and emergency switch-
board ;
(d) At all stowage positions for firemen's outfits ;
(e) At the steering gear ; and.

10 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(f) At the fire pump referred to in (F) at the sprinkler pump, if any, and at the emergency
bilge pump, if any, and at the starting positions of their motors.
(g) In all cargo pump rooms of tankers
(C) For a period of 18 hours, the navigation lights and other lights required by the International
Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea in force.
(D) For a period of 18 hours ;
VHF radio installation required by regulations IV/7.1.1 and IV/7.1.2, MF radio installation re-
quired by regulations IV/9.1.1, IV/9.1.2, IV/10.1.2 and IV/10.1.3, INMARSAT Ship Earth
Stations required by regulation IV/10.1.1 and MF/HF radio installation as required by regu-
lations IV/10.2.1, IV/10.2.2 and IV/11.1 of SOLAS Convention.
(E) For a period of 18 hours, except those services have an independent supply for the peri-
od of 18 hours from an accumulator battery suitably located for use in an emergency.
(a) All internal communication equipment as required in an emergency.
(b) The navigational equipment as required by regulation V/19 of SOLAS Convention where
such provision is unreasonable or impracticable the Society may waive this requirement
for ships of less than 5,000 gross tonnage.
(c) The fire detection and fire alarm system.
(d) Intermittent operation of the daylight signalling lamp, the ship's whistle, the manual fire
alarms and all internal signals that are required in an emergency.
(F) For a period of 18 hours, one of the fire pumps required by regulation II-2 / 10 of SOLAS
Convention if dependent upon the emergency generator for its source of power.
(G) For the period of time required by Pt 5, Ch 7 the steering gear where it is required to be
so supplied by that requirement.
(H) In a ship engaged regularly in voyages of short duration, the Society if satisfied that an ad-
equate standard of safety would be attained may accept a lesser period than the 18 hours
period specified in (B) to (F) but not less than 12 hours.
3. Kind and performance of emergency source of electrical power
The emergency source of electrical power is to be a generator, an accumulator battery or an unin-
terruptible power system(UPS), which is to comply with the following ;
(1) Where the emergency source of electrical power is a generator, it is to comply with the following :
(A) The emergency generator is to be driven by a suitable prime mover with an independent
supply of fuel, having a flashpoint (closed cup test) of not less than 43°C ;
(B) The emergency generator is to be started automatically upon failure of the main source of
electrical power supply unless a transitional source of emergency electrical power in accord-
ance with (C) is provided; where the emergency generator is automatically started, it is to
be automatically connected to the emergency switchboard; those services referred to the re-
quirements in 4. are then to be connected automatically to the emergency generator ;
(C) A transitional source of emergency electrical power as specified in 4. is to be provided un-
less an emergency generator is provided capable both of supplying the services mentioned in
that paragraph and of being automatically started and supplying the required load as quickly
as is safe and practicable subject to a maximum of 45 seconds.
(2) Where the emergency source of electrical power is an accumulator battery, it is to be capable of :
(A) carrying the emergency electrical load without recharging while maintaining the voltage of the
battery throughout the discharge period within 12  above or below its nominal voltage ;
【See Guidance】
(B) automatically connecting to the emergency switchboard in the event of failure of the main
source of electrical power ; and
(C) immediately supplying at least those services specified in 4.
(3) Where the emergency source of electrical power is an uninterruptible power system(UPS), it is
to comply with 1203. (2021)
(4) Where electrical power is necessary to restore propulsion, the capacity is to be sufficient to re-
store propulsion to the ship in conjunction with other machinery, as appropriate, from a dead
ship condition within 30 minutes. 【See Guidance】
4. Transitional source of emergency electrical power
The transitional source of emergency electrical power where required by 3. is to consist of an accu-
mulator battery suitably located for use in an emergency which is to :
(1) operate without recharging while maintaining the voltage of the battery throughout the discharge
period within 12 % above or below its nominal voltage ; and 【See Guidance】

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 11

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(2) be of sufficient capacity and be so arranged as to supply automatically in the event of failure of
either the main or the emergency source of electrical power for half an hour at least the follow-
ing services if they depend upon an electrical source for their operation :
(A) The lighting required by 2. (2) (A) to (C). For this transitional phase, the required emergency
electric lighting, in respect of the machinery space and accommodation and service spaces
may be provided by permanently fixed, individual, automatically charged, relay operated accu-
mulator lamps ; and
(B) All services required by 2. (2) (E) (a) (c) and (d) unless such services have an independent
supply for the period specified from an accumulator battery suitably located for use in an
emergency.
5. Location, etc. of emergency source of electrical power
(1) The emergency switchboard is to be installed as near as is practicable to the emergency source
of electrical power.
(2) Where the emergency source of electrical power is a generator, the emergency switchboard is
to be located in the same space unless the operation of the emergency switchboard would
thereby be impaired. No accumulator battery fitted in accordance with this regulation is to be in-
stalled in the same space as the emergency switchboard.
(3) An indicator is to be mounted in a suitable place on the main switchboard or in the machinery
control room to indicate when the batteries constituting either the emergency source of electrical
power or the transitional source of electrical power are being discharged.
(4) The emergency switchboard is to be supplied during normal operation from the main switchboard
by an interconnector feeder which is to be adequately protected at the main switchboard against
overload and short circuit and which is to be disconnected automatically at the emergency
switchboard upon failure of the main source of electrical power. Where the system is arranged
for feedback operation the interconnector feeder is also to be protected at the emergency switch
board at least against short circuit.
(5) In order to ensure ready availability of the emergency source of electrical power, arrangements
are to be made where necessary to disconnect automatically non-emergency circuits from the
emergency switchboard to ensure that electrical power is to be available automatically to the
emergency circuits.
(6) Emergency electrical system is to be provided with measures for periodic testing. The periodic
testing is to include the testing of automatic starting arrangements.
6. Starting arrangements for emergency generating sets
(1) Emergency generating sets are to be capable of being readily started in their cold condition at a
temperature of 0 ℃ . If this is impracticable, or if lower temperatures are likely to be encoun-
tered, provision acceptable to the Society is to be made for maintenance of heating arrange-
ments, to ensure ready starting of the generating sets.
(2) Each emergency generating set arranged to be automatically started is to be equipped with ap-
proved starting devices approved by the Society with a storage energy capability of at least
three consecutive starts. The source of stored energy is to be protected to preclude critical de-
pletion by the automatic starting system, unless a second independent means of starting is
provided. In addition, a second source of energy is to be provided for an additional three starts
within 30 minutes unless manual starting can be demonstrated to be effective. 【See Guidance】
(3) The stored energy is to be maintained at all times, as follows :
(A) Electrical and hydraulic starting systems are to be maintained from the emergency
switchboard.
(B) Compressed air starting systems may be maintained by the main or auxiliary compressed air
receivers through a suitable non-return valve or by an emergency air compressor which, if
electrically driven, is supplied from the emergency switchboard.
(C) All of these starting, charging and energy storing devices are to be located in the emergency
generator space. These devices are not to be used for any purpose other than the operation
of the emergency generating set. This does not preclude the supply to the air receiver of
the emergency generating set from the main or auxiliary compressed air system through the
non-return valve fitted in the emergency generator space. (2021)
(4) Where automatic starting is not required, manual starting is permissible, such as manual cranking
inertia starters, manually charged hydraulic accumulators, or power charge cartridges, where they
can be demonstrated as being effective.
(5) When manual starting is not practicable, the requirements of (2) and (3) are to be complied with

12 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

except that starting may be manually initiated.

204. Distribution
1. Methods of distribution
(1) General
Every current-consuming appliance is to be supplied by either a switchboard or a section board
or a distribution board.
(2) Power and lighting circuits
Lighting circuits and power circuits are to be supplied from a switchboard independently.
(3) Insulation monitoring system 【See Guidance】
(A) When a distribution system, whether primary or secondary, for power, heating or lighting,
with no connection to earth is used, a device capable of continuously monitoring the in-
sulation level to earth and of giving an audible or visual indication of abnormally low in-
sulation values is to be provided.
(B) Earthing current flowing through the insulation monitoring system specified in (A) is not to
exceed 30 mA under any circumstances.
(4) Hull return distribution
(A) The hull return system of distribution is not to be used for power, heating, or lighting in a
tanker or in a ship of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards.
(a) Impressed current cathodic protection system for outer hull protection only.
(b) Earth indication devices or other alternative means, however, in no case the circulation
current to exceed 30 mA .
(c) Limited and locally earthed systems, such as starting and ignition systems of internal
combustion engines.
(d) Electrical circuits having no fear of causing hull current in the dangerous spaces, sub-
jected to the approval of the Society.
(B) Where the hull return system is used, all final subcircuits, i.e. all circuits fitted after the last
protective device, are to be two-wire and special precautions are to be taken to the sat-
isfaction of the Society. 【See Guidance】
2. Unbalance of circuits
(1) Three-wire d.c. systems
Unbalance of loads between an outer conductor and the middle wire at the switchboards, sec-
tion boards and distribution boards is not to exceed 15  of the full load current as far as
possible.
(2) Three-wire a.c. systems
Unbalance of loads on each phase at the switchboards, section boards and distribution boards is
not to exceed 15  of the full load current as far as possible.
3. Shore connections
(1) Installation of connection boxes
Where arrangements are made for the supply of electricity from a source on shore, a connection
box is to be installed in a suitable position. And also high voltage shore connections(above 1
kV ), are to comply with requirements in Sec 15.
(2) Connection boxes 【See Guidance】
The connection box is to contain terminals to facilitate a satisfactory connection and a cir-
cuit-breaker or an isolating switch with fuses. Means are to be provided for checking the phase
sequence (for three-phase alternating current) or the polarity (for direct current).
(3) Cables between connection box and main switchboard
Cables between the connection box and the main switchboard are to be permanently fixed and a
pilot lamp for source and a switch or a circuit-breaker are to be provided on the main
switchboard.
(4) Interlock arrangements
An interlocking arrangement is to be provided between all generators, including the emergency
generator, and the shore power supply to prevent the shore power from being inadvertently par-
alleled with the shipboard power. Short-term parallel operation of the ship's mains and the shore
mains for load transfer is permissible.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 13

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

4. Power feeders
(1) Essential power circuits
The circuits supplying electrical equipment which is disconnected at sea are, as a rule, not to be
connected to the power circuits supplying electrical equipment required for essential services.
(2) Independently supplied circuits
The feeders of the auxiliaries in main engine room and boiler room, cargo gear motors, radio
equipment, searchlights, ventilating sets, etc. are to be independently supplied from switchboards
or distribution boards.
(3) Circuits for ventilation fans
Fans for cargo hold ventilation and for accommodation ventilation are not to be supplied from
the same feeder.
5. Steering gear circuits
Steering gear power unit circuits are to comply with the relevant requirements in Pt 5, Ch 7.
6. Navigation light circuits
(1) Final sub-circuits of navigation lights
Navigation lights are to be connected separately to the navigation light indicator.
(2) Control and protection
Each navigation light is to be controlled and protected in each insulated pole by a switch with
fuses and a circuit-breaker fitted on the navigation light indicator.
(3) Feeder circuits of navigation lights
The navigation light indicator is to be supplied by two alternative circuits, one from the main
source of power and one from the emergency source of power.
(4) Prohibition of switches and fuses
Switch and fuse are not to be provided on the feeder circuits of navigation lights, except the
switchboard and indicator.
(5) Installation of navigation light indicator 【See Guidance】
The navigation light indicator is to be placed in an accessible position on the navigation bridge.
7. Lighting circuits
(1) Lighting in engine room, accommodation spaces, etc.
In main engine room, boiler room, large machinery spaces, large galleys, corridors, stairways
leading to boat-decks and public spaces, lighting is to be supplied from at least two circuits and
to be so arranged that failure of any one circuit will not leave these spaces in darkness. One
of the circuits may be emergency lighting circuit.
(2) The arrangement of the main electric lighting system is to be such that a fire or other casualty
in spaces containing the main source of electrical power, associated transforming equipment, if
any, the main switchboard and the main lighting switchboard, will not render the emergency
electric lighting system required by 203. 2. (2) (A) to (C) inoperative.
(3) The arrangement of the emergency electric lighting system is to be such that a fire or other
casualty in spaces containing the emergency source of electrical power, associated transforming
equipment, if any, the emergency switchboard and the emergency lighting switchboard will not
render the main electric lighting system required by Par 1 inoperative.
(4) Fixed lighting fittings of cargo holds and coal stores
Fixed lighting fittings of cargo holds and coal stores are to be controlled by multipole linked
switches situated outside these areas. Provision is to be made to lock in the switches or switch
boxes except where installed in cargo holds carrying cargoes with no danger of ignition.
(5) A main electric lighting system which shall provide illumination throughout those parts of the
ship normally accessible to and used by passengers or crew shall be supplied from the main
source of electrical power.
8. Feeder circuits for communication and signalling system, other lights
(1) Radio installation
Feeder circuits for radio installation are to be in compliance with the requirements of the rele-
vant regulations.
(2) Internal communications
Feeder circuits for internal communications are to comply with the requirements in Sec 11.
(3) Daylight signalling lamp 【See Guidance】
The daylight signalling lamp is not to be solely dependent upon the ship's energy source of

14 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

electrical power. When emergency source of electrical power is used for the lamp, it is to be in
accordance with the requirements in 203. 2. (2)
(4) General emergency alarm systems
General emergency alarm systems specified in 7.2.1 of International Life-Saving Appliance Code
(LSA Code) and public address system or other suitable means of communication specified in
Regulation III / 6.4.2 of SOLAS Convention are to be supplied from both main source of elec-
trical power and emergency source of electrical power.
(5) Not under command lights and anchor lights
Not under command lights and anchor lights are to be supplied from both main source of elec-
trical power and emergency source of electrical power.
9. Final sub-circuits
(1) Motor circuits
In general, a separate final sub-circuit is to be provided for every motor of essential service and
every motor of 1 kW or more in rating.
(2) Lighting circuits
(A) Lighting fittings are not to be supplied from final sub-circuits for heaters and motors.
(B) The number of lighting points supplied from a final sub-circuit of 16 A or less in rating is not
to exceed the followings, except the case where the number of lighting points and total load
current are invariable, the number of lighting points may be increased, provided the aggregate
load current does not exceed 80  of the rating of protective device in the circuit. (2019)
For circuits of 50 V and below 10 ea.
For circuits of 51 V - 130 V 14 ea.
For circuits of 131 V - 250 V 24 ea.
(C) In a final sub-circuits for panel lighting and electric signs, where lamp holders are closely
grouped, the number of points supplied is unrestricted, provided the maximum operating cur-
rent in the sub-circuit does not exceed 10 A .
(3) Heating circuits (2019)
A separate final sub-circuit is to be provided for each heater, except the small heaters up to 10
of aggregate current rating not exceeding 16 A may be supplied from a single final sub-circuit.
(4) Final sub-circuits of rating exceeding 16 A (2019)
A final sub-circuit of rating exceeding 16 A is not to supply more than one point as a rule.
(5) Protection of final sub-circuits
Each insulated pole of final sub-circuits is to be protected by a fuse or a circuit breaker.
10. Indication of circuits
The current-carrying capacity of each circuit is to be permanently indicated together with the rating
or appropriate setting of the overload protective device.

205. Protective devices

1. General
Electrical installations of ships are to be protected against accidental over-currents including
short-circuit. The protective devices are to be capable of breaking the fault circuit and continuously
serve other circuits as far as possible and at the same time eliminate the danger of damage to the
system and fire hazard.
2. Protection of circuits
(1) Short-circuit protection is to be provided in each pole and phase of all insulated circuits except
neutral and equalizer circuits.
(2) Overload protections are to be provided for all circuits liable to be overloaded as follows, except
as permitted where the Society may exceptionally permit, and the rating or appropriate setting of
the overload protective device for each circuit is to be permanently indicated at the location of
the protective device. 【See Guidance】
(A) Two-wire d.c. or single-phase a.c. system: at least one line or phase.
(B) Three-wire d.c. system: both outer lines.
(C) Three-phase, three-wire a.c. system: at least two phases.
(D) Three-phase, four-wire a.c. system: at each phase.
(3) Fuse, non-linked circuit breaker or non-linked switch is not to be inserted in an earthed con-

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 15

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

ductor and a neutral line.

3. Circuit breakers and fuses
(1) Circuit breakers and fuses are to comply with the requirements in Sec 8.
(2) Circuit breakers are to be such that repairs and replacement can be done without disconnecting
from the busbar connections and switching off the power source. Where isolation switch is
provided additionally, the requirement may be exempted.
(3) Overcurrent relays of circuit breakers for generators and overload protection except mould-
ed-case circuit breakers are to be capable of adjusting their current setting or time-delay
characteristics.
4. Protection against overload
(1) The overcurrent tripping characteristics of circuit breakers and the fusing characteristics of fuses
are to be chosen suitably taking into consideration of the thermal capacity of electrical equip-
ment and cables to be protected thereby.
(2) Fuses of the rated current exceeding 200 A are not to be used for overload protection.
5. Protection against short-circuit 【See Guidance】
(1) The rated breaking capacity of every protective device is not to be less than the maximum value
of the short-circuit current which can flow at the point of installation at the instant of contact
separation.
(2) Where the rated breaking capacity of the shortcircuit protection is not in compliance with the
requirement in (1) above, fuses or circuit breakers having the rated breaking capacity not less
than the prospective short-circuit current are to be provided at the power source side of the
foregoing short-circuit protection. The generator breaker is not to be used for this purpose. The
circuit breakers connected to the load side, are to be capable of being continuously in service
without excessive damage in the following cases:
(a) When the short-circuit current is broken by the back-up circuit breaker or fuse.
(b) When the circuit breaker at the load side is closed on the short-circuit current, while the
backup circuit breaker or fuse is broken.
(3) The making capacity of every circuit-breaker or switch intended to be capable of being closed, if
necessary, on short-circuit, is not to be less than the maximum value of the short-circuit cur-
rent at the point of installation.
(4) In the absence of precise data of rotating machines, the following tripping short-circuit currents
are to be assumed. Where the motor is considered as load, the short-circuit current of the mo-
tor is to be added to that of generator.
(A) d.c. system
10 times the rated current for generators normally connected (including spare).
6 times the rated current for motors simultaneously in service.
(B) a.c. system
10 times the rated current for generators normally connected (including spare).
3 times the rated current for motors simultaneously in service.
6. Protection of generators 【See Guidance】
(1) Protection against short-circuit and overload
Generators are to be protected against short-circuit and overcurrent by a multipole circuit-break-
er arranged to open simultaneously all insulated poles. For generators with capacity of less than
65 kVA , however, a multipole-linked switch with a fuse in each insulated pole may be used for
protection. The overload protection is to be adequate to the thermal capacity of generators.
(2) Reverse-power protection
(A) For d.c. generators arranged to operate in parallel, in addition to the requirement of (1), an
instantaneous reverse-current protection, operating at a fixed value of reverse-current within
the limits of 2  to 15  of the rated current of generators, is to be provided. This require-
ment, however, does not apply to the reverse-current generated from load side, e.g. cargo
winch motors, etc.
(B) For a.c. generators arranged to operate in parallel, in addition to the requirement in (1), a re-
verse-power protection, with time delay, selected and set within the limits of 2  to 15  of full
load to a value fixed in accordance with the characteristics of the prime mover, is to be provided.
(3) Undervoltage protection
For generators arranged for parallel operation with one another or with shore power feeder,

16 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

measures are to be taken to prevent the generator breaker from closing if the generator is not
generating and to prevent the generator remaining connected to the busbars if voltage collapses.
In the case of an undervoltage release provided for this purpose, the operation is to be instanta-
neous when preventing closure of the braker, but is to be delayed for discrimination purposes
when tripping a breaker.
7. Protection of power and lighting transformers
(1) The primary circuits of power and lighting transformers are to be protected against short-circuit
and overload by circuit-breakers or fuses.
(2) When transformers are arranged to operate in parallel, means of isolation are to be provided on
the secondary circuits. Switches and circuit-breakers are to be capable of withstanding surge
currents.
8. Protection of motors
(1) Motors of rating exceeding 0.5 kW and all motors for essential services are to be protected in-
dividually against overload, except steering gear motors complying with the requirements in Pt 5,
Ch 7, 207.
(2) The protective device is to have a delay characteristics to enable the motor to start.
(3) For motors of intermittent service, the protective device is to be chosen in relation to the serv-
ice condition.
9. Protection of feeder circuits 【See Guidance】
(1) Feeder circuits to section boards, distribution boards, group starters and the similar are to be
protected against overload and short-circuit by multi-pole circuit breakers or fuses. Where fuses
are used for this purpose, the switches complying with the requirements in 1004. 3 are to be
provided at the power source side of the fuses as a rule.
(2) Circuits which supply motors fitted with overload protection may be provided with short-circuit
protection only.
(3) When fuses are used to protect three-phase a.c. motor circuits, consideration is to be given for
protection against single phasing.
10. Protection of batteries
Storage batteries other than engine starting batteries, are to be protected against overload and
short-circuit with devices placed as near as practicable to the batteries. Emergency batteries sup-
plying essential services may have short-circuit protection only.
11. Protection of meters, pilot lamps and control circuits
(1) Protection is to be provided for voltmeters, voltage coils of measuring instruments, earth indicat-
ing devices and pilot lamps with their connecting leads by means of fuses fitted to each insulat-
ing pole. A pilot lamp installed as an integral part of another item of equipment need not be in-
dividually protected, provided that any damage of pilot lamp circuit does not cause failures on
the supply to essential equipment. Consideration is to be given to the omission of fuses in cir-
cuits such as those of automatic voltage regulators where loss of voltage might have serious
consequences.
(2) Insulated wires for control and instrument circuits directly led from busbars and generator mains
are to be protected by fuses at the nearest location to the connecting points. Insulated wires
from the connecting points to the fuses are not to be bunched together with the wires for other
circuits.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 17

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 3 Rotating Machinery

301. General
1. Fault current
Ship′ s service generators are to be capable of withstanding the mechanical and thermal effects of
fault current for the duration of any time delay which may be fitted in a tripping device for discrim-
ination purposes.
2. Clearance and creepage inside terminal box
The clearance and creepage for the inside terminal box of rotating machine are not to be less than
as required Table 6.1.3. However, the requirements in the above are not applied to small motors
such as controlling motors, self synchronous motors, etc. and also not applied when an insulating
barrier is used.

Table 6.1.3 Minimum Clearance and Creepage inside the Terminal Box of Rotating Machine

Rated voltage ( V ) Clearance ( mm ) Creepage ( mm )

61 ~ 250 5 8
251 ~ 380 6 10
381 ~ 500 8 12

3. Air coolers and means of prevention of moisture condensation

(1) Where air coolers are provided for rotating machines they are so arranged as to prevent the
possibility of water into the machines by leakage or condensation in the air coolers.
(2) Where there is fear of deterioration of insulations by moisture condensation within rotating ma-
chines, it is to be provided with means, such as space heater, etc., to prevent it and rotating
machines and space heaters to prevent work at the same time are to be interlocked.

302. Prime movers for generators

1. Application
Prime movers are to be constructed in accordance with the following requirements in addition to
the requirements of the applicable Chapters of the Rules.
2. Governors
Governors on prime movers driving main or emergency electric generators are to be capable of au-
tomatically maintaining the speed within the following limits:
(1) Prime movers for driving generators of the main and emergency sources of electrical power are
to be fitted with a speed governor which will prevent transient frequency variations in the elec-
trical network in excess of ±10% of the rated frequency with a recovery time to steady state
conditions not exceeding 5 seconds, when the maximum electrical step load is switched on or
off. In the case when a step load equivalent to the rated output of a generator is switched off,
a transient speed variation in excess of 10% of the rated speed may be acceptable, provided
this does not cause the intervention of the overspeed device specified in (5).
(2) Application of electrical load is to be possible with 2 load steps and must be such that prime
movers - running at no load - can suddenly be loaded to 50% of the rated power of the gen-
erator followed by the remaining 50% after an interval sufficient to restore the speed to steady
state. Steady state conditions are to be achieved in not more than 5 seconds. Steady state con-
ditions are those at which the envelope of speed variation does not exceed +1% of the declared
speed at the new power. 【See Guidance】
(3) At all loads between no load and rated power the permanent speed variation should not be
more than ±5% of the rated speed.
(4) Emergency generator sets must satisfy the governor conditions as per items (1) and (3) even
when:
(A) their total consumer load is applied suddenly, or

18 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(B) their total consumer load is applied in steps, subject to:

- the total load is supplied within 45 seconds since power failure on the main switchboard.
- the maximum step load is declared and demonstrated.
- the power distribution system is designed such that the declared maximum step loading
is not exceeded.
- the compliance of time delays and loading sequence with the above is to be demon-
strated at ship's trials.
(5) In addition to the speed governor, each prime mover driving an electric generator and having a
rated power of 220 kW and above must be fitted with a separate overspeed protective device
so adjusted that the speed cannot exceed the rated speed by more than 15%.
3. Governors on prime movers operating in parallel
For a.c. generating sets operating in parallel, the governors or prime movers are to have such char-
acteristics that load sharing stipulated in 306. 4 is ensured, and are to be of those easily conducting
the load adjustment, at normal frequency, within 5  of the rated load.
4. Turbine-driven d.c. generators operating in parallel
Turbine-driven d.c. generators arranged to run in parallel are to be fitted with switching device to
open the generator circuit-breakers when the emergency governor comes into function.

303. Rotating machinery shaft

1. Rotating machinery shaft 【See Guidance】
The diameter of rotating machinery shaft in the length from the section where rotor is fixed to the
shaft end of prime mover side or load side is not to be less than value obtained from the formula
specified in Pt 5, Ch 3, 203. of the Rules.  ,  and  in the formula mean as follows:
 = Output of rotating machinery ( kW ).
 = Number of revolutions of rotating machinery ( rpm ).
 = Values given in Table 6.1.4.
In case where the stress concentration remains on the part of minimum shaft diameter or where it
is apprehended that the transient torque is remarkably greater than the normal torque in operation, F
is to be increased by the value recognized by the Society.
2. Shaft coupling
Where bearings are fitted at both ends of rotating machinery shaft, the diameter of the shaft near
the coupling part of the driving side and the shaft of bearing contacting parts may be taken as 93%
of the values obtained from the formula in Par 1 provided that there is no sudden change in the
shape of the shaft.
3. Torsional vibration
Generator shafting is to be so designed to prevent any excessive vibration within the operating
range. The torsional vibration of generator shafting driven by diesel engine is to conform to the re-
quirements equivalent to those given in Pt 5, Ch 4, 203.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 19

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.4 Values of Constant 

In case of generator driven by steam or In case of generator driven by

Bearing arrangement of a gas turbine, generator driven by diesel en- diesel engine other than those
rotating machinery shaft gine through slip type coupling  , or elec- mentioned in the left-hand col-
trical motor umn

Where bearings are arranged

at both sides of a rotating 110 115
machinery shaft

Where no bearing is ar-

ranged at prime mover side
120 125
or load side of a rotating
machinery shaft

(NOTE)
(1) Slip type coupling signifies hydraulic coupling, electro-magnetic coupling or the equivalent

304. Temperature rise

1. The temperature rise of rotating machines is not to exceed the values in Table 6.1.5 when con-
tinuously operated at the rated load or intermittently operated according to their duties. 【See Guidance】
2. The temperature rise of static exciters is to comply with the requirements in 406. 2.
3. The temperature rise of rotating machines equipped with air cooler may be increased by 13℃ from
the values in the Table 6.1.5, provided that the temperature of cooling water at the inlet of air
cooler does not exceed 32℃.
4. Where the ambient temperature exceeds 45℃, limits of temperature rise are to be decreased by
the difference from the values given in Table 6.1.5.
5. Where the ambient temperature does not exceed 45℃, the limits of temperature rise may be in-
creased by the difference from the values in the Table 6.1.5. In this case, the ambient temperature
is not to be set below 40℃.

20 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.5 Temperature Rise of Rotating Machines (°C) (Based on 45℃ ambient temperature)
Class A Class E Class B Class F Class H
Item Part of machine insulation insulation insulation insulation insulation
T R E.T.D. T R E.T.D. T R E.T.D. T R E.T.D. T R E.T.D.
a.c. windings of machines having
a) outputs of 5,000 kW (or kVA ) - 55 60 - - - - 75 80 - 95 100 - 120 125
or more
a.c. windings of machines having
outputs above 200 kW (or kVA )
b) - 55 60 - 70 - - 75 85 - 100 105 - 120 125
but less than 5,000 kW (or
kVA )
a.c. windings of machines having
1 c) outputs of 200 kW (or kVA ) or - 55 - - 70 - - 75 - - 100 - - 120 -
less, other than those in items
1d) or 1e) *1
a.c. windings of machines having
d) rated outputs of less than 600 - 60 - - 70 - - 80 - - 105 - - 125 -
W (or VA ) *1
a.c. windings of machines which
are self-cooled without fan
e) - 60 - - 70 - - 80 - - 105 - - 125 -
and/or with encapsulated wind-
ings *1
Windings of armatures having
2 45 55 - 60 70 - 65 75 - 80 100 - 100 120 -
commutators
Field winding of a.c. and d.c.
3 machines having d.c. excitation 45 55 - 60 70 - 65 75 - 80 100 - 100 120 -
other than those in item 4
Field windings of synchronous
machines with cylindrical rotors
a) having d.c. excitation winding - - - - - - - 85 - - 105 - - 130 -
embedded in slots except syn-
chronous induction motors
Stationary field windings, of d.c.
b) machines, having more than one 45 55 - 60 70 - 65 75 85 80 100 105 100 120 130
layer
4 Low resistance field winding of
a.c. and d.c. machines and com-
c) pensating windings of d.c. ma- 55 55 - 70 70 - 75 75 - 95 95 - 120 120 -
chines having more than one
layer
Single-layer windings of a.c. and
d.c. machines with exposed bare
d) or varnished metal surfaces and 60 60 - 75 75 - 85 85 - 105 105 - 130 130 -
single-layer compensating wind-
ings of d.c. machines *2
Permanently short-circuited
5
windings
Magnetic cores and all structural The temperature rise is in no case to reach such a value that there is a
components, whether or not in risk of injury to any insulating material on adjacent parts.
6
direct contact with insulation
(excluding bearings)
The temperature rise is in no case to reach such a value that there is a
risk of injury to any insulating material on adjacent parts. Additionally, the
Commutators and slip-rings and
7 temperature is not to exceed that at which the combination of brush grade
their brushes and brush gear
and commutator/slip-ring materials can handle the current over the com-
plete operating range.
T = Thermometer method, R = Resistance method, E.T.D. = Embedded temperature detector
(NOTES)
1. With application of the super position method to windings of machines rated 200 kW (or kVA ) or less with
insulation classes A, E, B and F, marked with *1, the limits of temperature rise given for the resistance
method may be exceeded by 5℃
2. Also includes multiple layer windings provided that the under layers are each in contact with the circulating
primary coolant.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 21

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

305. Ship's service d.c. generator

1. d.c. generators
d.c. generators other than those referred to in Par 2 are to be either of the following types:
(1) Compound-wound generator
(2) Shunt-wound generator with an automatic voltage regulator
2. d.c. generators used for charging batteries
d.c. generators used for charging batteries without series of regulating resistor are to be either of
the following types:
(1) Shunt-wound generator
(2) Compound-wound generator with switches arranged so that the series winding can be made in-
operative at the time of charging
3. Field regulator for d.c. generators
Field regulator for d.c. generator is to be capable of adjusting the voltage of the generator to within
0.5  of the rated voltage for machines above 100 kW and 1  of the rated voltage for smaller
machines respectively at all loads between no load and full load at the operating temperature.
4. Overall voltage regulation of d.c. generators
The overall voltage regulation of d.c. generators is to conform to the following requirements. The
rotating speed is to be adjusted with the rated speed at full load.
(1) Shunt-wound generator : After the temperature test, when the voltage sets at full load, the
steady voltage at no load is not to exceed 115  of the full load value, and the voltage obtained
at any value of load is not to exceed the no load value.
(2) Compound-wound generator : After the temperature test, when the voltage at 20  load is ad-
justed within ±1  of rated voltage, the voltage at full load is to be within ±1.5  of the rated
voltage and the average of the ascending and descending load / voltage curves between 20 
load and full load is not to vary by more than 3  from the rated voltage. However, for the
compound-wound generators operating in parallel, the drop in voltage may be acceptable up to 4
 of the rated voltage when the load is gradually increased from 20  load to 100  load.
(3) Three-wire generator : In addition to conforming to (1) and (2) above, when the generator is
operating at the rated current on either positive or negative leads and a current of 25  of the
rated current in the neutral wire, the resulting difference in voltage between the positive and
neutral leads or the negative and neutral leads is not to exceed 2  of the rated voltage be-
tween the positive and negative leads.
5. Load sharing of d.c. generators
When d.c. generators are run in parallel, the load on any generator is not to differ by more than
±10  of the rated output of the largest generator from its proportionate share, based on the gen-
erator ratings, of the combined load, for any steady-state condition in the combined load between
20  and 100  of the sum of the rated outputs of all the generators. The starting point for the
test is to be at 75  load with each generator carrying its proportionate share.
6. Series winding of compound-wound generator
The series winding of each two-wire compound-wound generator is to be connected to the neg-
ative terminal.
7. Equalizer connection
Equalizer connections of d.c. generator are to have a cross-sectional area not less than 50  of
that of the negative connection from the generator to the switchboard.

306. Ship's service a.c. generator

1. Automatic voltage regulators
Each a.c. generator, unless of the self-excited type, is to be provided with an automatic voltage
regulator.

22 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

2. Overall voltage regulation of a.c. generators (2017)

The overall voltage regulation of a.c. generators shall, at all loads from no-load running to full load,
be able to keep rated voltage at the rated power factor under steady conditions within ±2.5  , ex-
cept that for emergency generators the limits may be increased to ± 3.5  .
3. Exciters of a.c. generators
Exciters of a.c. generators are to be capable of maintaining the current of at least three times its
rated current for a duration up to 2 seconds, unless protection selectivity requirements which allow
different characteristics exist.
4. Load sharing of a.c. generators
(1) When a.c. generators are run in parallel, each generator is to be stable in running and the load
on any generator is not to differ by more than (A) or (B), whichever is the less, from its pro-
portionate share, based on the generator ratings, of the combined load for any steady-state con-
dition in the combined load between 20  and 100  of the sum of the rated loads of all the
generators. The starting point for the test is to be at 75 % load with each generator carrying its
proportionate share.
(A) 15% of the rated output of the largest generator,
(B) 25% of the rated output of each generator.
(2) In cases where a.c. generators are operated in parallel, reactive loads of individual generators
are not to differ from their proportionate share of total reactive loads by more than (A) or (B),
whichever is the less.
(A) 10% of the rated reactive output of the largest generator,
(B) 25% of the rated reactive output of the smallest generator.

307. Shaft currents

Suitable measures are to be taken to prevent the ill effects of flow of currents circulating between
the shaft and bearings.

308. Welding 【See Guidance】

When welding is applied to the shaft and other torque members of rotating machines, this is sub-
ject to the approval of the Society.

309. Testing and inspection

1. General
Rotating machines of essential use are to meet the requirements of this Section in their con-
struction and are to be tested in accordance with the requirements of the following articles.
However, the tests in the presence of the Surveyor may be omitted subject to the Society's per-
mission for rotating machines of small capacity.
2. Material test of shaft
(1) The shaft materials for rotating machines (except emergency generator) of 100 kW ( kVA ) and
above are to be tested in accordance with the requirements in Pt 2, Ch 1.
(2) The shaft materials for rotating machines of less than 100 kW ( kVA ) or emergency generator are
to comply with the relevant Korean Industrial Standards (KS) or the equivalents.
3. Temperature test 【See Guidance】
After the rotating machine has run continuously under full rated load until a final steady temper-
ature, the temperature rises in the machine are not to exceed the values in 304.
4. Overcurrent or excess torque test 【See Guidance】
After the temperature test, rotating machines, except special type, are to withstand the following
overcurrent or excess torque test while maintaining the voltage, revolving speed and frequency as

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 23

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

near their rated values as possible. In the above, special types involve deck machinery motors
(winch, windlass, capstan, etc.) and single phase a.c. motors. (2017)

Kinds Overcurrent or excess torque Seconds

d.c. generators 50  overcurrent 15

a.c. generators 50  overcurrent 120
50  excess torque 15
d.c. motors
or 50  overcurrent 120
50  excess torque 15
Synchronous motors
or 50  overcurrent 120
60  excess torque 15
Induction motors
or 50  overcurrent 120

5. Overspeed test 【See Guidance】

Rotating machines are to withstand the overspeed test specified in the following for 2 minutes.

Kinds Testing speed

Turbine driven 115  of rated speed
Internal combustion engine 120  of rated speed
Generators
driven 125  of rated speed
All others
Shunt-wound motors 125  of rated speed
Series-wound motors 200  of rated speed
Motors Compound-wound motors 125  of no load speed
Synchronous motors 125  of synchronous speed
Induction motors 125  of synchronous speed

6. Insulation resistance test

(1) Immediately after the temperature test and the high voltage test, the insulation resistance of the
rotating machine are to be measure using a direct current insulation tester between:
(A) All current carrying parts connected together and earth.
(B) All current carrying parts of different polarity or phase, where both ends of each polarity or
phase are individually accessible.
(2) The minimum values of test voltages and insulation resistances are given in the following. (2017)

Test minimum insulation

Rated voltage  ( V ) Minimum test voltage( V )
resistance( M )

 ≤ 250 2 × 
1
250 ＜  ≤ 1,000 500

1,000 ＜  ≤ 7,200 1,000 

 
7,200 ＜  ≤ 15,000 5,000 

7. High voltage test

Rotating machines are to withstand for 1 minute the high voltage test between live parts and be-
tween live parts and earth with a.c. voltage in commercial frequency as given in Table 6.1.6.

24 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.6 Testing Voltage

Item Machine or part Testing voltage (r.m.s.) ( V )

Insulated windings of rotating machines of size less than 1 kW (or

1 kVA ), and of rated voltage less than 100 V with exception of those in 2  + 500
items 3 to 6

Insulated windings of rotating machines with exception of those in item

2 2  + 1,000 (Minimum 1,500 V )
1 and items 3 to 6

3 Separately-excited field windings of d.c. machines 2  + 1,000 (Minimum 1,500 V )

 ≦ 500 V 10  (Minimum 1,500 V )

 > 500 V 2  + 4,000

When intended to be started with the

field winding short-circuited or con-
10  (Minimum 1,500 V ,
nected across a resistance of value less
Field windings of synchro- Maximum 3,500 V )
than ten times the resistance of the
nous generators, synchro-
4 winding
nous motors and synchro-
nous condensers
When intended to be started with the
field winding on open circuit or con-
nected across a resistance of value 2  + 1,000 (Minimum 1,500 V )
equal to, or more than, ten times the
resistance ofthe winding

For non-reversing motors or motors re-

Secondary (usually rotor) 2  + 1,000
versible from standstill only
windings of induction motors
or synchronous induction
5 motors if not permanently
For motors to be reversed or braked by
short- circuited (e.g. if in-
reversing the primary supply while the 4  + 1,000
tended for the rheostatic
motor is running
starting)

Exciters with the exception of :

Exciters of synchronous motors (including synchronous induction mo-
6 2  + 1,000 (Minimum 1,500 V )
tors) if connected to earth or disconnected from the field windings
during starting; and Separately excited field windings of exciters

(NOTES)
1.  = Rated voltage
 = Maximum rated voltage in field circuit
 = Rated field voltage
 = Induced terminal voltage between the terminals of field windings and starting rotor windings when
applied the starting voltage to armature winding during the rotor's standstill and terminal voltage in
such condition that the field windings or starting windings are started by connecting with the resist-
ance
 = Induced voltage between the terminals of secondary windings when the machine is at a standstill
 = Rated exciter voltage
2. For two-phase windings having one terminal in common, the voltage in the formula is to be the highest
r.m.s. voltage arising between any two terminals during operation.
3. High voltage tests on machines having graded insulation may be as deemed appropriate by the Society.
【See Guidance】
4. For the semi-conductor rectifier of exciters, the requirements for semi-conductor rectifiers for power in Sec
12 are to be applied.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 25

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

8. Voltage regulation test 【See Guidance】

Generators are to be subjected to voltage regulation test specified in the following and are to pass
the requirements.
(1) Test for the requirements specified in 305. 4 or 306. 2 of the Rules
(2) When the generator is driven at rated speed, giving its rated voltage, and is subjected to a sud-
den change of symmetrical load within the limits of specified current and power factor, the volt-
age is not to fall below 85  nor exceed 120  of the rated voltage. The voltage of the gen-
erator is then to be restored to within plus or minus 3  of the rated voltage for the main gen-
erator sets in not more than 1.5 seconds. For emergency sets, these values may be increased
to plus or minus 4  in not more than 5 seconds, respectively.
9. Winding resistance measurement
The resistances of the machine windings are to be measured using an appropriate bridge method,
or voltage and current method.
10. Commutation test 【See Guidance】
Rotating machines with commutators are to work with fixed brushes setting from no load to 50 
overload without injurious sparking.
11. Verification of steady short-circuit condition (2017) 【See Guidance】
It is to be verified that under steady-state short-circuit conditions, the generator with its voltage
regulating system is capable of maintaining, without sustaining any damage, a current of at least
three times the rated current for a duration of 2 seconds or, where precise data is available, for a
duration of any time delay which will be fitted in the tripping device for discrimination purposes.
12. No load test
Machines are to be operated at no load and rated speed whilst being supplied at rated voltage and
frequency as a motor or if a generator it is to be driven by a suitable means and excited to give
rated terminal voltage. During the running test, the vibration of the machine and operation of the
bearing lubrication system, if appropriate, are to be checked.
13. Parallel operation test
Generators to run in parallel operation are to be subjected to parallel operation test and are to pass
the requirements in 305. 5 or 306. 4.
14. Verification of bearings
Upon completion of the above tests, machines which have plane bearings are to be opened upon
request for examination by the Surveyor, to establish that the shaft is correctly seated in the bear-
ing shells.
15. Verification of degree of protection
Degree of protection is to be verified in accordance with Table 6.1.1 to Table 6.1.6 of the Guidance or
IEC 60034-5:2000+AMD1:2006. (2022)
16. Tests
The tests of rotating machinery are as following table according to its kinds.

26 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

a.c. Generator a.c. Motors d.c. Machines

No. Tests Routine Routine Routine
Type test* Type test* Type test*
test(1) test(1) test(1)

1 Drawing approval(9) X X X X X X

2 Visual inspection X X X X X X
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
3 Material test of shaft X X X X X X(2)
4 Temperature test X X(8) X X(8) X X(8)
Overcurrent or excess torque
5 X X(3) X X(3) X X(3)
test
6 Overspeed test X X X(4) X(4) X(4) X(4)
7 Insulation resistance test X X X X X X
8 High voltage test X X X X X X
9 Voltage regulation test X X(5)
Winding resistance
10 X X X X X X
measurement
11 Commutation test X(6)

Verification of steady
12 X X(8)
short-circuit condition (7)

13 No load test X X X X X X
14 Verification of bearings X X X X X X

Verification of degree of
15 X(8) X(8) X(8) X(8) X(8) X(8)
protection

(Notes)
* Type tests on prototype machine or tests on at least the first batch of machines.
(1) Test report of machines routine tested is to contain the manufacturer's serial number of the machine
which has been type tested and the test result.
(2) Only applicable for rotating machines of 100kW(100 kVA for Generator) and more (except emergency
generators).
(3) Only applicable for rotating machines of essential services rated 100kW(100 kVA for Generator) and
more.
(4) Not applicable for squirrel cage motors.
(5) Only functional test of voltage regular system.
(6) Only applicable for rotating machines with commutators.
(7) Only applicable for synchronous generators.
(8) Where accepted by the Society, test may be omitted. (2020) 【See Guidance】
(9) Only applicable for rotating machines of 100kW(100 kVA for Generator) and more. And where accepted
by the Society, drawing approval may be omitted. 【See Guidance】

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 27

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 4 Switchboards, Section Boards and Distribution Boards

401. General 【See Guidance】

1. Installation
(1) Switchboards are to be installed in dry places away from the vicinity of steam, water and oil
pipes.
(2) The main switchboard is to be so placed relative to one main generating station that, as far as
is practicable, the integrity of the normal electrical supply may be affected only by a fire or oth-
er casualty in one space. An environmental enclosure for the main switchboard, such as may be
provided by a machinery control room situated within the main boundaries of the space, is not
to be considered as separating the switchboards from the generators.
2. Space for operation and maintenance
0.9 m or more space for operation is to be provided in front of switchboards. Where necessary,
space at the rear of switchboards is to be ample to permit operation and maintenance of dis-
connecting switches, switches, fuses and other parts. The space is not to be less than 0.5 m in
width.
3. Safety precautions to operators
Where the live parts of switchboards face a passageway, the following means are to be provided.
(1) Insulated handrails are to be provided.
(2) Insulating matting is to be provided on the floor of passageway.

402. Construction 【See Guidance】

1. Construction
(1) Busbars, circuit-breakers and other electrical appliances of the main switchboards are to be so
arranged that the electrical equipment of essential services installed in duplicate will not become
out of action simultaneously by a single fault.
(2) The generator switchboard is to be provided for each generator, and the switchboards adjoining
each other are to be partitioned by the walls of steel or flame-retardant material. The main bus-
bars are to be subdivided into at least two parts which are to be normally connected by the cir-
cuit breaker or other approved means. So far as is practicable, the connection of generating sets
and other duplicated equipment of essential services are to be equally divided between the
parts.
(3) Cable entries of switchboard are to be so constructed that no ingress of water be permitted into
the switchboard along the cables.
2. Dead-front type switchboards
For voltage between poles, or to earth, exceeding 55 V d.c. or 55 V a.c. switchboards are to be of
dead-front type.
3. Materials of insulation and wiring for switchboards
(1) Insulating materials used in the construction of switchboards are to be mechanically strong,
flame-retardant and moisture-resistant.
(2) Insulated wires for switchboard are to be those of flame-retardant and moisture-resistant, having
the maximum permissible conductor temperature not less than 75 ℃ .
(3) Ducts and straps for wiring are to be of flame-retardant materials.
(4) Insulated wires for control and instrument circuits are not to be bunched together with wires for
main circuits, unless the rated voltage and maximum permissible conductor temperature of both
wires are the same.

403. Busbars and equalizer connections 【See Guidance】

1. Busbars
(1) Busbars are to be of copper having the conductivity of 97  or more.
(2) Busbar connections are to be so made as to inhibit corrosion and oxidization.
(3) Busbars and their connections are to be so supported as to withstand the electromagnetic force

28 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

resulted from short-circuiting.

(4) Temperature rises of busbars, connecting conductors and their connections are not to exceed
45 ℃ at the limit ambient temperature of 45 ℃ when carrying full load current.
(5) The clearances and creepages of busbars are not to be less than the values in Table 6.1.7.

Table 6.1.7 Clearances and Creepages of Busbars

Rated voltage( V ) Clearance ( mm ) Creepage ( mm )

250 or less 15 20
251 ~ 660 20 30
Exceeding 660 25 35

2. Equalizer for d.c. generator

(1) The current rating of equalizer connections and equalizer switches is not to be less than 50 
the rated full-load current of the generator.
(2) The current rating of equalizer busbars is not to be less than 50  the rated full-load current of
the largest generator in the group of parallel operation.

404. Measuring instruments for switchboards

1. d.c. ship's service generator panels
d.c. ship's service generator panels are at least to be provided with the instruments given in Table
6.1.8.

Table 6.1.8 Instruments for d.c. Generator Panel

Type of Quantity
Operation
instrument 2-wire system 3-wire system
1 for each generator
Ammeter * 2 for each generator (positive and negative poles)
(positive pole)
Not parallel 1 for each generator (voltage measurement between
Voltmeter 1 for each generator positive and negative poles or between positive or
negative pole and neutral pole)
* 2 for each generator (in case of compound winding,
1 for each generator
Ammeter between equalizer and armature, and in case of shunt
(positive pole)
winding, for positive and negative poles)
Parallel
2 (voltage measurement between busbar and positive
2 (busbar and each
Voltmeter and negative poles of each generator, or between
generator)
positive or negative pole and neutral pole)
(NOTES)
1. For * in the Table, a zero center ammeter is to be added to earth line when employed neutral line
earthed system.
2. One voltmeter is to be capable of measuring shore supply voltage.
3. Where a control panel is provided for automatic control of generators, the instruments in the above table
may be installed on the control panel, except that, if the control panel is installed outside engine rooms,
the minimum number of instruments required to carry out single or parallel operation of generators are
to be mounted on switchboards.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 29

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

2. a.c. ship's service generator panels

a.c. ship's service generator panels are at least to be provided with the instruments given in Table
6.1.9.

Table 6.1.9 Instruments for a.c. Generator Panel

Operation Type of instrument Quantity
Ammeter 1 for each generator (current measurement of each phase)
Voltmeter 1 for each generator (voltage measurement between each phase)
Not parallel Wattmeter 1 for each generator (It may be omitted for 50 kVA or less)
Frequency meter 1 (frequency measurement of each generator)
* Ammeter 1 for exciting circuit of each generator
Ammeter 1 for each generator (current measurement of each phase)
Voltmeter 2 (voltage measurement between each phase of generators and busbar)
Wattmeter 1 for each generator
Parallel
Frequency meter 2 (frequency measurement of each generator and busbar)
Synchroscope 1 set
* Ammeter 1 for exciting citcuit of each generator
(NOTES)
1. For * in the Table, the ammeters are to be provided only if necessary.
2. One of the voltmeters is to be capable of measuring shore supply voltage.
3. Where a control panel is provided for automatic control of generators, the instruments in the above ta-
ble may be installed on the control panel, except that, if the control panel is installed outside engine
rooms, the minimum number of instruments required to carry out single or parallel operation of gen-
erators are to be mounted on switchboards.

3. Instrument scales 【See Guidance】

(1) The upper limit of the scale of every ammeter is to be approximately 130  of the normal rat-
ing of the circuit.
(2) The upper limit of the scale of every voltmeter is to be approximately 120  of the normal volt-
age of the circuit.
(3) Ammeters for d.c. generators or wattmeters for a.c. generators which may operate in parallel are
to be capable of indicating reverse current or reverse power up to 15  respectively.

405. Section boards and distribution boards

1. General
Insulations, busbars, wiring materials and electrical protective devices for section boards and dis-
tribution boards are to be those of being in compliance with the requirements of this Section.
2. Protective enclosures
Section boards and distribution boards are to be protected by suitable enclosures depending on their
locations. The enclosures are to be made of incombustible and moisture resistant materials.
3. Arrangement of appliances
Where the same section board or distribution boards is used for the supply circuits having different
voltages, all appliances are to be so arranged that the wires of different rated voltages can be laid
without contacting each other within the boards. The section boards and distribution boards for
emergency distribution circuits are in principle to be provided independently.

406. Testing and inspection

1. General 【See Guidance】
Switchboards are to meet the requirements of this Section in their construction and are to be test-
ed in accordance with the requirements of the following articles. However, the test required by Par
2 may be omitted subject to the Society‘s permission for each switchboard which is produced in
series having identical type with its first unit tested in the presence of the Surveyor.

30 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

2. Temperature test 【See Guidance】

The temperature rises of switchboards are not to exceed the values given in Table 6.1.10 under the
specified current and/or rated voltage, except these provided in the relevant Sections of this
Chapter.

Table 6.1.10 Limits of Temperature Rise of Electrical Appliances for Switchboard

(Based on ambient temperature 45 ℃ )

Limit of temperature rise ( ℃ )

Item and part Thermometer Resistance
method method

Class A insulation 45 65
Class E insulation 60 80
Coil
Class B insulation 75 95
Bare windings of single layer 75 -
Copper or copper alloy 40 -
Mass form
Contact Silver or silver alloy 70 -
pieces Multilayer form Copper or copper alloy 25 -
Knife form Copper or copper alloy 25 -
Terminals for external cables 45 -
Moulded-case type 245 -

Metallic Those other than For continuous service 295 -

resistors moulded-case type For intermittint service 345 -

Exhaust (approx. 25 mm above the exhaust port) 170 -

(NOTE)
The temperature rise for the exciters incorporated in generators to which 50 ℃ is applied as a limit
ambient temperature, is to take the value reduced by 5 ℃ as limit from the above Table.

3. Operation test
Operations of instruments, circuit-breakers, switching gears, etc. on switchboards are to be
confirmed.
4. High voltage test 【See Guidance】
Switchboards with all components are to withstand the high voltage by applying the following volt-
age at commercial frequency for 1 minute between all current-carrying parts connected together
and earth and between current-carrying parts of opposite polarity of phase. Instruments and auxil-
iary apparatus may be disconnected during the highvoltage test:
Rated voltage up to 60 V : 500 V
Rated voltage exceeding 60 V : 1,000 V + twice the rated voltage (min. 1,500 V )
5. Insulation resistance test
Immediately after high voltage test, the insulation resistance between all current-carrying parts con-
nected and earth and between current-carrying parts of opposite polarity or phase is not to be less
than 1 M when tested with a direct current voltage of at least 500 volts.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 31

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 5 Cables

501. General 【See Guidance】

The application of cables used for electrical equipment in ships are to comply with the requirements
of this Section. Where it is desired to use other cables than those stipulated in this Section, they
are subject to the consideration of the Society.

502. Application of cables

1. Insulating materials
Insulating materials are to be as given in Table 6.1.11.

Table 6.1.11 Permissible Temperature of Insulating Materials (2020)

Abbreviated Maximum rated conductor temp.( ℃ )

Insulating material
designation Normal operation Short-circuit
Ethylene propylene rubber EPR 90 250
High modulus or hard grade
HEPR 90 250
ethylene propylene rubber
Cross-linked polyethylene XLPE 90 250
Halogen free ethylene
HF EPR 90 250
propylene rubber
High modulus or hard grade
Halogen-free ethylene propylene HF HEPR 90 250
rubber
Halogen-free
HF XLPE 90 250
cross-linked polyethylene
Cross-linked polyolefin for
HF 90 90 250
halogen-free cables
Silicon rubber S 95 95 350*
Halogen-free silicone rubber HF S 95 95 350*
* : This temperature is applicable only to power cables and not appropriate for tinned copper
conductors.

2. Sheath and armour

Cables are to be protected by sheath or armour in accordance with the following requirements.
(1) Cables fitted on weather decks, and in bath rooms, cargo holds, in any other location where
water, oil or explosive gases may be present, are to have an impervious sheath.
(2) Cables fitted where they are likely to suffer from mechanical damages are to be metal armoured
except where effective metallic casings or non-metallic casings are provided or except where
approved by this Society. 【See Guidance】
3. Fire safety 【See Guidance】
Except special types of cables such as radio frequency cables, cables are to be satisfied with the
required characteristic of flame retardant or fire resisting type.

32 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

503. Current rating of cable

1. Maximum continuous load
The highest continuous load carried by a cable is not to exceed its current rating specified in Par
5. The diversity factor of the individual load may be allowed for in estimating the maximum con-
tinuous load.
2. Voltage drop 【See Guidance】
The voltage drop from the main or emergency switch board busbars to any electrical installation,
except for navigation lights, is not to exceed 6  of the rated voltage of the installation, when the
cables are carrying maximum load current under normal condition of service. For supplies from bat-
teries of voltage not exceeding 24 volts, the voltage drop may be increased to 10  .
3. Estimation of lighting load
In assessing the current rating of lighting circuits every lamp holder is to be assessed at the max-
imum load likely to be connected to it, with a minimum of 60 watts, unless the fitting is so con-
structed as to take only a lamp rated at less than 60 watts.
4. Short-time load
Where the motors used for cargo winches, windlasses and capstans are short time duty the current
rating of the cables may be allowed to be increased according to their duty.
5. Current rating of cables
The current rating of cables is to comply with the following (1) to (5).
(1) Current rating of cables for continuous services
The current rating of cables for continuous services is not to exceed the values given in Table
6.1.12.
(2) Correction factor of ambient temperature
Where the ambient temperature is different from that specified in (1) above, the current rating
of cables is to be calculated by multiplying the correction factor given in Table 6.1.13.
(3) Current rating of cables for short-time services
The current rating of cables for short-time services (30 minutes or 60 minutes) is to be calcu-
lated by multiplying the value given in Table 6.1.12 by the following correction factor.



correction factor : 

 
  exp 
ㆍ
where,
 : 30 or 60 ( minute )
 : overall diameter of the finished cable ( mm )
(4) Current rating of cables for intermittent services
The current rating of cables for intermittent services (for periods of 10 minutes, of which 4 mi-
nutes are with a constant load and 6 minutes without load) is to be calculated by multiplying the
value given in Table 6.1.12 by the following correction factor.

  

  exp  
ㆍ
correction factor : 

  exp  

ㆍ 
where,
 : overall diameter of the finished cable ( mm )
(5) Where more than 6 cables belonging to the same circuit are bunched together, a correction fac-
tor of 0.85 is to be applied.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 33

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.12 Current Rating of Cables (for continuous services) (2020)

(Based on ambient temperature 45℃)

Current rating (  )

Ethylene propylene rubber,

High modulus or hard grade
ethylene propylene rubber,
Cross-linked polyethylene,
Nominal Halogen free ethylene
Silicon rubber,
sectional propylene rubber,
Halogen-free silicone rubber
area of High modulus or hard grade
insulation
conductor Halogen-free ethylene propylene rubber,
(95℃)
( mm ) Halogen-free
cross-linked polyethylene,
Cross-linked polyolefin for halogen-free cables
insulation
(90℃)

1 core 2 core 3 core 1 core 2 core 3 core

1 18 15 13 20 17 14
1.5 23 20 16 24 20 17
2.5 30 26 21 32 27 22
4 40 34 28 42 36 29
6 52 44 36 55 47 39

10 72 61 50 75 64 53
16 96 82 67 100 85 70
25 127 108 89 135 115 95
35 157 133 110 165 140 116

50 196 167 137 200 170 140

70 242 206 169 255 217 179
95 293 249 205 310 264 217
120 339 288 237 360 306 252

150 389 331 272 410 349 287

185 444 377 311 470 400 329
240 - - - - - -
300 - - - - - -

Table 6.1.13 Correction Factor for Various Ambient Temperature

Maximum rated Ambient temperature

conductor
temperature of insulation 35℃ 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃ 65℃ 70℃ 75℃ 80℃ 85℃

60℃ 1.29 1.15 1.00 0.82 - - - - - - -

65℃ 1.22 1.12 1.00 0.87 0.71 - - - - - -
70℃ 1.18 1.10 1.00 0.89 0.77 0.63 - - - - -
75℃ 1.15 1.08 1.00 0.91 0.82 0.71 0.58 - - - -
80℃ 1.13 1.07 1.00 0.93 0.85 0.76 0.65 0.53 - - -
85℃ 1.12 1.06 1.00 0.94 0.87 0.79 0.71 0.61 0.50 - -
90℃ 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.94 0.88 0.82 0.74 0.67 0.58 0.47 -
95℃ 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.89 0.84 0.77 0.71 0.63 0.55 0.45

34 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

504. Installation of cables 【See Guidance】

1. General
Cable runs are to be, as far as possible, straight and accessible.
2. Expansion joints
The installation of cables across expanding parts in the ship′s structure is, as far as possible to be
avoided. Where this is not practicable a loop of cable of length proportional to the expansion of
the part is to be provided. The internal radius of the loop is to be at least 12 times the external
diameter of the cable.
3. Precaution against fire protection
(1) Where cables are installed in bunches and the risk of fire propagation is considered high, special
precautions are to be taken in cable installation to prevent fire propagation.
(2) Cables and wiring serving essential or emergency power, lighting, internal communications or
signals are to be so far as practicable routed clear of galleys, laundries, machinery spaces of
category A and their casings and other high fire risk areas. Cables connecting fire pumps to the
emergency switchboard are to be of a fire resistant type where they pass through high fire risk
areas. Where practicable all such cables are to be run in such a manner as to preclude their
being rendered unserviceable by heating of the bulkheads that may be caused by a fire in an
adjacent space.
(3) Where cables for services required to be operable under fire conditions including their power
supplies pass through high fire risk areas, and in addition for passenger ships, main vertical fire
zones, other than those which they serve, they are to be so arranged that a fire in any of these
areas or zones does not affect the operation of the service in any other area or zone.
4. Bunching
Cables having insulating materials with different maximum rated conductor temperature are not to
be bunched together, or, where this is not practicable, the cables are to be operated so that no ca-
ble reaches a temperature higher than that permitted for the lowest temperature-rated cable in the
group.
5. Protection covering
Cables having a protective covering which may damage the covering of other cables are not to be
bunched with those other cables.
6. Maximum internal radius of bend
When cables are to be installed bent, the minimum internal radius of bend is to be not less than
the following values:
(1) 6 d for rubber and PVC insulated cables with metal covering.
(2) 4 d for rubber and PVC insulated cables without metal covering.
(3) 4 d for mineral insulated cables.
(d = overall diameter of cable)
7. Cables in refrigerated spaces
Cables are not to be installed in refrigerated spaces, as far as possible. Where cables are un-
avoidably installed in the spaces, however, the following requirements are to be observed.
(1) PVC insulated cables are not to be used.
(2) Cables are to have a lead sheath or cold-resisting impervious sheath.
(3) Cables are not to be, as a rule, embedded in structural heat insulation.
(4) Where cables must pass through structural heat insulation, they are to be installed at a right
angle to such insulation and are to be protected by a pipe, preferably fitted with a watertight
stuffing tube at each end.
(5) Cables are to be installed with ample space from ceilings, side walls or the face of air duct
casings and are to be supported by plating, hangers or cleats.
(6) Supporting strips, plating or hangers used for securing the cable are to be galvanized or other-
wise protected against corrosion.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 35

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

505. Mechanical protection of cables

1. Cables in cargo holds
Cables in cargo holds and other space where there is exceptional risk of mechanical damage are to
be suitably protected even if they are armoured, except where approved by this Society.
2. Mechanical protection of cables
Metal casings for mechanical protection of cables are to be efficiently protected against corrosion.
3. Non-metallic ducts or conduits
Non-metallic duct or conduit is to be of flame-retardant material. PVC conduit is not to be used in
refrigerated spaces or on open decks.

506. Earthing
1. Earthing of metallic coverings of cables 【See Guidance】
Metal coverings of cables are to be effectively earthed at both ends, provided that in final sub-cir-
cuits earthing may be at the supply end only.
2. Electrical continuity of metallic coverings of cables
Effective means are to be taken to ensure that all metallic coverings of cables are made electrically
continuous throughout their length.
3. Lead sheath
The lead sheath of lead-sheated cables is not to be used as the sole means of earthing the
non-current carrying metal parts of items of equipment.

507. Securing of cables

1. General
Cables are to be effectively secured, except cables for portable appliances and those installed in
pipes, conduits or special casings.
2. Supporting and fixing distance for cables
Supporting and fixing distance for cables are not to be more than the values given in Table 6.1.14.

Table 6.1.14 Supporting and Fixing Distance for Cables (2018)

Cable run Cable run space Supporting distance ( cm ) Fixing distance ( cm )
Vertical run All space 40 40
Cable run in exposed space 40 40
Horizontal run Cable run in space except
40 *90
exposed space
(NOTE)
* In case where the cables are not laid on a hanger, etc., the Fixing distance is not to be more
than 40 cm

3. Clips, supports and accessories 【See Guidance】

(1) Clips are to be robust and are to be those by which cables are effectively secured without any
damage on coverings of the cables.
(2) Clips, supports and accessories are to be of corrosion-resistant material or to be suitably treated
to prevent corrosion.
(3) Clips and supports of non-metallic materials are to be flame-retardant.
(4) When cables secured by clips of non-metallic materials are not laid on top of horizontal cable

36 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

trays or supports, special considerations are to be given to prevent the release of cables during
a fire.
4. Cable trays/protective casings made of plastic materials
(1) Installation requirements
Cable trays/protective casings made of plastic materials are to be supplemented by metallic fix-
ing and straps such that in the event of a fire they, and the cables affixed, are prevented from
falling and causing an injury to personnel and/or an obstruction to any escape route. When plas-
tic cable trays/protective casings are used on open deck, they are additionally to be protected
against UV light. "Plastic" means both thermoplastic and thermosetting plastic materials with or
without reinforcement, such as PVC and fibre reinforced plastics - FRP. "Protective casing"
means a closed cover in the form of a pipe or other closed ducts of non-circular shape.
(2) Safety working load
The load on the cable trays/protective casings is to be within the safe working load (SWL). The
support spacing is not to exceed the spacing at the SWL test. In general the spacing is not to
exceed 2 meters. The selection and spacing of cable tray/protective casing supports are to take
into account:
(A) Cable trays/protective casings' dimensions
(B) Mechanical and physical properties of their material
(C) Mass of cable trays/protective casings
(D) Loads due weight of cables, external forces, thrust forces and vibrations
(E) Maximum accelerations to which the system may be subjected
(F) Combination of loads
(3) Cable occupation ratio in protective casing
The sum of the cables' total cross-sectional area, based on the cables' external diameter, is not
to exceed 40% of the protective casing's internal cross-sectional area. This does not apply to a
single cable in a protective casing.

508. Penetration of bulkheads and decks

1. Penetration through bulkheads and decks 【See Guidance】
Where cables pass through bulkheads and decks which are required to have some degree of tight-
ness, they are to be so constructed as to ensure that the strength and tightness are not impaired.
2. Penetration through fireproof bulkheads and decks 【See Guidance】
Where cables pass through bulkheads and decks which are required to have some degree of fire
integrity, they are to be so constructed as to ensure that the fire integrity is not impaired.
3. Bushing
Where cables pass through non-watertight bulkheads or steel structures, the holes are to be bush-
ed with lead or other suitable materials in order to avoid damage to cables. If the thickness of the
steel is sufficient, adequately round edges may be accepted as the equivalent of bushing.

509. Metallic pipes and conduits

1. General
Metallic pipe or conduits are to be effectively earthed and are to be mechanically and electrically
continuous across joints.
2. Internal radius of bend
The internal radius of bend of pipes and conduits is to be in accordance with the requirement in
504. 6. Where, however, pipes exceed 64 mm in outside diameter, the internal radius of bend is
not to be less than twice the outside diameter of the pipe.
3. Cable occupation ratio in pipe
The sum of the cables' total cross-sectional area, based on the cables' external diameter, is not to
exceed 40% of the pipe's internal cross-sectional area. This does not apply to a single cable in a
pipe.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 37

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

4. Drainage
Horizontal pipes or conduits are to have suitable drainage.
5. Expansion joints (2022)
When expansion joints are installed, the expansion and compression possibility of pipes for cables shall
be at least ±10mm for every 10m section length from the fixing point.
6. Cable protection in metallic pipes and conduits (2018)
When metallic pipes and conduits for cable are installed vertically, cable inside of the metallic pipes
and conduits is to be suitably supported in order to prevent cable damage due to the cable weight
within the metallic pipes and conduits (e.g. sand filling). Alternatively, the cable inside of the vertical
metallic pipes and conduits may be accepted without provided support if the mechanical strength of
the cable is sufficient to prevent cable damage due to the cable weight within the metallic pipes
and conduits.
7. Cable protection in tanks (2018)
Where cables are installed in liquid tanks, cables are to be installed in metallic pipes and conduits
with all joints welded and with effective corrosion protection.

510. Cables for alternating current

Where it is necessary to use single-core cables for alternating current circuits rated in excess of
20A, the following requirements are to be complied with:
(1) Cables are to be either non-armoured or armoured with non-magnetic material.
(2) Where installed in pipe or conduit, cables belong to the same circuit are to be installed in the
same pipe or conduit.
(3) Cable clips are to include cables of all phases of a circuit unless the clips are of non-magnetic
material.
(4) Where two or three single-core cables forming respectively single-phase circuits or three-phase
circuits are installed, the cables are to be in contact with one another as far as possible. In any
event, the distance between adjacent cables is not to be greater than the diameter of the cable.
(5) If single-core cables of current rating greater than 250 A are to run along steel bulkheads, wher-
ever practicable, the cables should be spaced as far away from the steel bulkheads as possible.
【See Guidance】
(6) Where single-core cables of large cross section and exceeding 30 m in length are used, the
phase are to be transposed at regular intervals of approximately 15 m in order to balance the
impedances of circuits. 【See Guidance】
(7) In case of circuits involving two or more single-core cables in parallel per phase, all cables are
to have the same length and the same cross-section.
(8) Magnetic material is not to be placed between single-core cables of a group. Where cables
pass through steel plates, all cables of the same circuit are to pass through a plate or gland of
non-magnetic material and the space between the cables and the magnetic material is not to be
less than 75 mm wherever practicable.

511. Joints and branch circuits

1. Cable splices
Cable splice is to be made of fire resistant replacement insulation equivalent in electrical and ther-
mal properties to the original insulation. The replacement jacket is to be at least equivalent to the
original impervious sheath and is to assure a watertight splice. Splices are to be made using the
splice kit, which is to contain the following:
(1) Connector of correct size and number
(2) Replacement insulation
(3) Replacement jacket
(4) Instructions for use
All cable splices are to be type approved before use.

38 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

2. Installation of cable splices 【See Guidance】

No splice is permitted in hazardous areas, except for cables of intrinsically safe circuits. Neither is
splice permitted in propulsion cables. Where permitted, the following installation details are to be
complied with:
(1) All splices are to be made after the cables are in place and are to be in locations accessible for
inspection.
(2) The conductor splice is to be made using a pressure type butt connector.
(3) Armored cables having splices are not required to have the armor replaced, provided that the ar-
mor is made electrically continuous.
(4) Splices are to be so arranged that mechanical stresses are not carried by the splice.
3. Cable junction boxes
Live parts within the junction box are to be provided with suitable clearances and creepage dis-
tances, or with shielding by flame retarding insulation material. Junction boxes having compartments
for different voltage levels are to have each compartment appropriately identified as to its rated
voltage. Cables within the junction boxes are to be well supported so as not to put stress on the
cable contacts.
4. Installation of cable junction boxes
Junction boxes are not to be used in propulsion cables, however. Where permitted, the following
installation details are to be complied with:
(1) Junction boxes are to be in locations accessible for inspection.
(2) For low voltage systems(up to 1 kV AC), each voltage level is to be provided with its own
junction box or separated by physical barriers within the same junction box. For high voltage
systems (> 1 kV ), a separate junction box is to be used for each of the voltage levels.
(3) Emergency circuits and normal circuits are not to share the same junction box.
(4) Armored cables are to have their armoring made electrically continuous.
(5) Cables arranged for connection at a junction box are to be well-supported and fastened so that
conductor contacts are not subjected to undue stress.
5. Cable termination
Cables stripped of moisture-resistant insulation are to be sealed against the admission of moisture
by methods such as taping in combination with insulating compound or sealing devices. Cable con-
ductors for connection to terminals are to be fitted with crimp lugs of corresponding current rating,
or equivalent. Soldered lugs are permitted for conductors up to 2.5 mm only. Cables are to be se-
cured to the terminal box or other sturdy structure in such a manner that stresses are not trans-
mitted to the terminal. Where applicable, other properties of the cable, e.g., flame retarding, fire re-
sistant, etc. are to be retained through to the terminal box.

512. Testing and inspection 【See Guidance】

Cables are to be in compliance with the requirements 103. 1 to 6.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 39

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 6 Transformers for Power and Lighting

601. General
1. Application
Transformers rated at 1 kVA or more for single phase and at 5 kVA or more for three-phase are
to comply with the requirements of this Section.

602. Construction
1. Transformers in accommodation spaces 【See Guidance】
Transformers in accommodation spaces are to be of dry, naturally cooled type. In machinery spaces
they may be of oil-immersed, naturally cooled type.
2. Windings of transformers
Complete insulation is to be made between primary windings and secondary windings of trans-
formers except those for motor starting.
3. Oil-immersed transformers rated at 10 kVA or more
Oil-immersed transformers rated at 10 kVA or more are to be provided with oil gauges and means
for drainage, and when rated at 75 kVA or more with thermometers in addition.
4. Precautions against short-circuit current
All transformers are to be capable of withstanding the thermal and mechanical effects without dam-
age, when carrying with short-circuit current for 2 seconds while in use.

603. Temperature rise

The temperature rise of transformers is not to exceed the values given in Table 6.1.15 during con-
tinuous operation at rated output. Where, however, the ambient temperature is not more than 40 ℃ ,
the table values may be increased by the amount of difference.

Table 6.1.15 Limit of Temperature Rise of Transformers

(Based on ambient temperature 45 ℃ )

Limit of temperature rise ( ℃ )

Part Measuring Class A Class E Class B Class F Class H
method insulation insulation insulation insulation insulation
Dry type Resistance
55 70 75 95 120
transformer method
Windings Oil-immerse
Resistance
d 60 - - - -
method
transformer
Thermometer
Oil 45
method
Thermometer
Core Temperature not injurious to insulation
method

604. Voltage regulation

The voltage regulation of transformers is not to exceed the following values at full load and 100 
power factor.
Single phase 5 kVA or more and three-phase 15 kVA or more : 2.5 
Single phase less than 5 kVA and three-phase less than 15 kVA : 5 

40 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

605. Testing and inspection

1. General 【See Guidance】
Transformers are to meet the requirements of this Section in their construction and are to be test-
ed in accordance with the requirements of the following Paragraph. However, the test required
by Par 2 may be omitted subject to the Society's permission for each transformer which is pro-
duced in series having identical type with its first unit tested in the presence of the Surveyor.
2. Temperature test
The temperature rises of transformers under the rated full load are not to exceed the values given
in 603.
3. Voltage regulation test 【See Guidance】
Transformers are to be subjected to the voltage regulation test and comply with the requirements
of 604. except that it may also be obtained by calculation.
4. High voltage test
After the temperature test, transformers are to withstand the test voltage by applying a.c. 1000 V
plus twice the maximum line voltage of commercial frequency between windings and between
windings and earth for 1 minute. The test voltage in this test is to be at least 1500 V .
5. Induced high voltage test
Transformers are to withstand for the duration of the test expressed by the following formula, when
twice the normal voltage is induced on the winding at any frequency between 100 and 500 Hz , but
the duration of the test is to be at least for 15 seconds and not over 60 seconds.

2 × Rated frequency
Testing time (second) = 60 × -------------------------------
Test frequency

6. Insulation resistance test

Before and after the high voltage test, the insulation resistance test for all current-carrying parts
are to be carried out and minimum values are to be given in the following.

Minimum insulation
Rated voltage  ( V ) Minimum test voltage ( V )
resistance ( M )
 ≤ 250 2 × 
1
250 <  ≤ 1,000 500
1,000 <  ≤ 7,200 1,000 
 
7,200 <  ≤ 15,000 5,000 

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 41

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 7 Controlgears for Motors and Magnetic Brakes

701. Construction
1. General
(1) Controlgears for motors are to be of durable construction and provided with efficient means of
starting, stopping, reversing and speed controlling of motors together with essential safety
devices.
(2) Controlgears for motors are to have suitable protective enclosures depending on their locations
and to be so constructed that operators can safely handle them.
(3) Where intrinsically safe electrical appliances are built in controlgears for motors, they are to be
arranged in compliance with the requirements in 902. 3 (3) and the wires for intrinsically safe
circuits are to be speparated from those for other circuits, and to be shielded electrically if
necessary. Suitable measures are to be taken to identify the wires for intrinsically safe circuits
easily.
2. Grouped starters
(1) In case where controlgears for motors of essential services which are to be provided in duplicate
are built in a grouped starter panel, the busbars, appliances and others are to be so arranged
that one fault on the appliances or the circuits do not render the motors for the same use un-
usable simultaneously.
(2) Transformers for power supply to control circuits are to be provided for each motor or each
group of motors incorporated in an apparatus.
3. Wearing parts of controlgears for motors
All wearing parts of controlgears for motors are to be readily accessible for inspection and
maintenance.
4. Control-gears for motors above 0.5 kW
Motors above 0.5 kW are to be provided with the following control apparatus :
(1) Means to prevent undesired restarting after a stoppage due to low voltage or complete loss of
voltage. This does not apply to motors, the continuous availability of which is essential to the
safety of the ship and the automatically operated motors.
(2) Efficient means of isolation are to be provided so that all voltage may be cut off from the mo-
tor, except that where means of isolation (that provided at the switchboard, section board, dis-
tribution board, etc.) are adjacent to the motor.
(3) Means for automatic disconnection of the supply are to be provided in the event of excess cur-
rent due to mechanical overloading of the motor. This does not apply to steering motors.
5. Magnetic contactors and overcurrent relays for motors 【See Guidance】
(1) Magnetic contactors are to be in compliance with the requirements in Sec 8.
(2) Overcurrent relays for motors are to have suitable characteristics in relation to the thermal ca-
pacities of motors.
6. Local/Remote selector switch (2017)
A local/remote selector switch is to be implemented at the motor starter for all primary and
secondary essential services when remote control is arranged from a computer based system and
for all primary essential services when remote control is arranged from outside of the engine room.

702. Temperature rise

The temperature rises of controlgears for motors are not to exceed the values given in Table 6.1.16
under the specified currents and rated voltage, except where required in the relevant Sections of
this Chapter.

703. Emergency stopping apparatus 【See Guidance】

Means are to be provided for stopping the motors of forced and induced draft fans, oil fuel transfer
pumps, oil fuel unit pumps, lubricating oil service pumps, thermal oil circulating pumps, oil separa-

42 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

tors(purifiers) and cargo pumps from accessible position outside the space where the motors are in-
stalled in case of fire in the space or in the vicinity thereof. But, each separate emergency stop
control circuits of ventilators are to be provided for machinery space and other spaces.

704. Starters for steering motors

1. Starters for steering motors are to be of low-voltage release type and arranged in such a way that
the steering motors are re-started automatically and safely when electric power is restored after a
power failure.
2. Running indicators and overload alarms for steering motors are to be provided in accordance with
the relevant requirements in Pt 5, Ch 7.

705. Magnetic brakes

1. Magnetic brakes of waterproof type motors
Electrical parts of magnetic brakes applied for waterproof type motors are to be waterproof
construction.
2. d.c. shunt-wound brakes and d.c. compound-wound brakes
d.c. shunt-wound brakes are to operate satisfactorily at 85  of rated voltage at working temper-
ature, and d.c compound-wound brakes at the same conditions as above are to be operated sat-
isfactorily at 85  of starting current.
3. d.c. series-wound brakes
d.c. series-wound brakes are to release down at a current not less than 40  of full-load current
and in every case at the starting current, and are to set at a current 10  or less of full-load
current.
4. a.c. magnetic brakes
a.c. magnetic brakes are to be in accordance with the following requirements :
(1) a.c. magnetic brakes are to be operated satisfactorily at 80  of rated voltage at working
temperature.
(2) a.c. magnetic brakes are not to be noisy due to magnetic action in the working condition.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 43

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.16 Limit of Temperature Rise of Controlgears for Motors

(Based on ambient temperature rise 45 ℃ )

Limit of temperature rise ( ℃ )

Item and part Thermometer Resistance
method method

Class A insulation 60 80
Class E insulation 75 95
Class B insulation 85 105
Class F insulation 110 130
Class H insulation 135 155
Class C insulation no limit no limit
Coils
(air) Class A insulation 80 -
Class E insulation 95 -
Class B insulation 105 -
Single layer
enamel windings Class F insulation 130 -
Class H insulation 155 -

Class C insulation no limit -

Copper or
40 -
Continuous use copper alloy
over 8 hours Silver or silver
70 -
alloy
Mass form
Contact Copper or
Switch on & off 60 -
piece copper alloy
one time or more
in about 8 hours Silver or silver
70 -
alloy

Copper or
Multilayer form or knife form 35 -
copper alloy

Busbar and connecting conductor

60 -
(Bare or Class A insulation and higher)

Terminals for external cables 45 -

Moulded-case type 245 -
For continuous use 295 -
Metallic
Those other than
resistor For intermittent use 345 -
moulded-case type
s
For starter use 345 -

Exhaust (approx. 25 mm above exhaust port) 170 -

(NOTES)
1. Measurement of temperature of voltage coil is in principle to be made by resistance method only.
2. Where the insulation of single layer enamel windings is higher in class than that of the adjacent parts,
the temperature rise associated with the class of insulation for the adjacent parts is to be applied.
3. For single layer bare windings, the temperature rise associated with the class of insulating material on
the adjacent part is to be applied.
4. Moulded-case type metallic resistor means such a type as to be buried in the insulating material so as
no surface of metallic resistor being exposed.

44 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

706. Clearance and creepage distances of control appliances 【See Guidance】

The clearance and creepage distances of control appliances (e.g., contactors, rheostats, control
switches, limit switches, protection and control relays for motors, terminal boards, incorporating
semi-conductors and their combinations) are to comply with the following requirements in (1) and
(2) depending on the degree of protection of enclosures of the appliances or the atmosphere in
which the appliances are installed.
(1) The minimum clearance and creepage distances of control appliances (e.g., electromagnetic con-
tactors, control switches, terminal boards) are not to be less than the values given in Table
6.1.17 if the appliances are designed and constructed in consideration of the moisture, dust, etc.
or are operated in the ambient condition not accompanying the extremely high humidity and
heavy deposit of dusts.

Table 6.1.17 Minimum Clearance and Creepage Distances for Control Appliances

Clearance ( mm ) 
Creepage ( mm )
15 A or
15 A or over Less
Rated insulating Less than Exceeding over and Exceeding
and 63 A or than
voltage ( V ) 15 A  63 A   63 A or 63 A 
under  15 A 
(d.c. & a.c.) under
           
(1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2)      

Not exceeding 60 2 3 2 3 3 5 2 3 2 3 3 4
Exceeding 60 and 250 or under 3 5 4 5 5 6 3 4 6 6 6 8
Exceeding 250 and 380 or under 4 6 4 6 6 8 4 6 6 6 6 10
Exceeding 380 and 500 or under 6 8 6 8 8 10 6 10 6 10 8 12
Exceeding 500 and 660 or under 6 8 6 8 8 10 8 12 8 12 10 14
Exceeding 660 10 14 10 14 10 14 10 14 10 14 14 20
(NOTES) (1) to (5) marked in this Table are as follows
(1) "    " applies to clearances between bare live parts and between live part and earthed metal part.
(2) "    " applies to clearance between live part and metal part which accidentally becomes dangerous.
(3) Creepage distance is to be determined by type and shape of insulation. "  " applies to ceramic in-
sulator(steatite and porcelain), and comparable other insulator which is particularly safe against leaked elec-
tricity provided with ribbed construction or vertical partitions proved to be equally effective as ceramic in-
sulator through experiments having a tracking index greater than 140V e.g., phenol resins formed items. "
 " applies to other insulation materials.
(4) In case where "    " is greater than the corresponding creepage "  " or "  " the creepage distances be-
tween live parts and insulated metals which operator may readilly touch and which becomes live parts by
the deterioration of insulation are to be "    " or more.
(5) Current value is to ve expressed by the rated current-carrying value.

(2) The clearance and creepage distances of small control appliances of 15 A or less in rating cur-
rent may be shortened to the values as deemed appropriate by the Society, depending on the
degree of protection of enclosures of the appliances or the ambient condition in which the appli-
ances are installed, notwithstanding the requirements in (1) above.
(3) The requirements of above (1) and (2) are not applied to the following items :
(a) Spark gaps.
(b) Appliances used in secondary windings of induction motors.
(c) Oil-immersed appliances.
(d) Pilot lamp fittings and sockets.
(e) Small switches in living quarters.
(f) The sealed portion of the appliances which are of sealed construction.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 45

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

707. Testing and inspection

1. General 【See Guidance】
Controlgears for motors are to meet the requirements of this Section in their construction and are
to be tested in accordance with the requirements of th following Pars 2 to 5. However, the test
required by Par 2 may be omitted subject to the Society′s permission for each controlgear which is
produced in series having identical type with its first unit tested in the presence of Surveyor.
2. Temperature test
Controlgears for motors are to be subjected to the temperature test under normal working condition,
and than the temperature rise is not to exceed the values given in 702.
3. Operation test
Operation of instruments, switching gears, protective devices, etc. for controlgears for motors are to
be confirmed.
4. High voltage test 【See Guidance】
Controlgears with components are to withstand the high voltage by applying the following voltage at
commercial frequency for 1 minute between all current-carrying parts of switching gears including
control devices and earth and between poles or phases. Instruments and auxiliary apparatus may
be disconnected during the high voltage test.
Rated voltage of 60 V or less : 500 V
Rated voltage exceeding 60 V : 1,000 V + twice the rated voltage (minimum 1,500 V )
5. Insulation resistance test
Immediately after the high voltage test, the insulation resistance between all current-carrying parts
and earth and between the current-carrying parts of poles or phases are not to be less than 1
megohm when tested with direct current voltage of at least 500 V .

46 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 8 Fuses, Circuit-breakers and Electromagnetic Contactors

801. General 【See Guidance】

Fuses, circuit-breakers and electromagnetic contactors are to comply with Korean Industrial
Standards or equivalent thereto, and in addition, they are also to comply with the requirements of
this Section.

802. Fuse
1. General (2018)
(1) The terms and definitions, related to fuses, according to IEC 60269-1 are to apply.
2. Construction
(1) Fuses are to be of enclosed type and the construction is to be such that its enclosure is not
broken nor burnt and the adjacent insulation is not deteriorated by flowing of fused metal or
emitting of gases, when the fuse element has blown out.
(2) Fuses are to be easily exchangeable for their spare parts without the risk of getting electric
shock or burn on setting fuses in and out.
(3) Each fuse is to be clearly indicated of its rated voltage and rated current, and in addition rated
breaking capacity, fusing characteristics and current-limiting characteristics according to its kind.
Such indication may be made in terms of value or symbol.
(4) Fuse elements are to be of a totally enclosed type and allow no arc ejection to the outside,
sparking, or any other harmful effect upon the adjacent parts in the case the fuse blows. (2018)
(5) Fuse elements are to be made of incombustible and non-hygroscopic insulating material. (2018)
3. Performance
(1) The temperature rise on the connecting terminals of cables is not to exceed 45 ℃ , when the
fuses and fuse-holders has been fitted up to the normal working condition and 100  of the
rated current is carried thereon.
(2) Fuses are to have the fusing characteristics corresponding to their kind, and under the circuit
conditions specified in the standards referred to in 801., they are to be capable of breaking se-
curely all currents whichever is below the rated breaking capacity and above the fusing current.
(3) Type testing conditions, namely those concerned with ambient air temperature, humidity, salt
mist and vibration level, are to comply with the requirements of IEC 60269-2, IEC 60068-2 and
IEC 60721-3 as applicable. These environmental operating conditions aim at reflecting the higher
ambient air temperature, higher humidity and the presence of salt mist, all degrading factors
with influence in the behaviour of a fuse link. (2018)
(4) The system voltage, the currents to be carried and to be broken, the rated frequency and the
power factor for AC systems, or the time constant for DC systems are to comply with IEC
60269-1 as applicable. (2018)

803. Circuit-breakers
1. Construction
(1) Circuit-breakers are to be of trip-free type and depending upon the field of their application, the
trip attachments are to have a time-delay or an instantaneous overcurrent trip feature or both of
them.
(2) The main contacts of the circuit-breakers are to be such as to have no undue burning and
pitting. Arcing contacts except those of the moulded-case circuit-breakers are easily renewable.
(3) Instantaneous overcurrent trip devices are to be provided in each pole of the circuit-breakers
and are to be so constructed as to be capable of tripping them directly by short-circuit current.
(4) Circuit-breakers are to be such that no accidental opening and closing occur due to the vibration
of a ship, and furthermore, no malfunction is caused by the list of an angle of 30° in any
direction.
(5) The fused circuit-breakers of moulded-case type are to be so constructed that single phasing
does not occur in the event of blowing of fuses and that the fuses can be replaced easily with-
out the risk of accidental touch to their live-parts.
(6) Each circuit-breaker is to be clearly indicated of its rated voltage and rated current, and in addi-
tion rated breaking capacity, rated making current and rated short-time current according to its

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 47

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

kind. Each time-delay overcurrent trip device is to be indicated of its operating characteristics,
except the moulded-case circuit-breakers.
2. Performance
(1) The temperature rise on the connecting terminals of cables is not to exceed 45°C when 100 %
of the rated current is carried thereon.
(2) All circuit-breakers are, according to their kind, to be such as to be able to securely break the
overcurrent not more than the rated breaking capacity and safely make the circuit to carry the
current not more than the rated making current under the circuit conditions specified in the
standards referred to in 801.
(3) The time-delay overcurrent trip devices of circuit-breakers for generator circuits are to be such
that the readjustment of the current setting does not cause remarkable change to the time-de-
lay feature.
(4) The characteristics of the time-delay overcurrent trip devices are not to be affected excessively
by ambient temperature.

804. Electromagnetic contactors

1. Construction
(1) Electromagnetic contactors are to be such that no accidental opening and closing occur due to
the vibration of a ship, and furthermore, no malfunction is caused by the list of an angle of 30°
in any direction.
(2) The contact pieces and magnetic coils are to be readily replaceable.
(3) Each electromagnetic contactor is to be clearly indicated of its rated voltage, rated current, rated
voltage of magnetic coil, interruption current capacity and closed circuit current capacity. Such
indication may be made in terms of value or symbol.
2. Performance
(1) The temperature rise on each part of electromagnetic contactor is not to exceed the values
specified in 702. when current-carrying is made continuously with the full load current corre-
sponding to the rated capacity supplied to the main contacts and with the rated voltage applied
to the magnetic coil.
(2) Electromagnetic contactors are to have a suitable interruption current capacity and closed-circuit
current capacity depending on their application.

805. Testing and inspection

Fuses, circuit-breakers and electromagnetic contactors are to be in compliance with the require-
ments in 103. 1 to 6.

48 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 9 Explosion-protected Electrical Equipment

901. General
1. Applicable standards
Explosion-protected electrical equipments is to comply with (KS C ) IEC 60079 or equivalent stand-
ards and they are to comply with the requirements in this Section.
2. The kind of explosion-protected construction
The explosion-protected construction used for electrical equipment on board ships is to be selected
from the followings.
(1) Flameproof type (Ex-d)
(2) Intrinsically safe type
(A) Category 'ia' intrinsically safe type (Ex-ia)
(B) Category 'ib' intrinsically safe type (Ex-ib)
(3) Increased safety type (Ex-e)
(4) Pressurized protected type (Ex-p)
(5) Powder filling type (Ex-q)
(6) Oil immersion type (Ex-o)
(7) Encapsulation type (Ex-m)
(8) Non-sparking type (Ex-n)
3. Selection of electrical equipment according to zones
Electrical equipment for use in hazardous areas is to be selected from the followings.
(1) Zone 0
(A) Category 'ia' intrinsically safe type (Ex-ia)
(2) Zone 1
(A) Electrical equipment permitted within zone 0
(B) Flameproof type (Ex-d)
(C) Intrinsically safe type (Ex-i)
(D) Increased safety type (Ex-e)
(E) Pressurized protected type (Ex-p)
(F) Powder filling type (Ex-q)
(G) Oil immersion type (Ex-o)
(H) Encapsulation type (Ex-m)
(3) Zone 2
(A) Electrical equipment permitted within zone 0 and zone 1
(B) Non-sparking type (Ex-n)
4. Selection of electrical equipment according to the maximum surface temperature
(1) The electrical equipment is to be so selected that its maximum surface temperature will not
reach the ignition temperature of any gas, vapour or dust which may be present. Maximum sur-
face temperature according to temperature class of electrical equipment is as following table.

Maximum surface
Temperature class
temperature ℃
T1 450
T2 300
T3 200
T4 135
T5 100
T6 85

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 49

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

5. Materials
(1) Materials for explosion-protected construction are to have an adequate electrical, mechanical,
thermal and chemical resistance against the environmental condition and flammable gases or va-
pours (hereinafter referred to as "gases" at the location of the electrical equipment concerned.
(2) Enclosures and outer fittings of portable appliances are to be of material which minimizes the
risk of spark by friction, or to have a non-metallic strong cover with hanging strap. 【See Guidance】
(3) Insulating compounds and sealing compounds used for integral parts of explosion-protected con-
struction are to be such that no harmful expansion, contraction, softening or crack is found dur-
ing in service. And the insulating compounds applied to bare live-parts are to be
flame-retardant.
6. Construction 【See Guidance】
(1) The glazed ports of lighting fittings and the inspection windows of other electrical apparatus of
flameproof type, increased safety type and pressurized protected type are, as a rule, to be pro-
vided with robust metallic guards.
(2) In case where a gasket is used with a view to give watertightness to the explosion protected
electrical equipment installed on weather decks and other similar spaces, the gasket is to be so
fitted as not to impair the explosion-proof characteristics due to its deterioration or breakage.
(3) The leading-in part of cables is to be of a construction suitable for ship cables. Consideration is
to be given so that the cables can be surely fixed at the leading-in part, except where the ca-
bles are installed in steel conduits.
(4) Electrical equipment associated with intrinsically safe circuits and located in dangerous spaces
are in principle to be of totally enclosed construction.
(5) Explosion-protected electrical equipment is to be clearly indicated of its type and the kind of
gases for which the equipment is designed. And the lighting fittings are also to be indicated of
the kind of lighting bulb applicable thereto and its wattage.
7. Simple apparatus 【See Guidance】
Where simple apparatus, non-energy storing(e.g., passive switch), are used in an intrinsically safe
circuit, simple apparatus may be accepted as explosion-protected construction. However, in this
case, the simple apparatus is to be in accordance with the relevant requirements in IEC 60079-11
or 60079-14.

902. Special requirements 【See Guidance】

Explosion-protected electrical equipment for each explosion-protected construction specified in 901.
2 is to be as deemed appropriate by the Society.

903. Testing and inspection

Explosion-protected electrical equipment is to be in compliance with the requirements in 103. 1 to 6.

50 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 10 Lighting Fittings, Heating Appliances, Wiring Accessories and

Miscellaneous Equipment

1001. General 【See Guidance】

Lighting fittings, heating appliances and wiring accessories are to comply with Korean Industrial
Standards or equivalent thereto, and in addition they are also to comply with the requirements in
this Section.

1002. Lighting fittings

1. Construction and location
(1) Enclosures are to be composed of metal, glass or synthetic resin having a sufficient mechanical,
thermal and chemical resistivity and to have a suitable degree of protection depending on their
location. Synthetic resin enclosures which support current-carrying parts are to be flame
retardant.
(2) Terminal box and leading-in part of cables are to be of construction suitable for ship cables.
Consideration is to be given so that the insulation of cables may not be deteriorated at an early
stage due to the temperature rise on terminals and other parts.
(3) Lighting fittings installed in engine room or similar spaces which are exposed to the risk of me-
chanical damage are to be provided with suitable grilled metallic guards to protect their lamps
and glass globes against such damage. 【See Guidance】
(4) For the construction which the insulation of cables may be exposed to the UV light, suitable
protection means are to be taken to prevent damage for insulation of cables.
(5) Emergency lighting fittings are to be marked for easy identification. (2019)
2. Fluorescent lighting fittings
(1) Reactors, capacitors and other auxiliaries are not to be mounted on surfaces which are liable to
be subjected to high temperatures.
(2) Every capacitor of 0.5 microfarad or more is to be provided with a protective leak or other pro-
tective means which reduces the voltage of the capacitor to not more than 50 V within 1 minute
after disconnection from the supply sources.
(3) Transformers are to be installed as close as practicable to the associated discharge lamp.
(4) In principle, fluorescent lighting of electronic ballast stabilizer type installed in navigation bridge is
to be approved by the Society. 【See Guidance】
3. LED lighting 【See Guidance】
In principle, LED lighting installed in navigation bridge is to be approved by the Society.

1003. Heating appliances 【See Guidance】

1. Construction and location
(1) In principle, no bare heating element is to be used.
(2) Where the heating element is employed in liquid, it is to be protected by anticorrosive metal
sheath.
(3) The high temperature parts of electric heating appliances are to be so protected as to be kept
from the risk of a combustible material to come in touch under normal working condition.
(4) Space heaters are to be installed in such a manner as to have no risk of dangerous heating of
decks or bulkheads or other surroundings.
2. Control switches
Heating appliances are to be controlled by a fixed switch. Where a plug is used for the appliance,
the fixed switch is to be placed in the immediate vicinity of the socket-outlet.

1004. Wiring accessories

1. Material
(1) Enclosures are to be of metal or of flame-retardant material.
(2) The insulating material of live parts is to be of flame-retardant and non-hygroscopic material.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 51

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

2. Temperature rise
The temperature rise on live parts is not to exceed 30 ℃ .
3. Switches
Switches are to be capable of breaking and making safely a load current equal to 150  of their
rated current at the rated voltage.
4. Plugs and receptacles
(1) Receptacles of rated current exceeding 15 amperes are to be provided with a switch so inter-
locked that the plug cannot be inserted or withdrawn when the switch is in the "on" position.
(2) Where distribution systems of different voltages are in use, receptacles and plugs are to be of
such design that an incorrect connection cannot be made.
(3) Each receptacles and plug having the rated voltage of 55 V and over for d.c. and 55 V and over
for a.c. are to be provided with an additional contactor for earthing the casing or frame of appli-
ance, except those for double insulated appliances having no non-current carrying metal parts for
which earthing is required. The earthing contactors are to make contact in advance of the live
contact pins when inserting the plug.

1005. Electric fuel oil heating systems (2019)

1. Test and inspection of electric fuel oil heating systems are in accordance with Table 6.1.18 of the
Guidance.

Table 6.1.18 Test and inspection of electric fuel oil heating systems

No. Tests Test method Remarks

1 Visual inspection -

2 Function test 406. 3 -

3 Insulation resistance test 406. 5 -

4 High voltage test 406. 4 -

5 Pressure test Pt 5, Ch 6, 1404. 3 if applicable

1006. Busbar trunking systems (2019)

1. Test and inspection of busbar trunking systems are in accordance with Table 6.1.19 of the
Guidance.

Table 6.1.19 Test and inspection of busbar trunking systems

No. Tests Test method Remarks

1 Visual inspection -

2 Insulation resistance test No.10 -

Table 3.23.1 of the Guidance for
Approval of Manufacturing Process For high voltage,
3 High voltage test No.11 and Type Approval, etc. apply 1506. 4 of
the Rules

52 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 11 Internal Communications

1101. Applicable standards

Each internal communication apparatus is to comply with Korean Industrial Standard or equivalent
and above.

1102. Essential internal communication systems 【See Guidance】

Electric internal communication and signal systems forming part of the essential operating systems
of the ship are to be as independent and self-sustaining as possible.

1103. Induced interference suppression

All communication cables are to be so arranged that unwanted interference and cross-talk is
avoided.

1104. Protective devices

Where numerous internal communication circuits are branched from common feeder, each circuit
and feeder is to be protected by the fuses and other means, and the rating of feeder is to be
based on the connected load.

1105. General emergency alarm system

1. General
The general emergency alarm system is to be capable of sounding the general emergency alarm
signal consisting of seven or more short blasts followed by one long blast on the ship's whistle or
siren and additionally on an electrically operated bell or klaxon or other equivalent warning system,
which is to be powered from the ship's main supply and the emergency source of electrical power
required by SOLAS regulation II-1/42 or II-1/43, as appropriate. The system is to be capable of op-
eration from the navigation bridge and, except for the ship's whistle, also from other strategic
points. The alarm is to continue to function after it has been triggered until it is manually turned off
or is temporarily interrupted by a message on the public address system.
2. Circuit 【See Guidance】
No switch is to be provided for feeder circuits of general emergency alarm system, except for op-
eration switch. Where circuit breaker is used for overcurrent protection, suitable means are to be
taken to prevent the circuit breaker from being kept "off" position.
3. Sound pressure level
(1) The minimum sound pressure levels for the emergency alarm tone in interior and exterior spaces
are to be 80 dB(A) and at least 10 dB(A) above ambient noise levels existing during normal
equipment operation with the ship underway in moderate weather.
(2) The sound pressure levels at the sleeping position in cabins and in cabin bathrooms are to be at
least 75 dB(A) and at least 10 dB(A) above ambient noise levels.
(3) In any case, audible alarm is not to exceed 120 dB(A) and visual alarm devices can be used as
a secondary device in high noise areas such as machinery spaces.
(4) In general, the sound pressure levels are to be tested at 1 m from the sleeping position in cab-
ins and the source which audible alarm is sounded.

1106. Public address system 【See Guidance】

1. It is to be loudspeaker installation enabling the broadcast of messages into all spaces where crew
members or passengers, or both, are normally present, and to muster stations.
2. Source of electrical power is to be supplied from the main source of electrical power and the emer-
gency source of electrical power where used in order to supplement a general emergency alarm
system.
3. It is to allow for the broadcast of messages from the navigation bridge and such at least one other

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 53

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

places (cargo control station, fire control station, engine control station, etc) on board the ship as
the Society deems necessary.
4. It is to be protected against unauthorized use.
5. It is to be installed with regard to acoustically marginal conditions and not require any action form
the addressee.
6. With the ship underway in normal conditions, the minimum sound pressure levels for broadcasting
emergency announcements shall be as follows.
(1) In interior spaces 75 dB(A) and at least 20 dB(A) above the speech interference level; and
(2) In exterior spaces 80 dB(A) and at least 15 dB(A) above the speech interference level.
(3) In general, the sound pressure levels are to be tested at 1 m from the sleeping position in cab-
ins and the source which audible alarm is sounded.
7. It is to be arranged to minimize the effect of a single failure where used in order to supplement a
general emergency alarm system.

54 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 12 Semi-Conductor Converters (2021)

1201. General
1. The requirements in this Section apply to semi-conductor converters for motor drives, uninterruptible
power system(UPS) and semi-conductor rectifiers(hereinafter referred to as "rectifiers") not less than
5 kW .
2. Accessories of the rectifier are to be in accordance with all applicable requirements in this Chapter.

1202. Semi-conductor converters for motor drives

1. Design requirements
(1) The specified capacity shall at least include a 100% continuous load, and a specified overload
capacity given by a current of maximum duration of time.
(2) Converters for motor drives (including soft starters), shall as a minimum withstand two consec-
utive start attempts immediately followed after stopping, or starting up from cold without being
overheated.
2. Creepage and clearance distances
(1) Creepage and clearance distances shall be in accordance with relevant product standard, The
clearance and creepage distances given in the relevant IEC standards are reproduced in Table
6.1.20 to Table 6.1.22.

Table 6.1.20 Clearance distance for low voltage semi-conductor converter

Rated voltage ( V ) Clearance distance (mm)

120 0.80
220, 230, 240 1.5
380, 400, 415, 440, 480 3.0
600, 630, 660, 690 5.5

Table 6.1.21 Clearance distance for high voltage semi-conductor converter

Rated voltage ( V ) Clearance distance (mm)

1732 8.0
6235 25
12470 60
20785 90

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 55

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.22 Creepage distances for semi-conductor converters

Rated voltage ( V ) Creepage distance (mm)

100 2.2
160 2.5
200 3.2
250 4.0
320 5.0
400 6.3
500 8.0
630 10.0
800 12.5
1000 16
1250 20
1600 25
2000 32
2500 40
3200 50
4000 63
5000 80
6300 100
8000 125
10000 160

3. Cooling
(1) Semiconductor converter assemblies are to be installed away from sources of radiant energy in
locations where the circulation of air is not restricted to and from the assembly and where the
temperature of the inlet air to air-cooled converters will not exceed that for which the converter
has been designed.
(2) Where arrangements for forced cooling have been provided, the equipment is, unless otherwise
specifically required, to be designed such that power cannot be applied to, or retained on, the
semiconductor circuits, unless effective cooling is maintained. Other effective means of pro-
tection against equipment over-temperature such as reduction in the driven load may also be
acceptable.
(3) Semiconductor assemblies with forced cooling are to be provided with a means of monitoring
the temperature of the cooling medium. Over-temperature of the cooling medium is to be
alarmed and the equipment shutdown when temperature exceeds the manufacturer specified
value.
(4) Semi-conductor assemblies with liquid cooling are to be provided with a means to detect
leakage. In case of leakage, an audible and visible alarm is to be initiated. Means to contain any
leakage are to be provided so that the liquid does not cause a failure of the semi-conductor as-
sembly or any other electrical equipment located near the converter. Where the cooling liquid is
required to be non-conducting, the conductivity of the cooling liquid is to be monitored and an
alarm is to be initiated if the conductivity exceeds the manufacturer specified value.
(5) In case of failure of the cooling system, an alarm is to be initiated and the output current is to
be reduced automatically. Cooling liquids which are in contact with live unearthed parts of the

56 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

assembly are to be non-conductive and non-flammable.

4. Emergency stop
When required, semiconductor converter assemblies shall be provided with an emergency stop
function. The emergency stop circuit is to be hard-wired and independent of any control system
signal.

1203. Uninterruptable power system (UPS)

1. Application
These requirements are to apply to interruptible power system (hereinafter referred to as “UPS”)
units installed in ships as an emergency source of electrical power.
2. Definitions (2022)
(1) UPS : combination of converters, switches and batteries, constituting for maintaining continuity of load
power in case of input power failure. (IEC 62040-3:2011)
(2) Off-line UPS unit : a unit specified in (1) above where under normal operation the output load is
powered from the bypass line and only transferred to the inverter if the bypass supply fails or goes
outside preset limits.
(3) Line interactive UPS unit : a unit specified in (2) above where the bypass line switch to stored energy
power when the input power goes outside the preset voltage and frequency limits.
(4) On-line UPS unit : a unit specified in (1) above where under normal operation the output load is
powered from the inverter, and will therefore continue to operate without break in the event of the
supply input failing or going outside preset limits.
3. Design and construction
(1) UPS units are to be constructed in accordance with IEC 62040-1:2017, IEC 62040-2:2016, IEC
62040-3:2011, IEC 62040-4:2013, and/or IEC 62040-5-3:2016 as applicable, or an acceptable and
relevant national or international standard. (2022)
(2) The operation of the UPS units is not to depend on external services.
(3) The type of UPS unit (off-line, line-interactive, on-line) is to be appropriate to the power supply
requirements of the connected load equipment.
(4) UPS units are to have an external bypass circuit.
(5) UPS units are to have a self-monitoring function, and audible and visual alarms are to be acti-
vated in the space where crews normally attend in the following cases.
(A) Power supply failure (abnormal voltage or frequency)
(B) Earth fault
(C) Operation of battery protective device
(D) Discharge of battery
(E) Operation of bypass circuit for on-line UPS units
4. Arrangement
(1) UPS units are to be suitably located for use in an emergency condition.
(2) UPS units utilizing valve regulated sealed batteries may be located in compartments with normal
electrical equipment, provided the ventilation arrangements are in accordance with the requirements of
IEC 62040-1:2017, IEC 62040-2:2016, IEC 62040-3:2011, IEC 62040-4:2013, and/or IEC
62040-5-3:2016 as applicable, or an acceptable and relevant national or international standard. (2022)
5. Performance
(1) The output power is to be maintained for the duration time required for the connected equip-
ment as specified in 203. 2 of the Rules.
(2) No additional circuits are to be connected to the UPS unit without verification that the UPS unit
has adequate capacity. The UPS battery capacity is, at all times, to be capable of supplying the
designated loads for the time specified in the regulations.
(3) On restoration of the input power, the rating of the charge unit shall be sufficient to recharge
the batteries while maintaining the output supply to the load equipment.
6. Testing and inspection
(1) UPS units of 50 and over are to be surveyed by this Society during manufacturing and
testing. (2022)
(2) Appropriate test is to be carried out to demonstrate that the UPS unit is suitable for its in-

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 57

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

tended environment. This is expected to include as a minimum the following tests:

(A) Visual inspection
(B) Functionality, including operation of alarms
(C) Temperature rise
(D) Ventilation rate
(E) Battery capacity
(3) In case where input power failure of UPS is happened, if the continuous power supply is neces-
sary without power interruption, this operation condition is to be verified after installation by
practical test.

1204. Rectifiers
1. Construction
(1) Rectifier valve units, rectifier stacks or cells are to be so arranged that they can be removed
from equipment without dismantling the complete unit.
(2) Air-cooled rectifiers are to be suitably installed or protected against the effects of salty air and
humidity.
(3) Where mercury vapour are liable to be generated, self-cooling and air-cooled semi-conductor
rectifiers are not to be used.
(4) Where rectifier elements are connected in series or parallel, they are so arranged that the volt-
age or current on each element will become equal as far as practicable.
2. Arrangement
(1) Rectifiers are to be installed in such a manner that the circulation of cooling air is not impeded
and that the temperature of the inlet air to the air-cooled rectifier stacks does not exceed the
allowable value.
(2) Rectifiers are to be separated from resistors, steam pipes or other sources of radiant heat as far
as practicable.
3. Protective devices
(1) Where forced cooling is provided, the rectifier is to be so arranged that the rectifier can not re-
main loaded unless effective cooling is maintained.
(2) Where necessary, means are to be provided to guard against transient over-voltage caused by
switching and breaking of the circuits and d.c. voltage rise due to regenerative power.
4. Temperature of rectifier cells
The maximum permissible temperature rise of junction of rectifier cells is to be such a value as will
be specified by the manufacturer. Where the information is not available, the maximum permissible
temperature rise of junction of rectifier cells is not to exceed the following values :
Selenium : 70 ℃
Silicon : 150 ℃ (thyristor : 125 ℃ )
5. Transformers for rectifiers
Transformers for rectifier are to be of two separate windings.
6. Thyristor control
(1) Gate control circuits
(A) Gate control circuits of thyristors are to be so arranged that they can generate the gate
pulse not exceeding the gate rating and having the pulse width enough to fire all thyristors
connected. The gate control circuits are also to be protected from misfire caused by electro-
static induction and electromagnetic induction.
(B) Where thyristors are connected in series or parallel, gate control circuits are to be so ar-
ranged that firing timings of each thyristor are not irregular.
(2) Thyristor control for d.c. motor
(A) Where commutation of d.c. motor may be affected by the harmonics of thyristor output
waveform, appropriate measures are to be taken to reduce such harmonics.
(B) Where electric sources may be affected by lower power factor resulted from the phase con-
trol of thyristor, means are to be provided to compensate it.
(C) In case where motors are operated in either direction of rotation by means of changing-over

58 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

the field polarity, interlock is to be made so as to reverse the polarity of field after arma-
ture-current reaching zero, and in addition, suitable means are to be provided to limit elec-
trical non-locked conditions of armature.
7. Testing and inspection
(1) General 【See Guidance】
Rectifiers and their accessories are to be tested in accordance with the following requirements.
The test required by (2), however, may be omitted subject to the Society's permission for each
product which is produced in series having identical type with its first unit tested in the pres-
ence of the Surveyor.
(2) Temperature test 【See Guidance】
Temperature test of rectifiers and their accessories is to be carried out under normal working
conditions, and the test results are to comply with the requirements in 4 not exceeding the val-
ues specified in the requirements in 702. as well.
(3) Operation test 【See Guidance】
Instruments, switching devices and protective devices are to be checked under operating
conditions.
(4) High voltage test
Rectifiers are to withstand the high voltage by applying the test voltage of Table 6.1.23 for 1
minute between rectifier cells or live parts of components charged with main circuit potential
and earth. (2018)

Table 6.1.23 Test voltages for equipment connected to main circuits (2018)

Rated insulation Test voltages (V)

voltage ( V ) a.c. (r.m.s) d.c.
≤ 50 1250 1770

≤ 100 1300 1840

≤ 150 1350 1910

≤ 300 1500 2120

≤ 600 1800 2550

≤ 1000 2200 3110

(5) Insulation resistance test

After the high-voltage test, insulation resistance between live parts of rectifiers and their ac-
cessories and earth is not to be less than 1 M when tested with d.c. voltage of at least 500 V .

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 59

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 13 Accumulator Batteries

1301. General 【See Guidance】

1. The requirements of this Section apply to all types of rechargeable lead acid and alkaline(Ni-Cd)
batteries.
2. Accumulator batteries are to comply with national standards, internationally recognized codes or
those which are considered equivalent by the Society.
3. Vented type batteries are those ones in which electrolytes can be replaced and which may release
gases when they are being charged and overcharged.
4. Valve-regulated sealed type batteries are those ones in which cells are closed but have an arrange-
ment(valve) that allows the emission of gas if the internal pressure exceeds a predetermined value.
The electrolyte cannot normally be replaced.

1302. Construction
The cells of all batteries are to be so constructed and secured as to prevent spilling of the electro-
lyte due to the vibration, inclination, etc., of the ship and to prevent emission of acid or alkaline
spray.

1303. Location
1. Batteries are to be located where they are not exposed to excessive heat, extreme cold, spray,
steam or other conditions which would impair performance or accelerate deterioration.
2. Alkaline batteries and lead acid batteries are not to be in the same compartment.
3. Batteries are not to be placed in living quarters.
4. Large batteries are to be installed in the dedicated battery room. However, valve-regulated sealed
type batteries may be installed in appropriate space. 【See Guidance】
5. Engine starting batteries are to be located as close as practicable to the engines served. If such
batteries cannot be accommodated in the battery room, they are to be installed so that adequate
ventilation is ensured.

1304. Electrical installation in battery compartment

1. Lighting fittings in battery rooms are to be of explosion-proof type. 【See Guidance】
2. Switches, fuses and other electrical equipment liable to cause an arc are not to be fitted in battery
compartments.
3. Cables, with the exception of those appertaining to the battery or the local lighting, are not to be
installed in battery compartments as a rule.

1305. Protection against corrosion

The interior of all battery compartments is to be protected with lead-sheet lining of 1.6 mm thick or
more or corrosion-resistant paint in accordance with the following Paragraphs :
(1) The entire floor and all walls up to 150 mm high of battery rooms are to be lined with
lead-sheet and the linings are to be watertight. Where approved by the Society, lead-sheet lin-
ing may be substituted by acid-resisting paint.
(2) Ceilings, walls other than those specified in (1), battery shelves and wooden crates are to be
painted with acid-resisting paint.
(3) Battery tray and sulfuric acid bottle base are to be lined with lead-sheet. 【See Guidance】
(4) Ventilating ducts and fans are to be made of corrosion-resisting material or their interior surfa-
ces are to be coated with corrosion-resisting paint.

60 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

1306. Ventilation 【See Guidance】

1. All rooms, lockers and boxes for accumulator batteries are to be arranged to avoid accumulation of
inflammable gas. Where batteries are arranged in two or more tiers, all shelves are to have not less
than 50 mm space, front and back, for circulation of air.
2. The ventilation of battery room may be conducted with either natural ventilation or ventilating fan.
3. The battery room is to be provided with effective air inlet near floor surface.
4. Ventilating fans are to be so constructed and be of a material such as not to arise sparking in the
event of the impeller touching the fan casing.
5. Fan motor associated with a duct used to exhaust the air from a battery space is, in principle, to
be placed outside of the duct.
6. Ventilating ducts terminating at least 1.25 m above in a gooseneck shape or equivalent are to be
provided above the top of battery boxes. Holes for air inlets are to be provided on at least two op-
posite sides of the box.

1307. Charging facilities

1. For floating service or for any other conditions where the load is connected to the battery while it
is on charge, the maximum battery voltage is not to exceed the safe value of any connected
apparatus. A voltage regulator or other means of voltage control may be provided for this purpose.
2. Battery charging facilities by means of d.c. generator and series resistor are to be provided with
protection against reversal of current when the charging voltage is 20 % of the line voltage or
higher.

1308. Maintenance record of battery

(1) Where batteries are fitted for use for essential and emergency services a schedule of such bat-
teries is to be compiled and maintained. The schedule, which is to be reviewed by the Society's
site Surveyor during the newbuilding survey, is to include at least the following information re-
garding the batteries:
(A) Type and manufacturer's type designation
(B) Voltage and ampere-hour rating
(C) Location
(D) Equipment and/or systems served
(E) Maintenance/replacement cycle dates
(F) Dates of last maintenance and/or replacement
(G) For replacement batteries in storage, the date of manufacture and shelf life
(2) Procedures are to be put in place to ensure that where batteries are replaced that they are of
an equivalent performance type.
(3) Where vented type batteries replace valve- regulated sealed types, it is to be ensured that
there is adequate ventilation and that the Society’s requirements relevant to the location and in-
stallation of vented types batteries are complied with.
(4) Details of the schedule and of the procedures are to be included in the ship’s safety manage-
ment system and be integrated into the ship’s operational maintenance routine as appropriate to
be verified by the Society’s Surveyor.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 61

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 14 Lightning Conductors

1401. General
Lightning conductors are to be fitted on each mast of ships having wooden masts.

1402. Size of lightning conductors

1. Lightning conductors are to be composed of continuous copper tape or rope having a section not
less than 75 mm . Lightning conductors are to run as straight as possible and sharp bends are to be
avoided.
2. The resistance of lightning conductor between the mast top and the point on the earth plate or hull
is not to exceed 0.02 ohms.

62 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 15 High Voltage Electrical Installations

1501. General
1. Application 【See Guidance】
(1) The requirements in this Section apply to a.c. three-phase supply systems with nominal voltages
in the range above 1 kV up to and including 15 kV . Nominal voltage is the voltage between
phases.
(2) The high voltage electrical installations are to comply with IEC 60092-503:2007 and the applicable
requirements in this Chapter in addition to those in this Section. (2022)
2. High-voltage, low-voltage segregation Equipment with voltage above about 1 kV is not to be in-
stalled in the same enclosure as low voltage equipment, unless segregation or other suitable meas-
ures are taken to ensure that access to low voltage equipment is obtained without danger.

1502. System Design 【See Guidance】

1. Distribution
(1) Network configuration for continuity of ship services
It is to be possible to split the main switchboard into at least two independent sections, by
means of at least one circuit breaker or other suitable disconnecting devices, each supplied by at
least one generator. If two separate switchboards are provided and interconnected with cables, a
circuit breaker is to be provided at each end of the cable. Services which are duplicated are to
be divided between the sections.
(2) Earthed neutral systems
In case of earth fault, the current is not to be greater than full load current of the largest gen-
erator on the switchboard or relevant switchboard section and not less than three times the
minimum current required to operate any device against earth fault. It is to be assured that at
least one source neutral to ground connection is available whenever the system is in the ener-
gized mode. Electrical equipment in directly earthed neutral or other neutral earthed systems is
to withstand the current due to a single phase fault against earth for the time necessary to trip
the protection device.
(3) Neutral disconnection
Means of disconnection are to be fitted in the neutral earthing connection of each generator so
that the generator may be disconnected for maintenance and for insulation resistance
measurement.
(4) Hull connection of earthing impedance
All earthing impedances are to be connected to the hull. The connection to the hull is to be so
arranged that any circulating currents in the earth connections do not interfere with radio, radar,
communication and control equipment circuits.
(5) Divided systems
In the systems with neutral earthed, connection of the neutral to the hull is to be provided for
each section.
2. Degrees of protection
(1) General
Each part of the electrical installation is to be provided with a degree of protection appropriate to the
location, as a minimum the requirements of IEC 60092-201:2019. (2022)
(2) Rotating machines
The degree of protection of enclosures of rotating electrical machines is to be at least IP 23.
The degree of protection of terminals is to be at least IP44. For motors installed in spaces ac-
cessible to unqualified personnel, a degree of protection against approaching or contact with live
or moving parts of at least IP4X is required.
(3) Transformers
The degree of protection of enclosures of transformers is to be at least IP23. For transformers
installed in spaces accessible to unqualified personnel a degree of protection of at least IP4X is
required. For transformers not contained in enclosures, see 1507. 1.
(4) Switchgear, controlgear assemblies and converters
The degree of protection of metal enclosed switchgear, controlgear assemblies and static con-

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 63

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

vertors is to be at least IP32. For switchgear, control gear assemblies and static converters in-
stalled in spaces accessible to unqualified personnel, a degree of protection of at least IP4X is
required.
3. Insulation
(1) Air clearance
In general, phase-to-phase air clearances and phase-to-earth air clearances between non-in-
sulated parts of equipment are to be not less than those specified in Table as below. However,
air clearance may be reduced subject to the Society's permission.

Nominal Voltage( kV ) Minimum air clearance( mm )

3 (3.3) 55
6 (6.6) 90
10 (11) 120
15 160

(2) Creepage distances

Creepage distances between live parts and between live parts and earthed metal parts are to be in
accordance with IEC 60092-503:2007 for the nominal voltage of the system, the nature of the in-
sulation material and the transient overvoltage developed by switch and fault conditions. (2022)
4. Protection
(1) Faults on the generator side of circuit breaker
Protective devices are to be provided against phase-to-phase faults in the cables connecting the
generators to the main switchboard and against interwinding faults within the generators. The
protective devices are to trip the generator circuit breaker and to automatically de-excite the
generator. In distribution systems with a neutral earthed, phase to earth faults are also to be
treated as above.
(2) Faults to earth
Any earth fault in the system is to be indicated by means of a visual and audible alarm. In low
impedance or direct earthed systems provision is to be made to automatic disconnect the faulty
circuits. In high impedance earthed systems, where outgoing feeders will not be isolated in case
of an earth fault, the insulation of the equipment is to be designed for the phase to phase
voltage.
(3) Power transformers
Power transformers are to be provided with overload and short circuit protection. When trans-
formers are connected in parallel, tripping of the protective devices at the primary side has to
automatically trip the switch connected at the secondary side.
(4) Voltage transformers for control and instrumentation
Voltage transformers are to be provided with overload and short circuit protection on the secon-
dary side.
(5) Fuses
Fuses are not to be used for overload protection.
(6) Low voltage systems
Lower voltage systems supplied through transformers from high voltage systems are to be pro-
tected against overvoltages. This may be achieved by:
- direct earthing of the lower voltage system
- appropriate neutral voltage limiters
- earthed screen between the primary and secondary windings of transformers.

1503. Rotating machinery

1. Stator windings of generators
Generator stator windings are to have all phase ends brought out for the installation of the differ-
ential protection.

64 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

2. Temperature detectors
Rotating machinery is to be provided with temperature detectors in their stator windings to actuate
a visual and audible alarm in a normally attended position whenever the temperature exceeds the
permissible limit. If embedded temperature detectors are used, means are to be provided to protect
the circuit against overvoltage.
3. Tests
In addition to the tests normally required for rotating machinery, a high frequency high voltage test in
accordance with IEC 60034-15:2009 is to be carried out on the individual coils in order to demonstrate a
satisfactory withstand level of the inter-turn insulation to steep fronted switching surges. (2022)

1504. Power Transformers

1. General (2022)
Dry type transformers have to comply with IEC 60076-11:2018. Liquid cooled transformers have to
comply with IEC 60076. Oil immersed transformers are to be provided with the following alarms and
protections:
- liquid level (Low)-alarm / trip or load reduction
- liquid temperature (High)-alarm / trip or load reduction
- gas pressure relay (High)-trip
2. Test voltage of High voltage test

a.c. Test voltage of High voltage(kV), 1min.

System nominal voltage(kV)
commercial frequency(50Hz or 60Hz)
≤ 1.1 3
3.6 10
7.2 20
12 28
15 38

1505. Cables 【See Guidance】

1. General (2022)
Cables are to be constructed in accordance with the IEC 60092-353:2016 and IEC 60092-354:2020 or
other equivalent Standard.
2. Test voltage of High voltage test

a.c. Test voltage of High voltage(kV), 5min.

System nominal voltage(kV)
commercial frequency(50Hz or 60Hz)
1 ∼ 1.1 3.5
3 ∼ 3.3 6.5
6 ∼ 6.6 11
10 ∼ 11 15
15 22

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 65

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

1506. Switchgear and controlgear assemblies

1. General (2022)

Switchgear and controlgear assemblies are to be constructed according to IEC 62271-200:2011 and 1506.
2, 3, and 4 of the Rules.
2. Construction
(1) Mechanical construction
Switchgear is to be of metal enclosed type in accordance with IEC 62271-200:2011 or of the in-
sulation enclosed type in accordance with IEC 62271-201:2014. (2022)
(2) Locking facilities
Withdrawable circuit breakers and switches are to be provided with mechanical locking facilities
in both service and disconnected positions. For maintenance purposes, key locking of with-
drawable circuit breakers and switches and fixed disconnectors is to be possible. Withdrawable
circuit breakers are to be located in the service position so that there is no relative motion be-
tween fixed and moving portions.
(3) Shutters
The fixed contacts of withdrawable circuit breakers and switches are to be so arranged that in
the withdrawable position the live contacts are automatically covered. Shutters are to be clearly
marked for incoming and outgoing circuits. This may be achieved with the use of colours or
labels.
(4) Earthing and short-circuiting
For maintenance purposes an adequate number of earthing and short-circuiting devices is to be
provided to enable circuits to be worked upon with safety.
(5) Internal Arc Classification(IAC)
Switchgear and controlgear assemblies are to be internal arc classified(IEC 62271-200:2011, Annex
AA). Where switchgear and controlgear are accessible by authorized personnel only, Accessibility Type
A is required. Accessibility type B is required if accessible by non-authorised personnel. Installation
and location of the switchgear and controlgear are to correspond with its internal arc classification and
classified sides (F, L and R). (2022)
3. Auxiliary systems
(1) Source and capacity of supply
If electrical energy and/or physical energy is required for the operation of circuit breakers and
switches, a store supply of such energy is to be provided for at least two operations of all the
components. However, the tripping due to overload or short-circuit, and under-voltage is to be
independent of any stored electrical energy sources. This does not preclude shunt tripping pro-
vided that alarms are activated upon lack of continuity in the release circuits and power supply
failures.
(2) Number of external supply sources
When external source of supply is necessary for auxiliary circuits, at least two external sources
of supply are to be provided and so arranged that a failure or loss of one source will not cause
the loss of more than one generator set and/or set of essential services. Where necessary one
source of supply is to be from the emergency source of electrical power for the start up from
dead ship condition.
4. High voltage test (2022) 【See Guidance】
A power-frequency voltage test is to be carried out on any switchgear and controlgear assemblies. The
test voltages are to be in accordance with the following Table 6.1.24 and the test procedure is to be in
accordance with the IEC 62271-200:2011 Sec 7 Routine tests.

66 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.24 Test voltage of High voltage test

a.c. Test voltage of High voltage(kV), 1min.

System nominal voltage(kV)
commercial frequency(50Hz or 60Hz)

1 ∼ 1.1 2.8

3 ∼ 3.3 10

6 ∼ 6.6 20

10 ∼ 11 28

15 38

1507. Installation
1. Electrical equipment
(1) Where equipment is not contained in an enclosure but a room forms the enclosure of the
equipment, the access doors are to be so interlocked that they cannot be opened until the sup-
ply is isolated and the equipment earthed down.
(2) At the entrance of the spaces where high-voltage electrical equipment is installed, a suitable
marking is to be placed which indicates danger of high-voltage. As regard the high-voltage elec-
trical equipment installed out-side a.m. spaces, the similar marking is to be provided.
(3) The switchboard is to be provided with safe and effective measures to vent the accidental arc
gases within the switchboard. 【See Guidance】
(4) An adequate, unobstructed working space is to be left in the vicinity of high voltage equipment
for preventing potential severe injuries to personal performing maintenance activities. In addition,
the clearance between the switchboard and the ceiling/deckhead above is to meet the require-
ments of the Internal Arc Classification(see 1506. 2 (5)).
2. Cables
(1) Runs of cables
In accommodation spaces, high voltage cables are to be run in enclosed cable transit systems.
(2) Segregation
High voltage cables are to be segregated from cables operating at different voltage ratings each
other; in particular, they are not to be run in the same cable bunch, nor in the same ducts or
pipes, or, in the same box. Where high voltage cables of different voltage ratings are installed
on the same cable tray, the air clearance between cables is not to be less than the minimum
air clearance for the higher voltage side in 1502. 3 (1). However, high voltage cables are not to
be installed on the same cable tray for the cables operating at the nominal system voltage of 1
kV and less.
(3) Installation arrangements
High voltage cables, in general, are to be installed on cable trays when they are provided with a
continuous metallic sheath or armour which is effectively bonded to earth; otherwise they are to
be installed for their entire length in metallic castings effectively bonded to earth.
(4) Terminations
Terminations in all conductors of high voltage cables are to be, as far as practicable, effectively
covered with suitable insulating material. In terminal boxes, if conductors are not insulated, phas-
es are to be separated from earth and from each other by substantial barriers of suitable in-
sulating materials. High voltage cables of the radial field type, i.e. having a conductive layer to
control the electric field within the insulation, are to have terminations which provide electric
stress control. Terminations are to be of a type compatible with the insulation and jacket materi-
al of the cable and are to be provided with means to ground all metallic shielding compo-
nents(i.e. tapes, wires etc).
(5) Marking
High voltage cables are to be readily identifiable by suitable marking.
(6) Test after installation
(A) Before a new high voltage cable installation, or an addition to an existing installation, is put
into service a voltage withstand test is to be satisfactorily carried out on each completed ca-
ble and its accessories. The test is to be carried out after an insulation resistance test.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 67

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(B) For cables with rated voltage(U0/U) above 1.8/3 kV(Um=3.6 kV) an a.c. voltage withstand test
may be carried out upon advice from high voltage cable manufacturer. One of the following
test methods to be used:

(a) test for 5 min with the phase-to-phase voltage of the system applied between the con-
ductor and the metallic screen/sheath
(b) test for 24 h with the normal operating voltage of the system

where,
 is the rated power frequency voltage between conductor and earth or metallic screen for
which the cable is designed.
 is the rated power frequency voltage between conductors for which the cable is designed.
 is the maximum value of the "highest system voltage" for which the equipment may be
used.

(C) Alternatively, a d.c. test voltage equal to 4 U0 may be applied for 15 minutes, notwithstand-
ing the requirements in (B) above.
(D) For cables with rated voltage(U0/U) up to 1.8/3 kV(Um=3.6 kV) a d.c. voltage equal to 4 U0
is to be applied for 15 minutes.
(E) After completion of the test, the conductors are to be connected to earth for a sufficient
period in order to remove any trapped electric charge. An insulation resistance test is then
repeated.

68 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 16 Electric Propulsion Unit

1601. General (2017)

1. Application
The following electric propulsion unit is to meet the requirements in this Section in addition to (KS
C ) IEC 60092-501 and those in this Chapter.
- generators and their prime movers,
- switchboards,
- transformers,
- convertors,
- propulsion motors,
- excitation systems,
- control, monitoring and safety systems,
- wires, cables and busbars,
- harmonic filters.
2. Protection against torsional vibration, etc.
Prime movers, generators, motors, shafting and propellers are to be such that harmful torsional vi-
brations or excessive electrical oscillations in alternating-current systems are not observed at any
normal operating speed.
3. Integrated electric propulsion system
(1) Integrated electric propulsion system is a system where a common set of generators supply
power to the vessel service loads as well as the propulsion loads.
(2) The generating capacity of integrated electric propulsion system is as follows.
For vessels with an integrated electric propulsion system, under normal sea-going conditions,
when one generator is out of service, the remaining generator capacity is to be sufficient to
carry all of the loads for vessel services (essential services, normal services and for minimum
comfortable conditions of habitability) and the propulsion loads to provide for a speed of not less
than 7 knots or one half of the design speed, whichever is the lesser.
4. Protection against moisture and condensate
Effective means, for example space heaters or air dryers, are to be provided in generators, pro-
pulsion motors, electric power convertors, transformers and switchboards to prevent accumulation of
moisture and condensate.

1602. Prime movers

1. General
Prime movers are to comply with the requirements of Pt 5, Ch 2, Sec 2 and 3, and their rated
power in conjunction with their overloading facilities and load built-up facilities is to be adequate to
supply the needed power during transitional changes in operating conditions of electrical equipment.
2. Speed governor
(1) Prime movers of any type are to be provided with a governor capable of maintaining the pre-set
steady speed within a range not exceeding 5  of the rated full-load speed for load changes
from full-load to no load.
(2) The governors are to be such that they will automatically maintain the momentary speed within
10  of the rated speed when the full load is suddenly thrown off.
(3) In the case of parallel operation of generators, the governing system used are to permit stable
operation to be maintained over the entire operational speed range of the prime movers.
(4) The speed governor characteristics of prime movers are to be such that in parallel operation the
load on individual generators is shared, as far as possible, in proportion to the output of each
generator.
(5) Where the speed control of the propeller requires speed variation of the prime mover, the gov-
ernor is to permit a very gradual variation of speed within the necessary speed range and means
are to be provided to enable local manual control as well as remote control of the governor.
(6) The overspeed governor is to be set to a speed in excess of the highest possible speed during

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 69

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

periods of regenerated power, and the generator set including prime mover is to be so designed
that no damage will be caused by an overspeed equal to that at which the governor is set.

1603. Rotating machines (2017)

1. General
(1) When variable speed rotating machines are fitted with an integral fan and have to be operated
at speeds below the rated speed with full-load torque, full-load current, full-load excitation or
the like, temperature limits according to Table 6.1.5 are not to be exceeded.
(2) The rotors are to be so constructed that they will withstand for 2 minutes at an overspeed in
accordance with the requirements in 309. 5. However, the overspeed of turbo-generators and
electromagnetic slip-couplings is to be 120  of the rated speed.
(3) The collector rings and commutators are to be suitably arranged to be maintained easily. For
purposes of inspection and repair, provision is to be made for easy access to each kind of coils
and bearings, and for withdrawal and replacement of the field coils as well.
(4) Stator windings of generators rated above 500 kVA, stator windings of a.c. motors rated above
500 kW and interpole, mainpole and compensation windings of d.c. motors rated above 500 kW
are to be provided with temperature sensors, and the temperature indicator is to be mounted in
a convenient position to read a temperature on the control board.
(5) Generators above 1 500 kVA are to be equipped with differential current protection.
(6) For d.c. motors liable to overspeed excessively, overspeed protection devices are to be provided,
and the rotors are to be suitably constructed to prevent damage due to temporary overspeed.
2. Motor torque
(1) Torque available for maneuvering a ship is to be capable of stopping or reversing of the ship in
a reasonable time when the ship is running at the maximum service speed.
(2) Adequate torque margin is to be provided in a.c. propulsion systems to guard against the motor
to be pulled out of synchronism during rough weather and at the time of turning in a multi-
ple-screw ship.
3. Protection against overload
Where arrangements permit a propulsion motor to be connected to the generating plant having a
continuous rating greater than the motor rating, means are to be provided to prevent continuous
operation at the overload or overtorque conditions not permitted to the motor and shafting.
4. Bearing and lubrication
(1) Lubrication of the bearings of propulsion motors and shafting is to be effective at all operational
speeds including creep speeds.
(2) When a forced lubrication system is used for the bearings of rotating machines and prime mov-
ers, low oil pressure alarm and alarm for attainment of excessive bearing temperatures are to be
provided.
(3) No lubricating liquid is to flow out of the bearings and penetrate into the machine.
(4) All bearings are to be equipped with temperature devices or a thermometer is to be installed.
(5) Adequate lubricating is to be ensured even in inclined positions. Provision is to be made for
checking the bearing lubrication.
(6) Sleeve bearings are to be easily replaceable.
(7) Roller bearings are to be sufficiently preloaded.
5. Means of excitation
(1) Separately excited rotating machines are to be provided with at least 2 independent sources of
excitation.
(2) The strength of shafts and couplings of exciter is to be suitable for the increased output neces-
sary during maneuvering and sudden short-circuit conditions.
6. Electromagnetic slip-couplings
(1) Means are to be provided to facilitate periodical checking of the air gaps of the magnetic circuit,
and appropriate calibrated gauges are to be supplied for this purpose.
(2) Electromagnetic slip-couplings are to be at least of drip-proof type. Where they are of non-en-
closed type, suitable means are to be taken to prevent accidental touch with rotating parts and
ingress of foreign material.

70 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

7. Cooling
(1) The temperature of the cooling air of machines provided with forced air ventilation, air ducts, air
filters or water coolers is to be continuously monitored by means of thermometers which are
readable from outside the machine. Temperature sensors are to be provided to trigger an alarm.
is to be installed.
(2) For machines with water cooled heat exchangers, leakage monitoring is required.

1604. Control gear 【See Guidance】

1. General
(1) Control gears for propulsion equipment are to be designed for the appropriate voltages and are
to include the apparatus necessary for starting, stopping, reversing and controlling the speed of
motors together with essential instruments and safety devices.
(2) Where, on stopping or reversing the propeller, the regenerated energy transmitted by the pro-
pulsion motor is such as to cause a dangerous increase of speed in the prime mover, means
are to be provided for suitably absorbing or limiting such energy(e.g., braking resistors). (2017)
(3) All levers, handles and their accessories for switches and contactors are to be of such pro-
portions as to permit a satisfactory manual operation.
(4) All levers for operating contactors, line switches, field switches and the like are to be interlocked
to prevent their wrong operation. These interlocks are to be of mechanical type as far as
practicable.
(5) Where steam and oil gauges are mounted on the main control assembly, provisions are to be
made so that in case of leakage, steam and oil may not come into contact with the energized
parts.
(6) When power-aided control is used, other suitable means are to be provided to restore control in
a short time in the event of power failure.
(7) The control gears are to be so arranged that in case of damage to the equipment outside the
engine room, control can always be executed from the engine room maneuvering control
stations.
(8) In the event of failure of the control gears or failure of power supply for control gear, it shall be
ensured that the propeller speed does not increase excessively.
2. Location of maneuvering control
(1) Control of the rotating machines for propulsion may be carried out from the bridge or deck.
Alternative control in the engine room is to be provided, Transfer of control to the engine room
in an emergency is to be possible without excessive loss of time.
(2) When two or more control stations are provided, indicating lights are to be located at each con-
trol station to indicate which station is in control. Means are to be provided to make incapable
of being operated simultaneously from different stations.
(3) The local control station is to be located in the vicinity of the drives or electric power convertors
so that changes in the control of propulsion can be recognized.
(4) Each control station is to have an emergency stop device which is independent of the drive's
control and the active control place.
3. Main circuit and control circuit
(1) Propulsion system having two or more generator or motors respectively on one propeller shaft,
is to be so arranged that any unit of them can be taken out of service and isolated electrically.
(2) Field circuits are to be provided with means of suppressing voltage rise when a field switch is
opened.
4. Protection
(1) Over-current protective devices, if any, in the main circuits are to be set sufficiently high so
that there is no possibility of their operating due to over-currents caused by maneuvering or
normal operation in heavy seas.
(2) Where separately driven d.c. generators are connected electrically in series, means are to be
provided to prevent reversal of the rotation of a generator at the failure of the driving power of
its prime mover.
(3) In excitation circuits, there is to be no overload protection causing the opening of the circuit.
(4) Means are to be provided to detect sudden short circuit currents and to protect against phase

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 71

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

unbalance. When damage likely to cause to the electrical equipment is more serious than the
possible consequences of losing propulsion power, consideration is to be given to providing
means for rapid reduction of the magnetic fluxes of the generators or motors.
(5) Means for earth leakage detection are to be provided for the main propulsion circuit, and these
are to be arranged to operate an alarm upon the occurrence of an earth fault.
(6) Insulated excitation circuits are to be provided with earth leakage detection which may consist of
voltmeters or lamps.
(7) Reduction of power
A request for manual load reduction shall be issued, visually and acoustically on the bridge, or
an automatic load reduction shall be arranged in case of :
(A) Low lubricating oil pressure to propulsion generators and motors
(B) High winding temperature in propulsion generators and motors
(C) Lack of coolant in machines and convertors
(D) Fan failure in machines and convertors provided with forced ventilation, or failure of cooling
system.
(E) Load limitation of generators or inadequate available power.
5. Control gears for electromagnetic slip-couplings
Control gears for electromagnetic slip-couplings are to include a two-pole disconnecting switch,
short-circuit protection and an ammeter for the coupling excitation circuit. Interlocking gear is to be
provided to prevent the coupling from being energized when the driving machine control levers are
in an inappropriate position. Such controlgear may be combined with the prime mover speed control
and reversing gears.
6. Measuring, indicating, control and monitoring equipment (2017)
(1) Main propulsion plants are to be provided with at least the following measuring and control
equipment as well as indicators at control stations:
(a) At local control station
· speed setting,
· local remote switch,
· ammeter for each supply side current of each load component,
· indication excitation on,
· revolution indicator for each shaft,
· pitch indication for plants with variable pitch control,
· indication plant ready for operation,
· indication convertor on/off,
· indication plant disturbed,
· indication power limited,
· indication control from engine control room,
· indication control from the bridge,
· indication control from local.
(b) At (main) control station on the bridge
· control levers,
· revolution indicator for each shaft,
· shaft power meter,
· indication plant ready for switching on,
· indication plant ready for operation,
· indication plant disturbed,
· indication power limitation,
· indication request to reduce the power if not automatically controlled or equipped with
override push button,
· indication control from engine control room,
· indication control from the local control station,
· indication generators used for propulsion.
(c) At (main) control station in the engine control room
· control levers,
· revolution indicator for each shaft,
· shaft power meter,
· indication plant ready for switching on,
· indication plant ready for operation,

72 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

· indication plant disturbed,

· indication power limitation,
· indication request to reduce the power if not automatically controlled or equipped with
override push button,
· indication control from the local control station,
· indication control from the bridge,
· indication generators used for propulsion.
7. Start blockings (2017)
(1) The start-up process of the propulsion plant shall be interlocked such that starting is impossible
if existing malfunctions would trigger a shutdown or if the start-up process itself would cause
damage to the propulsion plant. The following interlocks should be considered, if applicable:
· shaft locking device not released,
· no cooling of static converter (overridable),
· no cooling of propulsion motor (overridable),
· no cooling of propulsion transformer (overridable),
· malfunction in exciter device,
· malfunction in static converter,
· convertor control: shutdown activated,
· propulsion switchboard switch-off active,
· emergency stop actuated,
· set point not equal to zero,
· bearings: lubrication oil pressure too low,
· conductivity of the cooling medium too high,
· protection triggered,
· switchgear circuit breaker malfunction,
· missing enabling signal from variable-pitch propeller.
(2) The pilot light “plant ready to start for switching on” may only be activated when all the pre-
requisites for start-up have been met.
(3) The pilot light “plant ready for operation” may only be activated if the propulsion plant would re-
spond to set point setting.

1605. Propulsion transformers

1. General
(1) At least two independent propulsion transformers are to be installed.
(2) Complete insulation is to be made between primary windings and secondary windings of
transformers. Auto transformers are permitted for motor starting.
(3) Transformers producing low voltage from high voltage are to be equipped with an earthed shield
winding between the high-voltage and low-voltage coil.
(4) Means of monitoring the winding temperatures of propulsion transformers are to be provided.
(5) Degree of protection
Transformers located in engine room are to have a protection degree of at least IP 23 and high
voltage transformers are to have a protection degree of at least IP 44. All transformers located
in dedicated locked electrical spaces or in the spaces which can access to qualified personnel
only as engine room may have any degree of protection of at least IP 2X.
2. Cooling
(1) Liquid cooled transformers
(a) A fire detector and a suitable fire extinguishing system are to be installed in the vicinity of
the transformer.
(b) Liquid cooled transformers are to be provided with gas-actuated protection devices.
(c) Means of monitoring the liquid temperature is to be provided. A pre-alarm is to be actuated
before the maximum permissible temperature is attained. When the maximum permissible
temperature limit is reached, the transformer is to be switched off.
(d) The liquid filling level is to be monitored by means of two separate sensors. The monitoring
system is to actuate an alarm at the first stage and is to trigger a shutdown at the second
stage, when the permissible limit is exceeded.
(2) For air cooled transformers, means of monitoring ventilators and temperatures of the cooling air
for forced-ventilated transformers are to be provided.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 73

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(3) For transformers with a closed circuit cooling method with a heat exchanger, means of monitor-
ing the flow of primary and secondary coolants are to be provided. Leakage-water and con-
densed moisture is to be kept away from the windings. Leakage monitoring is required.
3. Instrumentation
Propulsion transformers are to be equipped with a three-phase ammeter on primary side.
4. Protection
(1) Each propulsion transformer is to be protected against overcurrent and short-circuit at the pri-
mary and secondary side.
(2) Protection on secondary side may be achieved by the electric power convertor.

1606. Electric power convertors

1. General
(1) Two entirely separate electric power convertors are to be installed.
(2) Common control of the electric power convertors is not permitted. This means, for example, that
two single tachometer generators or one doubled tachometer generator are to be installed if a
tachometer generator is needed for ship's operation.
(3) Two galvanically isolated actual speed sensors are to be provided for each control system.
Common housing of both sensors is permitted.
(4) If the electric power convertor feeds a permanently excited synchronous motor, a switch dis-
connector is to be fitted in the motor-electric power convertor line which opens automatically in
case of an inverter fault. Devices which support fault diagnosis are to be installed.
2. Design of semiconductor electric power convertors
(1) Propulsion electric power convertors are to be designed for the nominal torque of the drive.
Short-term overload and speed variation resulting from overloads are not to lead to a shutdown
of the system.
(2) The cabinets for semiconductor electric power convertors are to meet the standards of the main
switchboard.
(3) The power components for semiconductor electric power convertors are to be easy replaceable.
3. Cooling of semiconductor electric power convertors
(1) If semiconductor electric power convertors are fitted with forced-cooling, means for monitoring
the cooling system are to be provided.
(2) In case of a failure of the cooling system, measures are to be taken to prevent damage to the
electric power convertor. An alarm is to be given. The alarm signal can be generated by the
flow of the coolant, or by the temperature of the semiconductors.
(3) Single failures in electric power convertor cooling systems are not to lead to the tripping of all
electric power convertors of the ship's propulsion.
4. Protection
(1) Operational overvoltages in a supply system to which electric power convertors are connected
are to be limited by suitable devices to prevent damage. Means of monitoring protective fuses
for these devices are to be provided.
(2) A suitable control is to ensure that the permissible current of semiconductor elements cannot be
exceeded during normal operation.
(3) Semiconductors are not to be damaged by direct short circuit at the terminals. Protection by
fuses is permitted. The electric power convertor is to control the current in such a way that no
components are damaged when the electric power convertor is switched on to a blocked motor.

1607. Cables
Conductors of cables and wiring are to consist of not less than 7 strands and conductors of a cross
sectional area smaller than 1.5 mm are not to be installed except cables or wiring for automatic
equipment not directly connected to main circuits.

1608. Testing and inspection

After electric propulsion plants are installed on board ship, sea trial is to be carried out.

74 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 17 Tests after Installation on Board

1701. Insulation resistance test

1. Electric propulsion, auxiliary power and lighting circuits
Each circuit of electric propulsion, auxiliary power and lighting is to have insulation resistances not
less than the values in Table 6.1.25 between conductors and between each conductor and earth.

Table 6.1.25 Insulation Resistance

Load Insulation resistance

Up to 5A 2 M
Up to 10 A 1 M
Up to 25 A 400,000 
Up to 50 A 250,000 
Up to 100 A 100,000 
Up to 200 A 50,000 
Over 200 A 25,000 
(NOTE)
During the above test, any or all electric heaters, small appliance and the like connected
thereto may be disconnected from the circuit.

2. Internal communication circuits

Insulation resistances of internal communication circuits are to comply with the following require-
ments:
(1) Each circuit of 100 V and above is to have an insulation resistance not less than 1 M between
conductors and between each conductor and earth.
(2) For circuits below 100 V , the insulation resistance is to be at least 1/3 M .
(3) During the test for (1) and (2) any or all appliances connected thereto may be disconnected
from the circuit.
3. Generators and motors
The insulation resistance of each generator and motor under working temperature is to be in ac-
cordance with the requirements in 309. 6.
4. Switchboards
The insulation resistance of each switchboard under working temperature is to be in accordance
with the requirements in 406. 5.

1702. Performance test

1. Generators
Generators are to be tested as follows:
(1) The operation of overspeed trip and other safety devices is to be demonstrated.
(2) If generators are intended to operate in parallel, they are to be tested over a range of loading
sufficient to demonstrate that load sharing and parallel operation are satisfactory. Voltage regu-
lation is to be satisfactory.
(3) All generators are to be run at full rated load for a duration sufficient to demonstrate that tem-
perature rises, commutation, absence of vibration and others are satisfactory.
2. Switchboards
All switches, circuit-breakers and associated equipment on the switchboard are to be operated on
load to demonstrate suitability, and also section boxes and distribution boxes are to be tested as
above.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 75

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

3. Motors
Motors are to be tested as follows :
(1) Motors and their controlgears are to be examined under working condition that wiring, capacity,
speed and operation are satisfactory.
(2) Motors driving various auxiliary machinery pumps, etc. are to be operated to demonstrate that
operating characteristics are satisfactory.
(3) Motors driving cargo winches and windlasses are to hoist and lower their specified loads.
4. Lighting system
Lighting system is to be tested as follows :
(1) Circuits are to be tested to demonstrate that all lighting fittings, branch boxes, switches, plugs,
receptacles and other connected fittings are in suitable operating condition.
(2) Emergency lighting circuits are is to be tested in the same manner as specified in (1) above.
5. Electric heaters and electric cooking ranges
Electric heaters, electric cooking ranges and the like are to be tested to demonstrate that the heat-
ing elements function satisfactorily.
6. Internal communication systems
Each internal communication system is to be thoroughly tested to demonstrate its specified
functioning. Particular attention is to be paid to the tests of operation of the ship's essential electric
communication systems which include engine order telegraphs, helm indicators, fire alarms, emer-
gency signals, morse signal lamp, navigation light indicator panel and telephones.
7. Voltage drop
During above tests, it is to be ascertained that the voltage drop of feeder circuits does not exceed
the values specified in 503. 2.

76 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 18 Spare Parts, Tools and Instruments

1801. Spare parts

1. General 【See Guidance】
(1) For the rotating machines and controlgears intended for electric propulsion plants, the spare
parts mentioned in Tables 6.1.26, 6.1.28 and 6.1.30 are to be supplied.
(2) For ship′ s service generators, essential service motors and their controlgears and switchboards,
the spare parts mentioned in Tables 6.1.26 to 6.1.30, so far as applicable, are recommended to
be supplied as a standard.
(3) Quantity mentioned in (1) and (2) is the quantity of spare parts for identical installation per ship.
(4) For steering gear motors and motor-generators, if no stand-by machine is installed, spare parts
in Table 6.1.26 are required in addition to the spare parts for motors enumerated in Table
6.1.27.

Table 6.1.26 Spare Parts for Generators, Exciters and Motors

Spare parts Quantity (ea) Remarks

Bearing or bearing linings 1 for each 4 or less Including oil rings
Brush holders 1 for each 10 or less
Springs 1 for each 4 or less For brush holder
Brushes 1 for each 1
For d.c. machines only.
Field coils 1 for each 10 or less
Excluding uninsulated interpoles coils
Resistors for field rheostat
See Table 6.1.28 For generators and exciters
and discharge resistors

Stator in case of a.c. cage-rotor motor.

Amatures of cargo winch 1 for 6 or more
Rotor in case of a.c. wound-rotor motor.

Required for rotating machines for electric

Slip-rings 1 for each kind and size
propulsion only.

Table 6.1.27 Additional Spare parts for Steering Gear Motors without Stand-by Motor-Generator

Spare parts Quantity (ea)

d.c. Amatures of motors and motor-generators 1 for each size (incl. shaft and coupling)

Stators of cage-rotor motors 1

a.c.
Rotors of wound-rotor motors 1 (incl. shaft and coupling)

Table 6.1.28 Spare parts for Controlgear

Spare parts Quantity (ea) Remarks

Contact pieces 1 for each 2 sets or less For arcing and wear parts only
Springs 1 for each 4 or less
Operating and shunt coils 1 for each 10 or less
Resistors 1 for each 10 or less For each kind and size
Fuses and their elements See Table 6.1.30
Lenses and lamps for pilot lamps See Table 6.1.30

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 77

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.29 Spare Parts for Brakes

Spare parts Quantity (ea) Remark

Shoe linings and rivets 1 for each 4 or less
Springs 1 for each 4 or less
Coils 1 for each 10 or less

Table 6.1.30 Spare Parts for Switchboards, Section Boards and Distribution Boards

Spare parts Quantity (ea) Remarks

Fuses (not renewable) 1 for each 1 Need not exceed 20
Fuse (renewable) 1 for each 10 Need not exceed 10
Fuse elements 1 for each 1
Arcing contacts 1 for each 1 Need not exceed 10
Springs 1 for each 1 Need not exceed 10
Complete trip element assembly for Applicable where
1 for each 10 identical trip elements
moulded case thermal type interchangeable elements are
or less
circuit-breakers used
Applicable where
Complete moulded case thermal type 1 for each group of 10 identical
non-interchangeable trip
circuit-breakers breakers or less
elements are used
Potential coils 1 for each kind
Resistors 1 for each kind
Lenses of pilot and signal lamps 1 for each 10 identical lenses or less
Lamps for pilot and singnal lamps 1 for each 1

2. Emergency lighting fittings

Where the voltage of emergency lighting circuits are different from that of general service, 1 for
each 2 lamps are to be supplied as the spare.

1802. Testing instruments

Ships having electrical equipment of 50 kW and above are to be provided with a 500 volt insulation
resistance measuring instrument in order that the insulation may be tested at regular intervals. In
addition, the following portable instruments are recommended :
(1) One portable voltmeter, a.c. or d.c. or both as required.
(2) One portable ammeter, a.c. or d.c. or both as required, with shunts or current transformers as
required.

1803. Disassembling tools

Where special tools are required to adjust or to disassemble electrical equipment, one set of each
tool is to be provided.

1804. Storing method

All spare parts, instruments and tools are to be packed in suitable wooden boxes or corrosion pro-
tected steel boxes and are to be marked to indicate the contents on the surface of boxes and are
to be stored in suitable locations. Where lockers are provided to store these spare parts, individual
boxes may be omitted.

78 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

CHAPTER 2 CONTROL SYSTEMS

Section 1 General

101. General
1. Application 【See Guidance】
(1) The requirements in this Chapter apply to the systems of control, alarm and safety which are
used to control all machinery and equipment which are subject to Rule requirements.
(2) Where considered necessary by the Society, the requirements in this Chapter are correspondingly
applied to the systems of control, alarm and safety which are used for controlling machinery and
equipment.
2. Terminology (2017)
Terms used in this Chapter are defined as follows:
(1) Monitoring station (excluding control station) is a position where measuring instruments, in-
dicators, alarms, etc. for the machinery and equipment are centralized and necessary information
to grasp the operating condition of them can be obtained. Where, however, a monitoring station
is provided with the ship in addition to a control station mentioned in (2) below, the require-
ments of the Rules relating to a monitoring station do not apply to the monitoring station
concerned.
(2) Control station is a position which has a function as a monitoring station and from which the
machinery and equipment can be controlled.
(3) Main control station is a control station provided with equipment necessary and sufficient to
control the main propulsion machinery (this equipment will be referred to as "main control equip-
ment" in this (3) and (4) and from which the main propulsion machinery is normally controlled, of
the ship which provides the main control equipment at the outside of the navigation bridge.
(4) Main control station on bridge is a navigation bridge of the ship which provides main control
equipment at the navigation bridge and that the main propulsion machinery is normally controlled
there.
(5) Sub-control station is such a control station at which the main propulsion machinery is capable
of being controlled, except for local control station for the main propulsion machinery, that is
provided in the machinery room of the ship provided with a main control station on bridge.
(6) Bridge control devices are remote control devices for the main propulsion machinery or control-
lable pitch propellers provided on a navigation bridge or a main control station on bridge.
(7) Sequential control is a pattern of control that can be carried out automatically in the re-
determined sequence.
(8) Program control is a pattern of control that desired values can be changed in the predetermined
schedule.
(9) Local control is direct manual control of the machinery and equipment performed at or near their
locations, receiving the necessary information from the measuring instruments, indicators and so
on.
(10) Remote control systems comprise all equipment necessary to operate units from a control po-
sition where the operator cannot directly observe the effect of his actions.
(11) Safety system is a system which operates automatically, in order to prevent damages to the
machinery and equipment in case where serious impediments to functioning should occur on
them during operation so that one of the following actions will take place.
(A) Starting of standby machinery or equipment.
(B) Reduction of outputs of the machinery or equipment.
(C) Shutting off the fuel or power supplies thereby stopping the machinery or equipment.
(12) Computer-based system is a system of one or more computers(including programmable elec-
tronic device), associated software, peripherals and interfaces, and the computer network with its
protocol.
(13) Integrated system is a system consisting of two or more subsystem having independent func-
tions connected by a data transmission network and operated from one or more workstations.
(14) Expert system is an intelligent knowledge-based system that is designed to solve a problem
with information that has been compiled using some form of human expertise.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 79

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

(15) Software is the program, procedures and associated documentation pertaining to the operation
of the computer system.
(16) Basic software is the minimum software, which includes firmware and middleware, required to
support the application software.
(17) Application software is a software performing tasks specific to the actual configuration of the
computer-based system and supported by the basic software.
(18) Interface is a transfer point at which information is exchanged. (examples : interfaces including
input/output interface; communications interface)
(19) Peripheral is a device performing an auxiliary function in the system(examples : printer, data
storage device)
(20) Failure mode and effect analysis(FMEA) is a failure analysis methodology used during design to
postulate every failure mode and the corresponding effect or consequences.
3. Drawings and data (2017)
(1) Drawings and data concerning automation
(A) List of measuring points
(B) List of alarm points
(C) Control devices and safety devices
(a) List of controlled objects and controlled variables
(b) Kinds of sources of control energy (self-actuated, pneumatic, electric, etc.)
(c) List of conditions for emergency stopping, speed reduction (automatic or demand for re-
duction), etc.
(2) Following drawings and data for the automatic control devices and remote control devices for
main engines or controllable pitch propellers:
(A) Operating instructions of main engines such as starting and stopping, changeover of direction
of revolution, increase and decrease of output, etc.
(B) Arrangements of safety devices (including those attached to the engines) and pilot lamps
(C) Controlling diagrams
(3) Following drawings and data for the automatic control devices and remote control devices for
boilers:
(A) Operating instructions of sequential control, feed water control, pressure control, combustion
control and safety devices
(B) Diagrams for automatic combustion control devices and automatic feed water control devices
(4) Diagrams and operating instructions for automatic control devices for electric generating sets
(automatic load sharing devices, preference tripping devices, automatic starting devices, automatic
synchronous making devices, sequential starting devices, etc.)
(5) Drawings of control panel in bridge
(6) Drawings of control panel in engine room
(7) Drawings of remote control system (for main engine, generator and boiler)
(8) Manufacturing drawings for alarm and control system (including list of alarm points)
(9) Panel arrangements of monitoring panels, alarming panels and control stands at respective con-
trol stations
(10) Schedules of on-board tests and sea trials

80 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

Section 2 System and Control

201. System design (2017)
1. System design requirements
(1) Control systems, alarm systems and safety systems are to be so designed that one fault does
not result in other faults as far as practicable and the extent of the damage could be kept to a
minimum.
(2) Control systems, alarm systems and safety systems are to be designed on the fail-to-safe
principle. The characteristics of fail-to-safe is to be evaluated on the basis not only of the re-
spective systems themselves and associated machinery and equipment, but also the total safety
of the ship.
(3) Systems of automatic or remote control are to be sufficiently reliable under service conditions.
(4) Cables for signals are to be installed in such a manner that harmful induced interference can be
avoided.
2. Supply of power
(1) Supply of electric power
The supply of electric power is to be in accordance with the following:
(A) Electric supply circuits to control systems, alarm systems and safety systems are not to
branch off from the power circuits and lighting circuits, except that the electric power to the
control systems, alarm systems and safety systems may be supplied from the power circuits
to the machinery and equipment they serve.
(B) The electric power to alarm systems and safety systems for electric generating sets is also
to be supplied from an accumulator battery.
(2) Supply of oil pressure
The supply of control oil pressure is to be in accordance with the following:
(A) Sources of oil pressure are to be capable of supplying stably necessary pressure and quantity
of purified oil.
(B) Overpressure preventive devices are to be provided on the delivery side of oil pressure
pumps.
(C) Two or more sets of oil pressure pumps for the control of main engines and main shaftings
are to be provided and they are to be so arranged that in case where one of the pumps in
operation becomes out of action standby pump(s) may start automatically or may be readily
remotely started. In this case, the oil pressure pumps are not to be used for the control of
other machinery and equipment than main engines and main shaftings.
(3) Supply of pneumatic pressure
The supply of control air is to be in accordance with the following:
(A) Control systems are to be provided with an air reservoir having a capacity capable of supply-
ing air to control devices at least for 5 minutes in the event of failure of the control air
compressor.
(B) Where starting air reservoirs for main propulsion diesel engines are used as control air reser-
voirs, pressure reducing valves are to be duplicated.
(C) There are to be two or more sets of air compressors which may be used as a source of
control air. Each air compressor is to have redundant capacity even in the event of failure of
either one of them.
(D) Control air is to pass through a filter and, if necessary, a drier so that solid, oil and water
may be removed to a minimum.
(E) Control air pipes are to be independent of general service air pipes and starting air pipes.
3. Environmental conditions
Systems of automatic or remote control are to be capable of withstanding the environmental con-
ditions of the places where they are installed.
4. Control systems
(1) Independency of control systems
Control systems for main engines or controllable pitch propellers, boilers, electric generating sets
and auxiliaries for main propulsion of the ship (hereinafter referred to as "essential auxiliary ma-
chinery") are to be independent each other or designed such that failure of one system does not
degrade the performance of another system.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 81

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

(2) Interconnection devices

In case of plural main engines, electric generating sets or important auxiliaries which are de-
signed to be operated simultaneously in multiple under the same condition, interconnection de-
vices may be provided between the control devices of these installations.
(3) Control characteristics
Remote control devices and automatic control devices are to have control characteristics in con-
formity with the dynamic properties of the machinery and equipment they serve and to be con-
sidered not to invite malfunction and hunting due to disturbance.
(4) Interlock
Control devices are to be provided with suitable interlocking arrangements in order to prevent
damages to the machinery and equipment due to anticipated malfunction and maloperation of the
machinery and equipment.
(5) Change-over to manual operating
Change-over to manual operating is to comply with the following requirements:
(A) Main engines, boilers, electric generating sets and auxiliaries for main propulsion of the ship
are to be so arranged as to be manually started, operated and controlled even in the event
where automatic control devices become out of action.
(B) Automatic control devices are generally to be provided with provisions to stop manually the
automatic function of these devices.
(C) The provisions specified in (B) are to be capable of stopping the automatic function of the
automatic control devices, even where any part of the automatic control devices become out
of action.
(6) Cancellation of remote control function
For remote control devices, the function of remote control is to be capable of being manually
cancelled.
(7) Indication of control locations 【See Guidance】
In case where the machinery and equipment are capable of being operated from more than one
station, the following requirements in (A) and (B) are to be complied with. However, this re-
quirement need not be complied with in case the safety of the machinery and equipment and
the safety at the time of maintenance work can be obtained by means of other measures con-
sidered appropriate by the Society.
(A) At each control station there is to be an indicator showing which station is in control of the
machinery and equipment.
(B) Control of the machinery and equipment is to be possible only from one station at a time.
5. Alarm systems
(1) Function of alarm systems is to comply with the following requirements:
(A) In case where an abnormal condition is detected devices to issue visual and audible alarms
(hereinafter referred to as "alarm devices" in this Chapter) are to operate.
(B) In case where arrangements are made to silence audible alarms they are not to extinguish
visual alarms.
(C) Two or more faults are to be indicated at the same time.
(D) Audible alarms for machinery and equipment are to be clearly distinguishable from other au-
dible alarms such as general alarm, fire alarm, CO2 flooding alarm, etc.
(2) Function of the alarm systems provided in the monitoring station for main engines or controllable
pitch propellers is to comply with the following requirements, in addition to the requirements in
(1).
(A) The visual indications of visual alarms are to remain until the fault has been corrected.
(B) The acceptance of any alarm is not to inhibit another alarm.
(C) If an alarm has been acknowledged and a second fault occurs prior to the first being rec-
tified, alarm devices are again to operate.
(D) Manual stopping of each alarm system is to be clearly indicated.
(3) Visual alarms are to be such that each abnormal condition of the machinery and equipment is
readily distinguishable and so arranged that acknowledgement is clearly noticeable.
6. Safety systems
(1) Constitution of systems
Constitution of safety systems is to comply with the following requirements:
(A) The safety systems are to be, as far as practicable, provided independently of the control
systems and alarm systems.

82 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

(B) The safety systems for the main engines, boilers, electric generating sets and auxiliaries for
main propulsion of the ship are to be independent each other.
(2) Function of safety systems
Function of the safety systems is to comply with the following requirements:
(A) The alarm systems which have functions prescribed in Par 5 are to operate when the safety
system is put into action.
(B) In case where the safety system is put into action and the operation of the machinery or
equipment is stopped, they are not to automatically restart before manual reset is made.
(3) Override arrangements
Where arrangements for stopping temporarily the functions of safety system in part or in
whole(hereinafter referred to as "override arrangements") are provided, the following requirements
in (A) and (B) are to be complied with:
(A) Visual indication is to be given at the relevant control stations of the machinery and equip-
ment when an override is operated.
(B) The override arrangements are to be such that inadvertent operation is prevented.

202. Automatic and remote control of main engines or controllable pitch propellers 【See Guidance】
1. General
Remote control devices for main propulsion machinery or controllable pitch propellers are to be
complied with the requirements of this 202.
2. Remote control devices for main engines or controllable pitch propellers
(1) General
(A) The remote control devices for main engines or controllable pitch propellers are to be capa-
ble of controlling the propeller speed and the direction of thrust (the blade angle of pro-
pellers in the case of controllable pitch propellers) by means of a simple operation.
(B) The remote control devices for main engines or controllable pitch propellers are to be pro-
vided for each propeller.
(C) In case where the speed of the main diesel engines is controlled by governors, the governors
are to be adjusted so that main engine may not exceed 103 % of the maximum continuous
revolutions. The governors are to be capable of maintaining the safe minimum speed.
(D) In case where the program control is adopted, the program for increase and decrease of
output is to be so designed that undue mechanical stresses and thermal stresses do not
occur in any parts of machinery.
(E) In the remote control stations and monitoring stations for the main engines, the following in-
struments are to be provided:
(a) Indicators for propeller speed and direction of rotation in the case of solid propellers.
(b) Indicators for propeller speed and pitch position in the case of controllable pitch propeller.
(F) In the remote control stations for main engines or controllable pitch propellers, alarm devices
necessary for the control of main engines are to be provided.
(2) Transfer of control
The remote control devices for main engines or controllable pitch propellers are to comply with
the following requirements with respect to transfer of control:
(A) Each control station for main engines or controllable pitch propellers is to be provided with
means to indicate which of them is in control.
(B) Remote control of the main engines is to be possible only from one location at a time.
(C) Transfer of control is to be possible only with order by the serving station and acknowledge-
ment by the receiving station except for the following cases.
(a) Transfer of control between local control station for main propulsion machinery and main
control station or sub-control station.
(b) Transfer of control during the stopping condition of the main propulsion machinery.
(D) The transfer of control between the navigating bridge and the local or main control station is
to be possible only in the local or main control station.
(E) Means are to be provided to prevent the propelling thrust from altering significantly when
transferring control from one location to another except for the transfer of control described
in (C) (a) and (D).
(3) Failure of remote control systems of main engines or controllable pitch propellers
The following requirements are to be complied with in case of failure of remote control devices
for main engines or controllable pitch propellers:

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 83

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

(A) In the remote control stations for main engines or controllable pitch propellers alarm devices
which operate in the event of failure of the remote control devices for main engines or con-
trollable pitch propellers are to be provided.
(B) In the event of failure of the remote control devices for main engines or controllable pitch
propellers, the main engines are to be possible to control locally.
(C) In the event of failure of the remote control devices for main engines or controllable pitch
propellers, the preset speed and direction of the propeller thrust are to be maintained until
the control is in operation at the main control station or the local control station, unless this
is considered impracticable by the Society.
(D) In the event of failure of the remote control devices for main engines or controllable pitch
propellers, the transfer of control to the main control station or the local control station is to
be possible by a simple operation.
(E) Remote control stations for main engines or controllable pitch propellers are to be provided
with independent emergency stopping devices for the main engines, which are effective in
the event of failure of the remote control devices for main engines or controllable pitch
propellers.
(4) Remote starting of main diesel engines
Starting by means of remote control devices for main engines or controllable pitch propellers is
to comply with the following:
(A) The number of starting of main engines is to satisfy the number specified in Pt 5, Ch 6,
1101.
(B) The remote control devices for main engines or controllable pitch propellers arranged to au-
tomatically start are to be so designed that the number of automatic consecutive attempts
which fail to produce a start is limited to three times. In the event of failure of starting, a
visual and audible alarm is to be issued at the relevant control station and the main control
station or monitoring station for the main engines.
(C) Where compressed air is used for starting of the main engines, alarm devices to indicate the
low starting air pressure are to be provided at the remote control station and the monitoring
station for the main engines.
(D) The low starting air pressure mentioned in (C) for the operation of alarm devices is to be
set at a level to permit further main engines starting operations.
3. Bridge control devices
Bridge control devices are to comply with the following requirements as well as those in 202. 2.
(1) Even when the main engines are controlled from the navigating bridge, the telegraph orders at
the navigating bridge are to be indicated in the main control station.
(2) The bridge control devices are to be provided with either one of the following devices in order
to prevent prolonged running of main engines in critical speed range:
(A) Devices to make to pass automatically and rapidly through the critical speed range; or
(B) Alarm devices which operate in case where the main engines operate exceeding a pre-
determined period in the critical speed range.
(3) Automation system is to be designed in a manner which ensures that threshold warning of im-
pending or imminent slowdown or shutdown of the propulsion system is given to the officer in
charge of the navigational watch in time to assess navigational circumstances in an emergency.
In particular, the systems shall control, monitor, report, alert and take safety action to slow down
or stop propulsion which providing the officer in charge of the navigational watch an opportunity
to manually intervene, except for those cases where manual intervention will result in total fail-
ure of the engine and/or propulsion equipment within a short time, for example in the case of
overspeed.
4. Safety measures
(1) Safety measures for main engines or controllable pitch propellers
Safety measures for main engines or controllable pitch propellers are to comply with the follow-
ing requirements:
(A) The following safety measures are to be taken to the remote control devices for the main
engines:
(a) Necessary interlocking devices are to be provided to prevent serious damage due to
mis-operation.
(b) Where the auxiliaries for propulsion of the ship are driven by electric motors, the main
engines are to be so designed as to stop automatically in the event of failure of the

84 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

main source of electric power or to be capable of being stopped.

(c) The main engines are to be so arranged as not to re-start automatically when electric
power is restored after the failure of the main source of electric power whereas the
main engines were stopped.
(d) The remote control devices for main engines or controllable pitch propellers are to be so
designed that the engines may not be abnormally overloaded in the event of failure of
them.
(B) Stopping devices for main engines or controllable pitch propellers are to be provided at the
monitoring station for main engines or controllable pitch propellers.
(2) Safety systems of main engines
Safety systems of main engines are to comply with the following requirements:
(A) A device to shut off the fuel or steam supply to the main engines (this device hereinafter
being referred to as "safety device") is not to be automatically activated except in cases
which could lead to complete breakdown, serious damage or explosion.
(B) The safety systems for main engines or controllable pitch propellers are to be so designed
as not to lose their function or as to fail-to-safe, even in the event of failure of main elec-
tric source or air source.
(3) Self-reversing diesel engines
As least the following safety measures are to be taken to the remote control devices for
self-reversing diesel engines:
(A) Starting operation is to be possible only when the camshaft is surely at the position of
"Ahead" or "Astern".
(B) During reversing operation, fuel is not to be injected.
(C) Reversing operation is to be conducted after "Ahead" revolution is reduced to a pre-
determined value.
(4) Multi-engines to single shaft
At least the following safety measures are to be taken to the remote control devices for mul-
ti-engines coupled to a single shaft:
(A) Each engine is to be provided with an overload preventive device.
(B) Each engine is not to be subjected to an abnormally unbalanced load.
(5) Main propulsion machinery with clutch
At least the following safety measures are to be taken to the remote control devices for engines
with clutch:
(A) The clutch equipped to a main propulsion machinery in a multi-engines coupled to a single
shaft is to be disengaged when the main propulsion machinery is stopped in an emergency.
While multi-engines are operating in different directions of rotation their clutches are not to
be engaged simultaneously.
(B) Engaging and disengaging of clutches are to be carried out below a predetermined value of
the number of revolutions of the main engines.
(C) A overspeed protective device specified in Pt 5, Ch 2, 203. 1. or 304. 1.
(D) In case where there is fear that the speed of the propulsion motor would exceed 125 % of
the rated revolutions when the clutch is disengaged, an overspeed protective device as
deemed appropriate by the Society is to be approved.
(6) Main propulsion machinery driving controllable pitch propellers
At least the following safety measures are to be taken to the remote control devices for engines
driving controllable pitch propellers:
(A) Overload preventive devices are to be provided.
(B) Starting of engines or engaging of clutches is to be performed while the propeller blades are
in a neutral position.
(C) An overspeed protective device as specified in Pt 5, Ch 2, 203. 1. or 304. 1.
(D) In case where there is fear that the speed of the propulsion motor would exceed 125 % of
the rated revolutions when the propeller pitch is altered, an overspeed protective device as
deemed appropriate by the Society is to be provided.

203. Automatic and remote control of boilers

1. General
(1) The systems of automatic control for both combustion and feed water of oil-fired boilers are to
comply with the requirements in Pars 2 to 4 respectively.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 85

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

(2) The systems of automatic control for either combustion or feed water of oil-fired boilers are to
comply with the relevant requirements in Par 2 or 3 as well as the requirements in Par 4.
(3) Automatic control of boilers other than oil-fired boilers or having a special feature will be con-
sidered in each case. 【See Guidance】
(4) Remote water level indicators are to comply with the requirements in Pt 5, Ch 5, 129.
2. Automatic combustion control systems
(1) General
Automatic combustion control systems are to comply with the following requirements:
(A) The automatic combustion control systems are to be able to control so as to obtain planned
steam amount, steam pressure and steam temperature and to secure stable combustion.
(B) The devices to control the fuel supply to meet the load imposed are to be capable of en-
suring stable combustion in the controllable range of fuel supply.
(C) Where combustion control is carried out according to the pressure of the boiler, the upper
limit of this pressure is to be lower than the set pressure of the safety valves.
(2) Combustion control devices for intermittent operation
The combustion control devices for intermittent operation are to comply with the following re-
quirements and they are to operate according to the planned sequence:
(A) Before ignition on the pilot burner or before ignition on the main burner if the pilot burner is
not fitted, the combustion chamber and flue are to be prepurged by air of not less than four
times the volume of combustion chamber and flue up to the boiler uptake. For small boilers
with only one burner, prepurge for not less than 30 seconds will be accepted.
(B) In case of direct ignition which is the method of ignition that the main burner is fired by ig-
nition spark, opening of the fuel valve is not to precede the ignition spark.
(C) In case of indirect ignition which is a method of ignition that the main burner is fired by pi-
lot burner, opening of the fuel valve for pilot burner (hereinafter referred to as "ignition fuel
valve") is not to precede the ignition spark, and opening of the fuel valve for main burner
(hereinafter referred to as "main fuel valve") is not to precede the opening of ignition fuel
valve.
(D) Firing is to be surely carried out within the planned period. Main fuel valve is to be so de-
signed as to close after opening of the valve not exceeding 10 seconds in the case of di-
rect ignition and 15 seconds in the case of indirect ignition if the firing on the main burner
has failed.
(E) Firing on main burners is to be carried out at their low firing position.
(F) After closure of the main fuel valve, postpurge is to be carried out for not less than 20
seconds to ensure adequate combustion air to completely burn all fuel oil remaining between
the fuel oil valve and the burner nozzle. This requirement need not be complied with in the
case of auxiliary boilers where approved by the Society. 【See Guidance】
(3) Combustion control devices for the control of the number of firing burners
The combustion control devices for the control of the number of firing burners are to comply
with the following requirements:
(A) Each burner is to be fired and extinguished according to the planned sequence. However,
the base burner may be fired by manual operation and other burners may be fired by flame
of a burner(s) already fired.
(B) The remaining fuel in the extinguished burner is to be automatically burnt up in order not to
interfere the restarting. However, while the pilot burner is not fired, the remaining fuel in the
base burner is not to be removed by steam or air when it is in place.
(C) The burners for main boilers are to be capable of being fired and extinguished from the
main control station, except for the firing of base burner.
(4) Other combustion control devices 【See Guidance】
Other combustion control devices will be considered in each case by the Society, as well as
they are to comply with the relevant requirements in (2) and (3).
3. Automatic feed water control devices
(1) The automatic feed water control devices are to be capable of controlling automatically the feed
water in order to maintain the water level in the boilers in a predetermined range.
(2) Main boilers are to be provided with not less than three water level detectors used for feed
water control device, remote water level indicator, low water level safety device and low-water
level alarm device.

86 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

4. Safety measures
(1) Safety devices
Safety devices are to comply with the requirements in Pt 5, Ch 5, 133. 1.
(2) Heating of fuel oil
In case where heated fuel oil is used, an automatic temperature control device is to be provided
to the heater and the boiler is to be provided with a device to shut off automatically the fuel
supply to the burners or an alarm device which operates when the temperature of fuel oil falls
below a predetermined value.
5. Alarms
Alarm devices are to comply with the requirements in Pt 5, Ch 5, 133. 2.

204. Control system of electric generating sets

1. General
(1) Electric generating set arranged to be automatically or remotely started is to be provided with
interlocking devices necessary for safe operation.
(2) Electric generating set arranged to be automatically started is to be so designed that the num-
ber of automatic consecutive attempts which fail to produce a start is limited to two times and
to be provided with an alarm device which operate at the time of the failure of starting.
(3) In case where a diesel engine to drive a propulsion generator is remote started the number of
starting is to conform to the required number specified in Pt 5, Ch 2, 202. 5.
(4) Where automatic start of the standby generating set with automatic connection to the switch-
board busbars is provided, automatic closure on to the busbars is to be limited to one attempt,
in the event of the original power failure being caused by short circuit.
(5) Automatic control and remote control systems for the electric generating set, whose generator is
driven by the main propulsion machinery and supplies electrical power to the electrical in-
stallations necessary for normal operating and living conditions and is operated while the main
propulsion machinery is controlled by the bridge control devices, are to comply with the require-
ments in Pt 6, Ch 1, 202. in addition to those in this Article.
2. Emergency Source of Electric Power
Automatic or remote control devices for diesel engines to drive emergency generators are to be
complied with the following requirements: (2020)
(1) Alarm devices to be activated in the event of the abnormal conditions given in Table 6.2.1 are
to be provided.
(2) Devices referred to in (1) are to provide alarms at both local and control positions. The visual
alarms at control positions may be of group indication.
(3) Each diesel engine with a maximum continuous output of 220 kW or over is to be provided with
an overspeed protective device specified in Pt 5, Ch 2, 203. 1 (2).
(4) When devices to shutdown the diesel engines are provided other than those referred to in
Table 6.2.1, means are to be provided to override those devices automatically during navigation.
(5) The silencing of the audible alarms from the control positions is not to cause the silencing of
the audible alarm at local position.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 87

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

Table 6.2.1 Alarms for diesel engines to drive emergency generators (2021)

Auto
Shut
Monitored parameters Notes
AA down
[H=High L=Low O=Abnormal status] [AA=Alarm Activation ●=apply]
with
alarm

For engines having a power of 220 kW

Lub. oil inlet H ●
Temp. or over

Cooling water(or cooling air) outlet H ●

Lub. oil inlet L ●

Press. Pressure or flow of cooling water For engines having a power of 220 kW
L ●
inlet or over

For engines having a power of more than

2250 kW , or a cylinder bore of more
Oil mist concentration in crankcase(H) than 300 mm
or main & connecting rod bearing An equivalent device could be interpreted
H ●
temp. (or oil outlet temp.)(H) or an as measures applied to high speed en-
equivalent device gines where specific design features to
Others preclude the risk of crankcase explosions
are incorporated.(1)

Fuel oil leakage from high pressure

O ●
pipes

For engines having a power of 220 kW

Overspeed O ● ●
or over

(NOTE)
(1) Oil mist detection system is to be of the approved type by the Society, tested by Ch 3, Sec. 10 of the
Guidance for Approval of Manufacturing Process and Type Approval, Etc. and applied to Pt.5 Ch 2, 203.

205. Automatic and remote control of auxiliary machinery

1. Automatic operation of air compressors
In case where air compressors for starting and air compressors for controlling are automatically op-
erated, alarm devices are to be provided to indicate pressure drop in air reservoirs.
2. Automatic starting and stopping of bilge pumping arrangements
In case where the bilge pumps are capable of being started and stopped automatically, alarm de-
vices are to be provided to indicate high level of bilge in the relevant bilge wells and running of
pumps for a long time.
3. Thermal oil installations
Thermal oil installations arranged to be automatically controlled are to comply with the following:
(1) Standby pumps
Pumps listed in the following of the thermal oil installations for important use are to be provided
in two sets or more. The standby pumps are to be so arranged that they can start automatically
or are capable of being started without delay from the relevant monitoring station when the dis-
charge pressure or flow rate from the working pump falls below a predetermined value or when
the pump stops.
(A) Thermal oil circulating pumps
(B) Fuel oil supply pumps
(2) Control devices
Control devices are to comply with 203. 2 (1) and (2), and also with Pt 5, Ch 5, 202. 1 and 2.
(3) Safety devices
Safety devices are to comply with Pt 5, Ch 5, 201. and 202. 5.

88 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

(4) Alarm devices

Thermal oil installations are to be provided with alarm devices which operate in the following
cases:
(A) When the safety devices required in (3) have operated.
(B) When the temperature of fuel at the inlet of burner has fallen.
4. High temperature alarm for oil heaters
In case where temperature for fuel oil and lubricating oil is automatically controlled, high temper-
ature alarm devices are to be provided, except where oils are not heated above the flashpoint.
5. Opening and closing devices for sea valves
In case where sea valves to be fitted on the shell plating below the load water line are remotely or
automatically controlled, other opening and closing devices which can be easily operated even in the
event of failure of the automatic or remote control devices are to be provided.
6. Liquid level alarm systems for fuel oil tanks
In case where fuel transfer to fuel oil tanks is automatically controlled, the receiving tanks are to be
provided with high and low level alarm systems.
7. Mooring arrangements
In case where mooring arrangements are provided with remote control devices, the mooring ar-
rangements are to be capable of being locally operated.
8. Fuel oil filling arrangements
In case where arrangements for filling fuel oil into respective fuel oil tanks from the outside of the
ships (hereinafter referred to as "fuel oil filling arrangements" in this Chapter) are provided with re-
mote control devices, the fuel oil filling arrangements are to be such as not to interfere with filling
of fuel even in the event of failure of the remote control devices.
9. Emergency Diesel Engines
The requirements in 204. 2 apply correspondingly to the automatic or remote control devices for
emergency diesel engines used for non-emergency purposes other than those mentioned in 204. 2.

206. Control system of electric propulsion unit

It is to comply with the requirements in Ch 1, Sec 16 in addition to the relevant requirements of
this Chapter.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 89

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

Section 3 Tests (2017)

301. Shop tests 【See Guidance】

1. Type approval
Devices, units and sensors (hereinafter referred to as "automatic devices" in the Rules) and auto-
matic equipment composed of automatic devices and basic software (if applicable) are to be type
approved, in principle, according to the test methods approved by the Society before being taken
into use.
2. Shop tests of automation system
The automatic devices which have passed through the type approval tests specified in Par 1. are to
be subjected to the following tests after completion of assembly as automation system.
(1) Hardware
(A) External examination
(B) Operation tests and performance tests
(C) Insulation resistance tests and high voltage tests (to be applied to electric devices, electronic
devices and so on)
(D) Pressure tests (to be applied to hydraulic devices, pneumatic devices and so on)
(E) Other tests considered necessary by the Society
(2) Software (2017)
Software acceptance tests of computer-based systems are to comply with Sec 4.

302. On-board tests 【See Guidance】

After installed on board the systems of automatic or remote control of the machinery and equip-
ment are to be confirmed that they operate effectively, under as far practical condition as possible.
However, part of these tests may be carried out during sea trials. The proper documents, in which
test procedures, set value for alarms and for operation of safety systems and so on are recorded,
are to be kept on board.

303. Sea trials 【See Guidance】

1. Main propulsion machinery and controllable pitch propellers

The control systems for main engines or controllable pitch propellers are to be subjected to the fol-
lowing tests. After completion of the test on transfer of control specified in (3), it is to be shown
that the main engines can be smoothly operated from the respective control stations.
(1) The main engines are to be subjected to starting tests, ahead-astern tests and running tests in
the whole range of output, by means of the remote control devices from the main control
station.
(2) In addition to output increase and decrease tests, the operation tests of the main engines using
the bridge control devices are to be carried out at the discretion of the Society.
(3) In case where there are other control stations for main engines or controllable pitch propellers
such as navigating bridge, the test on transfer of control for main engines or controllable pitch
propellers is to be carried out during ahead and astern operations of the main engines. In case
where, however, considered appropriate by the Society, the test on transfer of control to the lo-
cal control stations may be carried out during stoppage of the main engines.
2. Boilers
The control systems for boilers are to be subjected to the following tests.
(1) With respect to the main boilers, it is to be confirmed that the feed water control devices,
combustion control devices and so on can operate stably in response to load variation of the
main boilers, and the main boilers can supply steam stably to the main engines, electric gen-
erating sets and auxiliaries for propulsion of the ship, without local manual operation.
(2) With respect to auxiliary boilers used for important use, it is to be confirmed that they can sup-
ply steam stably to the auxiliaries for propulsion of the ship without manual operation.
(3) In case where an exhaust gas economizer is used as a source of steam supply to a turbine for

90 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

driving a generator and steam supply from a boiler is carried out automatically in the case of
low power condition of the main engines, operation tests of automatic control devices for this
system are to be carried out.
3. Electric generating sets
In case where generators which supply electric power to the loads necessary for propulsion of ships
and whose motive power is relying upon the propulsion systems, the systems of automatic or re-
mote control of electric generating sets are to be subjected to operation tests.
4. Electric propulsion plants
After electric propulsion plants are installed on board ship, sea trial is to be carried out in accord-
ance with the test procedure.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 91

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

Section 4 Computer Based Systems (2017)

401. Introduction
1. Scope
The requirements of this Section apply to design, construction, commissioning and maintenance of
computer based systems where they depend on software for the proper achievement of their
functions. The requirements focus on the functionality of the software and on the hardware sup-
porting the software. The requirements of this Section apply to the use of computer based systems
which provide control, alarm, monitoring, safety or internal communication functions which are sub-
ject to classification requirements.
2. Exclusion
Navigation systems required by SOLAS Chapter V, Radio-communication systems required by SOLAS
Chapter IV, and vessel loading instrument/stability computer are not in the scope of this
requirement.
3. References
For the purpose of application of the requirements of this Section, the following identified standards
can be used for the development of hardware/software of computer based systems. Other industry
standards may be considered:
(1) IEC 61508: Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related sys-
tems
(2) ISO/IEC 12207: Systems and software engineering - Software life cycle processes
(3) ISO 9001:2008 Quality Management Systems - Requirements
(4) ISO/IEC 90003: Software engineering - Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001:2008 to com-
puter software
(5) IEC 60092-504: Electrical installations in ships - Part 504: Special features - Control and in-
strumentation
(6) ISO/IEC 25000: Systems and software engineering - Systems and software Quality Requirements
and Evaluation (SQuaRE) - Guide to SQuaRE
(7) ISO/IEC 25041: Systems and software engineering - Systems and software Quality Requirements
and Evaluation (SQuaRE) - Evaluation guide for developers, acquirers and independent evaluators
(8) IEC 61511: Functional safety - Safety instrumented systems for the process industry sector
(9) ISO/IEC 15288: Systems and software engineering - system life cycle process

402. Definitions
1. Stakeholders
(1) Owner
(A) The Owner is responsible for contracting the system integrator and/or suppliers to provide a
hardware system including software according to the owner’s specification.
(B) The Owner could be the Ship Builder Integrator (Builder or Shipyard) during initial
construction. After vessel delivery, the owner may delegate some responsibilities to the ves-
sel operating company.
(2) System integrator
(A) The role of system integrator is to be taken by the yard unless an alternative organisation is
specifically contracted/assigned this responsibility. The system integrator is responsible for
the integration of systems and products provided by suppliers into the system invoked by
the requirements specified herein and for providing the integrated system. The system in-
tegrator may also be responsible for integration of systems in the vessel.
(B) If there are multiple parties performing system integration at any one time a single party is
to be responsible for overall system integration and coordinating the integration activities. If
there are multiple stages of integration different System Integrators may be responsible for
specific stages of integration but a single party is to be responsible for defining and coordi-
nating all of the stages of integration.
(3) Supplier

92 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

(A) The Supplier is any contracted or subcontracted provider of system components or software
under the coordination of the System Integrator or Shipyard. The supplier is responsible for
providing programmable devices, sub-systems or systems to the system integrator.
(B) The supplier provides a description of the software functionality that meets the Owner’s
specification, applicable international and national standards, and the requirements specified
herein.
2. Objects
Fig 6.2.1 shows the hierarchy and relationships of a typical computer based system.

Note : dashed lines show non-developed branches of diagram

Fig 6.2.1 llustrative System Hierarchy

(1) Object definitions

(A) System
Combination of interacting programmable devices and/or sub-systems organized to achieve
one or more specified purposes.
(B) Sub-system
Identifiable part of a system, which may perform a specific function or set of functions.
(C) Programmable device
Physical component where software is installed.
(D) Software module
A module is a standalone piece of code that provides specific and closely coupled
functionality.
3. System categories
(1) Table 6.2.2 shows how to assign system categories based on their effects on system
functionality.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 93

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

Table 6.2.2 System categories

Category Effects Typical System functionality

Those systems, failure of which will
not lead to dangerous situations for - Monitoring function for informational /
I
human safety, safety of the vessel administrative tasks
and/or threat to the environment.
Those systems, failure of which could - Alarm and monitoring functions
eventually lead to dangerous situations - Control functions which are necessary to main-
II
for human safety, safety of the vessel tain the ship in its normal operational and habit-
and/or threat to the environment. able conditions
Those systems, failure of which could
immediately lead to dangerous sit- - Control functions for maintaining the vessel’s
III uations for human safety, safety of the propulsion and steering
vessel and/or threat to the - Vessel safety functions
environment.

(2) The following systems typically belong to Category III, the exact category being dependent on
the risk assessment for all operational scenarios:
(A) Propulsion system of a ship, meaning the means to generate and control mechanical thrust
in order to move the ship (devices used only during manoeuvring are not in the scope of
this requirement such as bow tunnel thrusters)
(B) Steering system control system
(C) Electric power system (including power management system)
(D) Ship safety systems covering fire detection and fighting, flooding detection and fighting, in-
ternal communication systems involved in evacuation phases, ship systems involved in oper-
ation of life saving appliances equipment
(E) Dynamic positioning system of equipment classes DPS(2) and DPS(3) according to IMO
MSC/Circ.645
(F) Drilling systems
(3) The following systems typically belong to Category II, the exact category being dependent on the
risk assessment for all operational scenarios:
(A) Liquid cargo transfer control system
(B) Bilge level detection and associated control of pumps
(C) Fuel oil treatment system
(D) Ballast transfer valve remote control system
(E) Stabilization and ride control systems
(F) Alarm and monitoring systems for propulsion systems
(4) The example systems are not exhaustive.
4. Other terminology
(1) Simulation tests
Control system testing where the equipment under control is partly or fully replaced with simu-
lation tools, or where parts of the communication network and lines are replaced with simulation
tools.

403. Systems requirements

1. General
(1) Program and memory data
To preclude the possible loss or corruption of data as a result of power disruption, programs and
associated memory data considered to be essential for the operation of the specific system are
to be stored in non-volatile memory.
(2) Start-up after power failure
The system's software and hardware is to be designed so that upon restoration of power supply
after power failure, automatic or remote control and monitoring capabilities can immediately be
available after the pre-established computer control access (sign-in) procedure has been
completed.

94 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

(3) Self monitoring

Computer-based systems are to be self-monitoring and any incorrect operation or abnormal con-
dition is to be alarmed at the computer workstation.
(4) Power supply
The power supply is to be monitored for voltage failure and protected for short circuit. Where
redundant computer systems are provided to satisfy (5), they are to be separately fed.
(5) System independence
Control, monitoring and safety systems are to be arranged such that a single failure or malfunc-
tion of the computer equipment will not affect more than one of these system functions.
(6) Response time
Computer system's memory is to be of sufficient capacity to handle the operation of all com-
puter programs as configured in the computer system. The time response for processing and
transmitting data is to be such that an undesirable chain of events may not arise as a result of
unacceptable data delay or response time during the computer system's worst data overload op-
erating condition. For propulsion related system applications, the time limit on response delays
for safety and alarm displays is not to exceed two(2) seconds. The response delay is to be tak-
en as the time between detection of an alarm or safety critical condition and the display of the
alarm or actuation of the safety system.
(7) Fail-safe
Computer-based system is to be designed such that failure of any of the system's components
will not cause unsafe operation of the process or the equipment it controls. FMEA is to be used
to determine that any component failure will not result in the complete loss of control, the shut-
down of the process or equipment, or other undesirable consequences.
2. Additional requirements for integrated systems
(1) General
Common hardware in an integrated system serving many subsystems, e.g., monitor, keyboard,
microprocessor, etc., is to be duplicated or otherwise provided with a means of backup.
(2) Component independence
Failure of one part (individual module, equipment or subsystem) of the integrated system is not
to affect the functionality of other parts, except for those functions directly dependent upon in-
formation from the defective part.
(3) Data communication
(A) Data link
(a) Any detected abnormal condition is to be alarmed at the centralized control station and
on the navigation bridge.
(b) Safeguards are to be provided to prevent unacceptable data transmission delays
(overloading of network).
(c) Alarm is to be activated prior to a critical data overload condition.
(B) Duplicated data link
(a) When the same data link is used for two or more essential functions (e.g., propulsion
control and generator control), this link is to be duplicated, and each is to be routed as
far apart from the other as practical.
(b) The duplicate link is for standby purpose only and not to be used to reduce traffic in the
online link.
(c) Duplicated data link is to be arranged so that upon the failure of the on-line link, the
standby link is automatically connected to the system. Switching between duplicated links
is not to disturb data communication or continuous functioning of the system.
(d) The failure of one link is to be alarmed at the centralized control station and on the nav-
igation bridge.
(C) Connection failure
(a) A complete failure in connectivity between component systems and the data highway is
not to affect individual functionality of the component systems.
3. Expert system
The expert system software is not to be implemented on a computer linked with essential functions
and is not to be used for direct control or operation.

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 95

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

4. Hardware
(1) Design for ease of maintenance
(A) The design and layout of the hardware is to ensure ease of access to interchangeable parts
for repairs and maintenance.
(B) Each replaceable part is to be simple to replace and is to be constructed for easy and safe
handling.
(C) All replaceable parts are to be so designed that it is not possible to connect them incorrectly
or to use incorrect replacements. Where this is not practicable, the replaceable parts and
their mounting location, including their means of electrical connection, are to be clearly
marked.
(2) User interface and input devices
(A) General
Input devices are to have clearly marked functions and, as far as practicable, are to be
arranged to avoid conceivable inadvertent errors in their operations.
(B) Security
Input devices, such as keyboard, which can be used to effect changes to equipment or
processes under control, are to be provided with security arrangement, such as password, so
as to limit access to authorized personnel only.
Where a single action of, for example, pressing of a key is able to cause dangerous operat-
ing conditions or malfunctions, measures such as use of two or more keys are to be taken
to prevent execution by a single action.
(C) Control Status
Where control action can be effected from more than one station, conflicting control station
actions are to be prevented by means of interlock or warning. Control status is to be in-
dicated at all stations.
(3) Visual display unit
(A) General
The size, color and density of text and graphic information displayed on a visual display unit
are to be such that it may be easily read from the normal operator position under all opera-
tional lighting conditions. The brightness and contrast are to be capable of being adjusted.
(B) Alarm display
Where alarms are displayed by means of visual display unit, they are to appear in the se-
quence as the incoming signals are received. Alarming of the incoming fault signals is to
appear on the screen, regardless of the mode the computer or the visual display unit is in.
(C) Propulsion monitoring
Where visual display unit is used to display monitored parameters, unless other display
means are provided capable of displaying the same information, the centralized control sta-
tion is to be provided with at least two computer monitors.
(D) Color monitor
The failure of a primary color is not to prevent an alarm from being distinctly indicated.
(4) Graphical display
(A) General
Information is to be presented clearly and intelligibly, according to its functional relations.
Display presentations are to be restricted to the data which is directly relevant for the user.
(B) Alarms
Alarms are to be clearly distinguishable from other information and are to be visually and
audibly presented with priority over other information, regardless of the mode the computer
or the visual display unit is in.

404. Requirements for software and supporting hardware

1. Life cycle approach
A global top to bottom approach is to be undertaken regarding software and the integration in a
system, spanning the software lifecycle. This approach is to be accomplished according to software
development standards as listed herein or other standards recognized by the Class Society.
(1) Quality system
(A) System integrators and suppliers is to operate a quality system regarding software develop-
ment and testing and associated hardware such as ISO 9001 taking into account ISO 90003.

96 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

(B) Satisfaction of this requirement is to be demonstrated by either:

(a) The quality system being certified as compliant to the recognized standard by an organ-
isation with accreditation under a national accreditation scheme, or
(b) The Society confirming compliance to the standard through a specific assessment.
(C) This quality system is to include:
(a) Relevant procedures regarding responsibilities, system documentation, configuration man-
agement and competent staff.
(b) Relevant procedures regarding software lifecycle and associated hardware:
(i) Organization set in place for acquisition of related hardware and software from suppli-
ers
(ii) Organization set in place for software code writing and verification
(iii) Organization set in place for system validation before integration in the vessel
(c) Minimum requirements for approval of Quality system:
(i) Having a specific procedure for verification of software code of Category II and III at
the level of systems, sub-systems and programmable devices and modules
(ii) Having check points for the Society for Category II and III systems (see Table 6.2.3
for the minimum check points). Examples of check points can be a required sub-
mittal of documentation, a test event, a technical design review meeting, or peer re-
view meeting.
(iii) Having a specific procedure for software modification and installation on board the
vessel defining interactions with owners
(d) Quality Plan
A document, referred to herein as a Quality Plan, is to be produced that records how
the quality management system will be applied for the specific computer based system
and that includes, as a minimum, all of material required by (a) to (c) inclusively.
(2) Design phase
(A) Risk assessment of system
(a) This step is to be undertaken to determine the risk to the system throughout the life-
cycle by identifying and evaluating the hazards associated with each function of the
system. A risk assessment report is to upon request be submitted to the Society.
(b) This document is normally to be submitted by the System Integrator or the Supplier, in-
cluding data coming from other suppliers.
(c) IEC/ISO31010 “Risk management - Risk assessment techniques” may be applied in order
to determine method of risk assessment. The method of risk assessment is to be
agreed by the Society.
(d) Based on the risk assessment, a revised system category might need to be agreed be-
tween the Society and the system supplier.
(e) Where the risks associated with a computer based system are well understood, it is
permissible for the risk assessment to be omitted, however in such cases the supplier
or the system integrator is to provide a justification for the omission. The justification is
to give consideration to:
(i) How the risks are known
(ii) The equivalence of the context of use of the current computer based system and
the computer based system initially used to determine the risks
(iii) The adequacy of existing control measures in the current context of use
(B) Code production and testing
(a) The following documentation is to be provided to the Society for Category II and III sys-
tems:
(i) Software modules functional description and associated hardware description for pro-
grammable devices. This is to be provided by Supplier and System Integrator.
(ii) Evidence of verification (detection and correction of software errors) for software
modules, in accordance with the selected software development standard. Evidence
requirements of the selected software standard might differ depending on how crit-
ical the correct operation of the software is to the function it performs (i.e. IEC
61508 has different requirements depending on SILs, similar approaches are taken by
other recognized standard). This is to be supplied by the Supplier and System
Integrator.
(iii) Evidence of functional tests for programmable devices at the software module,
sub-system, and system level. This is to be supplied by the Supplier via the System

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 97

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

Integrator. The functional testing is to be designed to test the provisions of features

used by the software but provided by the operating system, function libraries, cus-
tomized layer of software and any set of parameters.
(3) Integration testing before installation on board
(A) Intra-system integration testing is to be done between system and sub-system software
modules before being integrated on board. The objective is to check that software functions
are properly executed, that the software and the hardware it controls interact and function
properly together and that software systems react properly in case of failures. Faults are to
be simulated as realistically as possible to demonstrate appropriate system fault detection
and system response. The results of any required failure analysis are to be observed.
Functional and failure testing can be demonstrated by simulation tests.
(B) For Category II and III systems:
(a) Test programs and procedures for functional tests and failure tests are to be submitted
to the Society. An FMEA may be requested by the Society in order to support contain-
ment of failure tests programs.
(b) Factory acceptance test including functional and failure tests are to be witnessed by the
Society.
(c) Following documentation is to be provided:
(i) Functional description of software
(ii) List and versions of software installed in system
(iii) User manual including instructions for use during software maintenance
(iv) List of interfaces between system and other ship systems
(v) List of standards used for data links
(vi) Additional documentation as requested by the Society which might include an FMEA
or equivalent to demonstrate the adequacy of failure test case applied
(4) Approval of programmable devices for Category II and III systems
Approval of programmable devices integrated inside a system is to be delivered to the system
integrator or supplier. Approval can be granted on case by case basis, or as part of a product
type approval, so long as above mentioned documents have been reviewed/approved (as per
Table 6.2.3) and the required tests have been witnessed by the Society (also see 405. regarding
hardware environmental type tests). Documentation is to address the compatibility of the pro-
grammable device in the ship’s application, the necessity to have on board tests during ship in-
tegration and is to identify the components of system using the approved programmable devices.
(5) Final integration and on board testing
(A) Simulation tests are to be undertaken before installation, when it is found necessary to check
safe interaction with other computerized systems and functions that could not be tested
previously.
(B) On board tests are to check that a computer based system in its final environment, in-
tegrated with all other systems with which it interacts is:
(a) Performing functions it was designed for
(b) Reacting safely in case of failures originated internally or by devices external to the sys-
tem
(c) Interacting safely with other systems implemented on board vessel
(c) For final integration and on board testing of Category II and III systems:
(a) Test specifications are to be submitted to the Society for approval.
(b) The tests are to be witnessed by the Society.
2. Limited approval
(1) Sub-systems and programmable devices may be approved for limited applications with service
restrictions by the Society when the ship system where they will be integrated is not known. In
this case, requirements about Quality systems under 1 (1) might need to be fulfilled as required
by the Society. Additional drawings, details, tests reports and surveys related to the Standard
declared by the Supplier may be required by the Society upon request.
(2) Sub-systems and programmable devices may in this case be granted with a limited approval
mentioning the required checks and tests performed.
3. Modifications during operation
(1) Responsibilities
(A) Organizations in charge of software modifications are to be clearly declared by Owner to the
Society. A System integrator is to be designated by the Owner and shall fulfil requirements

98 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

mentioned in 1. Limited life cycle steps may be considered for modifications already consid-
ered and accepted in the scope of initial approval. The level of documentation needed to be
provided for the modification is to be determined by the Society.
(B) At the vessel level, it is the responsibility of Owner to manage traceability of these mod-
ifications; the achievement of this responsibility is to be supported by system integrators up-
dating the Software Registry. This Software Registry is to contain:
(a) List and versions of software installed in systems required in 1 (3)
(b) Results of security scans as described in 4
(2) Change management
The owner is to ensure that necessary procedures for software and hardware change manage-
ment exist on board, and that any software modification/upgrade are performed according to the
procedure. All changes to computer based systems in the operational phase are to be recorded
and be traceable.
4. System security
(1) Owner, system integrator and suppliers are to adopt security policies and include these in their
quality systems and procedures.
(2) For Category I, II, and III systems, physical and logical security measures are to be in place to
prevent unauthorized or unintentional modification of software, whether undertaken at the phys-
ical system or remotely.
(3) Prior to installation, all artefacts, software code, executables and the physical medium used for
installation on the vessel are to be scanned for viruses and malicious software. Results of the
scan are to be documented and kept with the Software Registry.

405. Requirements for hardware regarding environment

Evidence of environmental type testing according to UR E10 regarding hardware elements included
in the system and sub-systems is to be submitted to the Society for Category I, II and III com-
puter based systems. This requirement is not mandatory for Category I computer based systems not
considered by the Society.

406. Requirements for data links for Category II and III systems
1. General requirements
(1) Loss of a data link is to be specifically addressed in risk assessment analysis.
(2) A single failure in data link hardware is to be automatically treated in order to restore proper
working of system. For Category III systems a single failure in data link hardware is not to influ-
ence the proper working of the system.
(3) Characteristics of data link are to prevent overloading in any operational condition of system.
(4) Data link is to be self-checking, detecting failures on the link itself and data communication fail-
ures on nodes connected to the link. Detected failures are to initiate an alarm.
2. Specific requirements for wireless data links
(1) Category III systems are not to use wireless data links unless specifically considered by the
Society on the basis of an engineering analysis carried out in accordance with an International or
National Standard acceptable to the Society.
(2) Other categories of systems may use wireless data links with following requirements:
(A) Recognised international wireless communication system protocols are to be employed, in-
corporating:
(a) Message integrity. Fault prevention, detection, diagnosis, and correction so that the re-
ceived message is not corrupted or altered when compared to the transmitted message.
(b) Configuration and device authentication. Shall only permit connection of devices that are
included in the system design.
(c) Message encryption. Protection of the confidentiality and or criticality of the data content.
(d) Security management. Protection of network assets, prevention of unauthorized access to
network assets.
(B) The internal wireless system within the vessel is to comply with the radio frequency and
power level requirements of International Telecommunication Union and flag state
requirements. Consideration is to be given to system operation in the event of port state

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 99

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

and local regulations that pertain to the use of radio-frequency transmission prohibiting the
operation of a wireless data communication link due to frequency and power level
restrictions.
(C) For wireless data communication equipment, tests during harbour and sea trials are to be
conducted to demonstrate that radio-frequency transmission does not cause failure of any
equipment and does not its self-fail as a result of electromagnetic interference during ex-
pected operating conditions.

407. Documents for the Society and test attendance for Computer based systems
Documents for the Society and test attendance for computer based systems are to comply with
the Table 6.2.3.
(1) Computer hardware
The documentation to be submitted is to include followings:
(A) Hardware information of importance for the application and a list of documents that apply to
the system
(B) The supply circuit diagram
(C) A description of hardware and software tools for equipment configuration
(D) The information to activate the system
(E) General information for trouble shooting and repair when the system is in operation
(2) System reliability analysis
The documentation to be submitted is to demonstrate the reliability of the system by means of
appropriate analysis such as:
(A) A failure mode analysis describing the effects due to failures leading to the destruction of
the automation system, In addition, this documentation is to show the consequences on oth-
er systems, if any.
(B) Mean time between failures (MTBF) calculation
(C) Any other documentation demonstrating the reliability of the system
(3) User interface description
The documentation is to contain:
(A) A description of the functions allocated to each operator interface(keyboard/screen or equiv-
alent)
(B) A description of individual screen views (schematics, colour photos, etc.)
(C) A description of how menus are operated (tree presentation)
(D) An operator manual providing necessary information for installation and use.
(4) Test programs
The following test program are to be submitted:
(A) System validation test
(B) On-board test
Each test program is to include:
(a) A description of each test item
(b) A description of the acceptance criteria for each tests.
(5) When alternative design or arrangement is intended to be used, an engineering analysis is to be
submitted.

100 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022

Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

Table 6.2.3 Documents for the Society and test attendance

System System Category

Supplier Owner
Requirement Integrator
involved Involved I(1) II III
Involved
Quality Plan X X A(2) A A
Risk assessment report X I(2) I(2) I(2)
X
Software modules functional description and asso-
(if X I I
ciated hardware description
necessary)
X
Evidence of verification of software code (if X I I
necessary)
Evidence of functional tests for elements included in
systems of Category II and III at the level of soft- X X I I
ware module, sub-system and system
Test programs and procedures for functional tests
and failure tests including a supporting FMEA or X A A
equivalent, at the request of the Class Society
Factory acceptance test event including functional
X X W W
and failure tests
Test program for simulation tests for final integration X A A
Simulation tests for final integration X W W
Test program for on board tests
X A A
(includes wireless network testing)
On board integration tests
X W W
(includes wireless network testing)
- List and versions of software installed in system
- Functional description of software
- User manual including instructions during software
X I I
maintenance
- List of interfaces between system and other ship
systems

Updated Software Registry X X I I

Procedures and documentation

I I
related to Security Policy
Test reports according to UR E10
X X A(3) A A
requirements

(NOTE)
A : Submitted for Approval
I : Provided for Information
W : Witness
(1)
Additional documentation may be required upon request
(2)
Upon request
(3)
If in the scope of Class requirement

Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 101

 2022

Guidance Relating to
the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships

Part 6

Electrical Equipment and

Control Systems

GA-06-E KR
 APPLICATION OF THE GUIDANCE RELATING TO THE RULES

This "Guidance relating to the Rules for Classification of Steel Ships"

(hereafter called as the Guidance Relating to the Rules) is prepared with
the intent of giving details as to the treatment of the various provisions
for items required the unified interpretations and items not specified in
the Rules, and the requirements specified in the Guidance Relating to the
Rules are to be applied, in principle, in addition to the various provisions
in the Rules.
As to any technical modifications which can be regarded as equivalent to
any requirements in the Guidance Relating to the Rules, their flexible ap-
plication will be properly considered.
 APPLICATION OF
PART 6 "ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS"

1. Unless expressly specified otherwise, the requirements in the Guidance apply to ships
for which contracts for construction are signed on or after 1 July 2022.
2. The amendments to the Guidance for 2021 edition and their effective date are as fol-
lows;

Effective Date : 1 January 2022 (based on the contract date for ship construction)

CHAPTER 1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Section 2 System Design

- 201. 1 (2) (D) (b) and (c) have been amended.

Section 5 Cables
- 504. 1 (3) (B) (a) has been amended.
- 504. 1 (3) (F) (a) and (b) have been amended.

Effective Date : 1 July 2022

CHAPTER 1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Section 5 Cables
- 501. 1 has been amended.
- 504. 1 (1) (B) (a) have been amended.
- 509. has been deleted.

- i -
 CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ············································································· 1

Section 1 General ············································································································ 1
Section 2 System design ······························································································· 7
Section 3 Rotating Machinery ····················································································· 23
Section 4 Switchboards, Section Boards and Distribution Boards ······················ 28
Section 5 Cables ············································································································ 31
Section 6 Transformers for Power and Lighting ···················································· 39
Section 7 Control-gears for Motors and Magnetic Brakes ·································· 40
Section 8 Fuses, Circuit-breakers and Electromagnetic Contactors ·················· 45
Section 9 Explosion-protected Electrical Equipment ············································· 45
Section 10 Lighting Fittings, Heating Appliances, Wiring Accessories and
Miscellaneous Equipment ········································································ 48
Section 11 Internal Communications ········································································· 49
Section 12 Semi-Conductor Converters ··································································· 50
Section 13 Accumulator Batteries ·············································································· 50
Section 15 High Voltage Electrical Installations ······················································ 52
Section 16 Electric Propulsion Unit ··········································································· 53
Section 18 Spare Parts, Tools and Instruments ····················································· 53

CHAPTER 2 CONTROL SYSTEMS ····················································································· 55

Section 1 General ·········································································································· 55
Section 2 System and Control ···················································································· 55
Section 3 Tests ·············································································································· 57

- iii -
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

CHAPTER 1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Section 1 General

101. General
1. Application 【See Rule】
(1) The requirements in Pt 6, Ch 1 of the Rules do not apply to the following electrical equipment
except the case where the explosion-protected construction is necessary:
(A) Radiotelegraph or radiotelephone equipment installed in accordance with the international laws
or law of the flag state.
(B) Navigation aids installed in accordance with the international laws or law of the flag state
(those prescribed in regulation V/19 of Amendment 2009 to SOLAS Convention 1974)
(2) Electrical equipment for working and cargo handling, and home electrical appliances to be
brought to ships such as television sets, radio sets, etc., are not applied to the requirements
specified in Pt 6, Ch 1 of the Rules excluding protection against electrical shock, firing and other
casualties(including explosion). Electrical appliances not applied to the requirements of the Rules,
as far as possible, are to comply with Korean Industrial Standards.
(3) Cables and protection devices (circuit breakers and fuses) connected to the electrical equipment
or appliances stipulated in the requirements of (1) and (2) above, are to comply with the relevant
requirements in Pt 6, Ch 1 of the Rules.
(4) In application to 101. 1 (1) of the Rules, ships with special limitations for their service or small
ships (less than 500 tons) mean the ships specified in the following:
(A) Ships having service restriction notations of machinery of KRM 0 as ships with gross tonnage
less than 500 tons. (2017)
(B) Ships not having service restriction notations of equipment specified in (A) above as ships
with gross tonnage less than 500 tons.
(C) Ships having service restriction notations of equipment specified in (A) above as ships with
500 tons gross tonnage or more, and ships complying with the requirements in Pt 8 Annex
8-3, 1. (1) and (2), 3. (12) of the Guidance.
(D) Ships having class notations "  ∙ " and service restriction notations of equipment specified
in (A) above as ships with 500 tons gross tonnage or more and ships not complying with
the requirements in Pt 8 Annex 8-3, 1. (1) and (2), 3. (12) of the Guidance.
(5) Electrical equipment on board the ships specified in (4) above are to be in accordance with (1)
through (3) above, and the following:

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 1
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Mitigated requirements for ships described in (A) to (D) (2020)

Relevant requirements1) (mitigated requirements) (A) (B) (C) (D)

(a) Rule 201. 6 Ambient conditions O O

Rule 402. 1 (1) Main switchboards' construction O O O
(b)
Rule 402. 1 (2) Generator switchboard's construction O O O

(c) Rule 404. 1 d.c. ship's service generator panels O O

(d) Rule 404. 2 a.c. ship's service generator panels O O
(e) Rule 701. 2 Grouped starters O O

Precaution against fire

(f) Rule 504. 3 (2) O O O
protection of cables

(g) Rule 1203. Protective devices, etc. O O O

(h) Rule 202. and 1601. 3 Main source of electrical power O O2) O
(i) Rule 601. Transformers O O
(j) Rule 203. Emergency source of electrical power O O O

Feeder circuits of
(k) Rule 204. 6 (3) O O O3)
navigation lights indicator

(l) Rule 1801. Spare parts O O O

(m) Rule 204. 1 (3) Insulation monitoring system O

Protective devices
(n) Rule 205. [3 (2)] O O4)
[circuit breakers and fuses]

Where the main source of electrical

(o) Rule 202. 5 power is necessary for propulsion O O O O
and steering of the ship

(p) Rule 1106. Public address systems O O O O

(q) Rule 401. 1 (2) Installation of main switchboard O O O

NOTES)
1) : The detailed contents are to comply with the below (A)
2) : The detailed contents are to comply with the below (B) (b)
3) : The detailed contents are to comply with the below (C) (c)
4) : The detailed contents are to comply with the below (C) (b)

(A) Ships specified in (4) (A) above

(a) In 201. 6 of the Rules, air temperature may apply 40 ℃ instead of 45 ℃ , and sea water
temperature may apply 27 ℃ instead of 32 ℃ . However, ships engaged in tropical regions
service are to be applied to the requirements in the Table. (refer to Pt 5, Table 5.1.3 of
the Rules)
(b) The requirements in 402. 1 (1) and (2) of the Rules do not apply.
(c) In 404. 1 of the Rules, where ships are provided with two or more d.c. generators en-
gaged in single running only, ammeter and voltmeter are provided with each 1 set and
are used in common for the generators. But, where the number of meters are made re-
duce, portable ammeter and voltmeter complied with the requirements in 1802. of the
Rules are to be equipped.
(d) In 404. 2 of the Rules, where the ships are provided with two or more a.c. generators
engaged in single running only, ammeter, voltmeter and wattmeter are provided with
each 1 set and are used in common for the generators. But, where the number of me-
ters are made reduce, portable ammeter and voltmeter complied with the requirements
in 1802. of the Rules are to be equipped.

2 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(e) The requirements in 701. 2 of the Rules do not apply.

(f) The requirements in 504. 3 (2) of the Rules do not apply.
(g) The requirements in 1203. of the Rules do not apply.
(h) In application to 202. and 1601. 3 of the Rules, a generator may be provided with 1 set,
except ships having class notation UMA and ships with coastal and the farther service.
(2019)
(i) In 601. of the Rules, where a accumulator battery with sufficient capacity necessary for
electrical services of lightings, signal devices, radio equipment, etc. is provided, a re-
served transformer may be omitted.
(j) The requirements in 203. of the Rules do not apply. However emergency source of elec-
trical power capable of supplying simultaneously the following services at least for 3
hours (for a period of 30 minutes with continuous operation for the below (iv) & (v) sys-
tem), is to be provided. Notwithstanding these requirements, ships subject to Korean
Ship Safety Act are to comply with the relevant requirements of the Korean Ship Safety
Act. (2018)
(i) All communication equipment required in an emergency
(ii) Navigation lights and signal lights (not under command lights, anchor lights)
(iii) Emergency lights installed in the following station
① Embarkation station of life boats, life rafts, etc. and over the sides
② Accommodation alleyways, stairways and exits
③ Machinery spaces and spaces installed emergency source of electrical power
④ Control stations for main engine
(iv) Intermittent operation of the daylight signalling lamp, the ship's whistle, and all in-
ternal signals that are required in an emergency.
(v) The fire detection system and manually operated call point.
(k) In 204. 6 (3) of the Rules, navigation light indicators may be served by one circuit fed
from the emergency source. The following may be considered the emergency source.
(i) Either of the two generators which come into immediately operation in the event of
loss of the normal power
(ii) Charging devices for electric batteries
(l) In case of ships provided with efficient manual auxiliary steering gear, the requirements in
1801. of the Rules do not apply.
(m) In 204. 1 (3) of the Rules, a earth indicator may be installed instead of the device ca-
pable of continuously monitoring the insulation level to earth. in case of lamp type earth
indicator, the indicator is to be of 2 lamp type or 3 lamp type having metal filament of
capacity of 30 W or less, and distance between lamps less than 150 mm .
(n) The requirements in 205. 3 (2) of the Rules do not apply. But, for the passenger ships,
tankers and ships carrying dangerous chemicals in bulk, the plug-in type is to be applied
only for the main switchboard and group start panels.
(o) The requirements in 202. 1 (3) of the Rules do not apply, except ships having class no-
tation UMA and passenger ships engaged on international voyages.
(p) The requirements in 1106. of the Rules do not apply.
(q) The requirements in 401. 1 (2) of the Rules do not apply. (2019)
(B) Ships specified in (4) (B) above
(a) The requirements in (A) (b), (e), (f), (g), (j), (k), (o) and (p) above apply.
(b) In 202. 1 (2) of the Rules, the capacity of generator is to be possible to supply services
necessary to provide normal operational conditions of propulsion and safety in spite of
the event of any one generating set being stopped.
(C) Ships specified in (4) (C) above
(a) The requirements in (A) (a), (b), (c), (d), (f), (g), (i), (j), (l), (o), (p) and (q) above apply.
(2020)
(b) The requirements in 205. of the Rules do not apply. Group stater panels separated No.1
group and No.2 group are to be provided. But, for the passenger ships, tankers and
ships carrying dangerous chemicals in bulk, the plug-in type is to be applied only for the
main switchboard and group start panels. (2018)
(c) In 204. 6 (3) of the Rules, The navigation light indicator may be fed from the main
switchboard and emergency switchboard or a lighting distribution board installed in the
wheel house.
(d) In application to 202. and 1601. 3 of the Rules, a generator driven by independent auxil-

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 3
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

iary engine may be provided with 1 set, except ships having class notation UMA and
ships with coastal and the farther service. (2019)
(D) Ships specified in (4) (D) above
(a) The requirements in (A) (l), (o), (p) and (q) above apply. (2020)
(6) Where a ship applied to the requirements of (4) and (5) above makes an alteration of service
area, purpose, etc., electrical equipment are to be installed in accordance with the Rules.
(7) The requirements for the emergency power on board passenger ships employed to domestic
voyage are to apply as follows;
(A) The passenger ships employed to domestic voyage shall be equipped with the independent
emergency power which satisfies following requirement of (a). However, for the passenger
ships, of which navigation area is below the level of smooth water area, provided with the
batteries for main power, if these batteries satisfy the item (7) with the following require-
ments of (a), the independent emergency power requirement is exempted.
(a) The batteries (equipped with electric discharge indicator) shall be charged with needed pow-
er always and be able to be charged imminently without radical drop of voltage
(b) For the case of the generator driven by the independent oil suppliers and the effective mo-
tors with the starter recognized to be proper by the Society.(limited to the ones of which
fuel oil’s flash point of not less than 43 ℃). Emergency switchboard is to be installed as
near as possible to emergency power.
(B) Emergency power according to the above (A) shall be charged imminently and automatically
in the event of failure of the main source of electrical power due to malfunction, etc.
(C) Emergency source of electric power installed according to the above requirement (A) is to be
supplied at least for 12 hours for the following services. However, in case of the ships ex-
pected voyage period with less than 6 hour, electric power may be supplied for 6 hours.
(a) Navigation lights
(b) Signal lights supplied from main source of electric power
(c) Emergency lights installed in the following stations.
(i) Corridors, stairways, ladders and exits
(ii) Main engine room, main generating room and engine control room
(iii) Navigation bridge, chart rooms and radio rooms
(iv) Places installed life boats, life rafts or life buoys and embarkation places.
(v) Other places where considered necessary by the Society
(d) Electric alarm system and indicators
(e) Fire detection system and manually operated call point.
(f) Other communication system, etc.
(D) Emergency source of electric power installed according to the above (A) is to be installed in
accordance with the requirements of the followings.
(a) It is to be located above the uppermost continuous deck
(b) It is to be located outside the boundaries of engine spaces.
(c) It is to be located afterward of the collision bulkhead
(d) Supply of emergency electrical power is not to be interfered due to a fire or other casu-
alty in spaces of engine rooms
(e) It is to be separated and ventilated from a fire or electrical sparks.
(8) In application to 402. 1 (2) of the Rules, The separation of the main switchboard busbars do not
apply to fishing vessels.
(9) The requirements for the emergency power of fishing vessels are to apply as follows;
(A) A self-contained emergency source of electrical power located outside the machinery spaces
is to be provided and so arranged as to ensure its functioning in the event of fire or other
causes of failure of the main electrical installations.
(B) The independent emergency power which applies to any one of the following requirements is
to be equipped in the fishing vessels;
(a) The accumulator battery which is always charged as required power and is to be suffi-
cient to supply those services
(b) The emergency generator which is driven by a suitable prime mover with an independent
supply of fuel, having a flashpoint of not less than 43°C
(i) Emergency generating sets are to be capable of being readily started in their cold
condition at a temperature of 0 ℃ . If this is impracticable, or if lower temperatures
are likely to be encountered, provision acceptable to the Society is to be made for
maintenance of heating arrangements, to ensure ready starting of the generating

4 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

sets.
(ii) Each emergency generating set arranged to be automatically started is to be equip-
ped with approved starting devices approved by the Society with a storage energy
capability of at least three consecutive starts. In addition, a second source of energy
is to be provided for an additional three starts within 30 minutes unless manual
starting can be demonstrated to be effective.
(iii) Electrical and hydraulic starting systems are to be maintained from the emergency
switchboard.
(c) Electrical and hydraulic starting systems are to be maintained from the emergency switchboard.
(d) Compressed air starting systems may be maintained by the main or auxiliary compressed
air receivers through a suitable non-return valve or by an emergency air compressor
which, if electrically driven, is supplied from the emergency switchboard.
(e) All of these starting, charging and energy storing devices are to be located in the emer-
gency generator space. These devices are not to be used for any purpose other than
the operation of the emergency generating set. This does not preclude the supply to the
air receiver of the emergency generating set from the main or auxiliary compressed air
system through the non-return valve fitted in the emergency generator space.
(C) The emergency source of electrical power installed according to above (A) is to be capable
of supplying simultaneously at least the following services for the period of 3 hours (6 hours
for the equipment of (a) to (c)) : (2020)
(a) Radiocommunication equipment
(b) All internal communication equipment and signals, the fire detection and fire alarm sys-
tem as required in an emergency
(c) Navigation lights
(d) Signal lights supplied from main source of electric power
(e) Emergency lights installed in the following station
(i) Embarkation station of life boats, life rafts, etc. and over the sides
(ii) Accommodation alleyways, stairways and exits
(iii) Machinery spaces and spaces installed emergency source of electrical power
(iv) Control stations for main engine
(v) Fish handling and process stations
(vi) An each installation location of emergency fire pump, sprinkler pump and emergency
bilge pump and at the starting position of their motors
(D) The emergency switchboard which supply emergency power to the fishing vessels is to
comply with the following :
(a) The emergency switchboard is to be installed as near as is practicable to the emergency
source of electrical power.
(b) Where the emergency source of electrical power is a generator, the emergency switch-
board is to be located in the same space unless the operation of the emergency
switchboard would thereby be impaired.
(c) Automatically connecting to the emergency switchboard in the event of failure of the
main source of electrical power.
(d) Where the emergency source of electrical power is an accumulator battery, an indicator
is to be mounted to indicate when the battery is being discharged.
(e) The emergency switchboard is to be supplied during normal operation from the main
switchboard by an interconnector feeder which is to be adequately protected at the main
switchboard against overload and short circuit and which is to be disconnected automati-
cally at the emergency switchboard upon failure of the main source of electrical power.
Where the system is arranged for feedback operation the interconnector feeder is also to
be protected at the emergency switchboard at least against short circuit.
(10) In application to 202. 1 (3) of the Rules, for fishing vessels, the requirements apply to ships
assigned the class notations of UMA.
2. In application to 101. 2 of the Rules, the term "as deemed appropriate by the Society" means the
acceptance in accordance with Pt 1, Ch 1, 104. of the Rules. (2020) 【See Rule】
3. In application to 101. 4 (1) of the Rules, a gas explosive atmosphere is the condition in which the gas
that combustion can be continuous because it is not ignited and consumed in atmospheric condition
and combustible materials in vapour condition are compounded. Where concentration of mixture ex-
ceeds the upper explosive limit, because it is easy to be explosible spaces, although it is not a gas

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 5
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

explosive atmosphere, this condition is considered as a gas explosive atmosphere. 【See Rule】

102. Drawings and data 【See Rule】

1. In application to 102. 1 (14) of the Rules, the term "Drawings and data as deemed necessary by
the Society" means the acceptance in accordance with Pt 1, Ch 1, 104. of the Rules. (2020)

103. Testing and inspection

1. The generators, switchboards and transformers used for cargo refrigerating installations and cargo
handling arrangements specified in Pt 9 of the Rules, are to be tested and inspected in accordance
with the requirements in 103. of the Rules.
2. The cables to be type approved by the requirements in 103. 1 (2) of the Rules are in accordance
with the followings. 【See Rule】
(1) Cables used for supply and distribution circuits for power, lighting and internal communications
(2) Sheathed portable cords used for supplying and distribution circuits for power
(3) Polyvinylchloride insulated multi-core cables for 150 V electronic equipment
(4) Cables used for control circuit(insulation cables used for distribution boards and control gears)
(5) Cables used for communication such as optical fiber cables, coaxial cables and etc.
3. Type approval test for sheathed portable cords and Polyvinylchloride sheath cords other than cables
specified in above, may be carried out according to manufacturer's request.
4. Tests and inspections on type approved products 【See Rule】
In application to 103. 6 of the Rules, it is to be in accordance with the followings.
(1) The inspections and tests in the presence of the Surveyor for individual product of followings
among type-approved electrical equipment may be wholly omitted.
(A) Fuse
(B) Circuit breaker
(C) Magnetic contactor
(D) Cable trays/protective casings made of plastic materials
(E) Protection relay
(2) The individual products of followings among type-approved electrical equipment are to be tested
in the presence of the Surveyor as follows:
(A) Explosion-proof type electrical equipment (rotating machinery only)
Tests and inspections of explosion-proof type rotating machinery is carried out according to
309. of the Rules. (2018)
(B) Cables
(a) Construction inspection and dimension check
(b) Conductor resistance test
(c) Insulation resistance test
(d) High voltage test
5. "Where deemed appropriate by the Society" required in notes (5) and (8) in 103. 1 Table 6.1.1 of
the Rules means "the cases approved by QA or others." 【See Rule】
6. In application to 103. 4 of the Rules, the term “when it deems necessary" means the acceptance in
accordance with Pt 1, Ch 1, 104. of the Rules. (2020) 【See Rule】
7. In application to No.13 in 103. 1 Table 6.1.1 of the Rules, if there is IECEx, ATEX, KC or equivalent
explosion-proof certificate, type approval may be exempted. However, exemption requirements do
not apply to rotating machinery. (2018) 【See Rule】

6 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 2 System design

201. General
1. Construction and installation
(1) Protection devices 【See Rule】
In application to 201. 2 (3) of the Rules, power source switch of electrical equipment is to be so
arranged that the equipment is not charged through control circuit or pilot lamp when the switch
is in "off" position.
(2) Installation and protective enclosure 【See Rule】
(A) In a case where the characteristic letter IP showing the protection type of enclosures in ac-
cordance with the IEC 60529 is used for the protective enclosures of electrical equipment,
the following requirements are to be complied with.
(a) Degree and expression of protection of enclosures
The degree of protection of enclosures is to be as given in Table 6.1.1 of the Guidance.
Protection type is to be expressed by the combination of symbol IP, first characteristic
numeral which shows the degree of protection against access to hazardous parts and in-
gress of solid foreign objects, second characteristic numeral which shows degree of pro-
tection against ingress of water with harmful effects and additional letter which shows
the protection against access to hazardous parts. And protection type is to be carved on
the surface of product or to be marked with other appropriate means.
(b) Construction and test method of degree of protection
Construction and test methods of degree of protection are in accordance with Table
6.1.2, Table 6.1.3, Table 6.1.4 and Table 6.1.5 of the Guidance. The manufacturer is to
carry out the relevant test for initial product at least, and is to identify effectiveness of
protection type marked on the product. An individual test for the products may be car-
ried out according to the discretion of the Surveyor.
(c) Application of degree of protection
As a guide for the selection of degree of protection for the electrical equipment on the
basis of the circumstances of the place of installation, the requirements given in Table
6.1.6 of the Guidance are to be taken into consideration.

Table 6.1.1 Degree of Protection and Expression

Second
Additional Supplementary
First characteristic numeral characteristic
letter(optional) letter(optional)
numeral
Code letters
Against access to hazardous Against ingress of
Against access to Supplementary
parts and ingress of solid water with harmful
hazardous parts information
foreign objects effects
0 0 A H
1 1 B M
2 2 C S
3 3 D W
IP 4 4
5 5
6 6
7
8
(NOTES)
Out of expression, when either one of the first characteristic numeral or the second characteristic nu-
meral is to be expressed, the degree of protection unnecessary is to be represented by X
Examples : IPX8 - Degree of protection only against ingress of water with harmful effects
IP5X - Degree of protection only against access to hazardous parts and ingress of solid for-
eign objects

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 7
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.2 Degree of protection against access to hazardous parts and ingress of solid foreign objects
shown by the first characteristic numeral

First
characteristic Construction of protection Testing methods and criteria
numeral
0 Non protected -
Protected against access to
hazardous parts with the The sphere of 50(+0.05, -0) mm is not to fully penetrate with
1 back of a hand and pro- 50 N ±10  of test force and adequate clearance form hazard-
tected against solid foreign ous parts is to be kept.
objectsof 50 mm and greater
Protected against access to The jointed test finger of 12 mm , 80 mm length, may penetrate
hazardous parts with a fin- up to its 80 mm length with test force of 10 N ±10  , but ad-
2 ger and protected against equate clearance form hazardous parts is to be kept. In addi-
solid foreign objects of 12.5 tion, the sphere of 12.5(+0.05, -0) mm is not to fully penetrate
mm and greater with 30 N ± 10  of test force.
Protected against access to
hazardous parts with a tool The test rod of 2.5(+0.05, -0) mm is not to penetrate with 3 N ±
3 and protected against solid 10  of test force and adequate clearance form hazardous parts
foreign objects of 2.5 mm is to be kept.
and greater
Protected against access to
hazardous parts with a wire The test rod of 1.0(+0.05, -0) mm is not to penetrate with 1 N ±
4 and protected against solid 10  of test force and adequate clearance form hazardous parts
foreign objects of 1.0 mm is to be kept.
and greater
(1) Testing methods and criteria against the first characteristic
numeral 4 are to be complied with.
(2) The enclosure where the normal working cycle of the equip-
ment causes reductions in air pressure within the enclosure
below that of the surrounding air, e.g., due to thermal cy-
cling effects (hereinafter referred to as Category 1 enclosure)
is to comply with the following (a) and (b). At the end of
the test, talcum powder is not to be accumulated in a
quantity or location such that it could interfere with the cor-
rect operation of the equipment or impair safety.
(a) The test is to be made using a dust chamber. The
powder circulation pump circulates and floats the talcum
powdercontinuously in the test chamber. The talcum
Protected against access to powder used is to be capable of passing through a
5 hazardous parts with a wire square meshed sieve the nominal wire diameter of
and dust-protected which is 50 m and the nominal width between wires
75 m . The amount of talcum powder is to be 2 kgm
of the testchamber. It is not to be used for more than
20 tests. The enclosure under test is to be supported
inside the chamber by fixing or hanging. The pressure
inside the enclosure is to be maintained below the sur-
rounding atmospheric by a vacuum pump. The depres-
sion of the pressure is not to exceed 2 kPa .
(b) If an extraction rate of 40 to 60 vol/hour is obtained
the duration of the test is to be 2 hours. If, with a
maximum depression of 2 kPa , the extraction rate is
less than 40 vol/hour, the test is to be continued until
80 vol. have been drawn through, or a period of 8
hours has elapsed

8 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.2 Degree of protection against access to hazardous parts and ingress of solid foreign objects
shown by the first characteristic numeral (continued)

First
characteristi Construction of protection Testing methods and criteria
c numeral

(3) Enclosures where no pressure difference relative to the sur-

rounding air is present (hereinafter referred to as Category 2
enclosures) are to comply with the above (2) tests in con-
dition that the enclosure under the test is supported in its
normal operating position, but is not connected to a vacuum
pump. The test is to be continued for a period of 8 hours.
At the end of the test, talcum powder is not to be accumu-
lated in a quantity or location such that it could interfere with
the correct operation of the equipment or impair safety.

(1) Testing methods and criteria against the first characteristic

Protected against access to numeral 4 are to be complied with.
6 hazardous parts with a wire (2) The above (2) tests against the first characteristic numeral 5
and dust-tight are to be carried out and deposit of dust is not to be ob-
served inside the enclosure at the end of the test.
(NOTES)
The detailed test methods and criteria are referred to IEC 60529.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 9
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.3 Degree of protection against ingress of water with harmful effects shown by the second
characteristic numeral

Second
Construction of
characteristi Testing methods and criteria
protection
c numeral

0 Non protected -

The enclosure under test is to be placed in its normal operating position and
Protected against 200 mm below the drip box. A flow of water drops, of which flow rate is
1 vertically falling 1(+0.5, -0) mmmin are to be produced for 10 min . At the end of the test,
water drops water is not to have accumulated in a quantity or location such that it could
interfere with the correct operation of the equipment or impair safety

The enclosure under test is to be placed in its normal operating position and
Protected against
200 mm below the drip box. A flow of water drops, of which flow rate is
vertically falling
3(+0.5, -0) mmmin , are to be produced for 2.5 min in each of four fixed
water drops
2 positions. These positions are to be 15 degrees on either side of the vertical.
when enclosure
At the end of the test, water is not to have accumulated in a quantity or lo-
tilted up to 15
cation such that it could interfere with the correct operation of the equip-
degrees
ment or impair safety

The enclosure under test is to be placed in its normal operating position. A

uniform flow of water drops are to be produced over the whole area be-
tween vertical and 60 degrees on either side of the vertical at the distance
of 300 mm to 500 mm from the enclosure. The delivery rate of water flow is
Protected against to be 10(+0.5, -0.5) mmmin . The pressure to achieve this delivery rate is to
3
spraying water be the range of 50 kPa to 150 kPa . The test duration is to be 1 minm of
the calculated surface area of the enclosure(excluding any mounting surface),
with a minimum of 5 min . At the end of the test, water is not to have ac-
cumulated in a quantity or location such that it could interfere with the cor-
rect operation of the equipment or impair safety

The enclosure under test is to be placed in its normal operating position. A

uniform flow of water drops are to be produced over the whole area be-
tween vertical and 180 degrees on either side of the vertical at the distance
of 300 mm to 500 mm from the enclosure. The delivery rate of water flow
Protected against is 10(+0.5, -0.5) lmin . The pressure to achieve this delivery rate is to be
4
splashing water the range of 50 kPa to 150 kPa . The test duration is to be 1 minm of the
calculated surface area of the enclosure(excluding any mounting surface), with
a minimum of 5 min . At the end of the test, water is not to have accumu-
lated in a quantity or location such that it could interfere with the correct
operation of the equipment or impair safety

The enclosure under test is to be placed in its normal operating position. A

stream of water from a standard nozzle of which internal diameter is 6.3 mm
is to be sprayed to the enclosure from all directions. The distance between
the nozzle and the enclosure is to be 2.5 m to 3.0 m . The delivery rate is
Protected against (12.5  ± 0.5 % ) / min . Core of the substantial stream is to be a circle of ap-
5
water jet proximately 40 mm diameter at 2.5 m distance from nozzle. Test duration per
square metre of enclosure surface area likely to be sprayed is to be 1 min .
Minimum test duration is to be 3 min . At the end of the test, water is not
to have accumulated in a quantity or location such that it could interfere with
the correct operation of the equipment or impair safety
The enclosure under test is to be placed in its normal operating position. A
stream of water from a standard nozzle, of which internal diameter is 12.5
mm , is to be sprayed on the enclosure from all directions. The distance be-
tween the nozzle and the enclosure is to be 2.5 m to 3.0 m . The delivery
Protected against
6 rate is (100  ± 0.5  )/ min . Core of the substantial stream is to be a circle
powerful jet
of approximately 120 mm diameter at 2.5 m distance from nozzle. Test dura-
tion per square metre of enclosure surface area likely to be sprayed is to be
1 min . Minimum test duration is to be 3 min . At the end of the test, no
water is to have entered into the enclosure.

10 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.3 Degree of protection against ingress of water with harmful effects shown by the second
characteristic numeral (continued)
Second
Construction of
characteristi Testing methods and criteria
protection
c numeral

The highest point of enclosures is to be located deeper than 150 mm below

the surface of water, and also the lowest point of the enclosures is to be
Protected against
located deeper than 1000 mm below the surface of water. The duration of
the effects of
7 the test is to be 30 min . The water temperature is not to differ from that of
temporary im-
the equipment by more than 5 K . However, it may be waived where the
mersion in water
equipment is energized and/or its parts in motion. At the end of the test, no
water is to have entered into the enclosure.

The test conditions are to be subject to agreement between manufacturer

Protected against
and user, but they are to be more severe than the conditions for the second
the effects of
8 characteristic numeral 7 and they are to take account of the condition that
continuous im-
the enclosure will be continuously immersed in actual use. At the end of the
mersion in water
test, no water is to have entered into the enclosure.

(NOTES)
The detailed test methods and criteria are referred to IEC 60529.

Table 6.1.4 Degree of protection against access to hazardous parts shown by the additional letters
Additional letter Construction of enclosure Test methods and criteria
Protected against access
The access probe, sphere of 50 mm , is to have adequate
A with the back of the
clearance form hazardous parts with 50 N ± 10  of test force.
hand

The jointed test finger of 12 mm , 80 mm length, is to have ad-

Protected against access
B equate clearance form hazardous parts with 10 N ± 10  of test
with a finger
force.

The access probe of 2.5 mm , 100 mm length, is to have ad-

Protected against access
C equate clearance form hazardous parts with 3 N ± 10  of test
with a tool
force.

The access probe of 1.0 mm , 100 mm length, is to have ad-

Protected against access
D equate clearance form hazardous parts with 1 N ± 10  of test
with a wire
force.

(NOTES)
The detailed test methods and criteria are referred to IEC 60529.

Table 6.1.5 Supplementary information shown by the supplementary letters

Supplementary letter Significance
H High voltage apparatus

Tested for harmful effects due to the ingress of water when the movable parts of the
M
equipment, e.g., the rotor of the rotating machine, are in motion

Tested for harmful effects due to the ingress of water when the movable parts of the
S
equipment, e.g., the rotor of the rotating machine, are stationary

Suitable for use under specified weather conditions and provided with additional pro-
W
tective features or process

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 11
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.6 Application of Degree of Protection (2020)

Heating
Switchboar Gener- Transformers(7), Lighting Accesso
Example of location Condition of location (1) Motors appli-
d, etc ators Converters fixtures ries(2)
ances
Dry accommodation
Danger of touching live IP 20 - IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
space
parts only
Dry control rooms(4) IP 20 - IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Control rooms IP 22 - IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22
Engine rooms and
boiler rooms above IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 44
floor plates(5)
Steering gear rooms IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 44
Danger of dripping
Refrigerating
water and(or) moderate IP 22 - IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 44
machinery rooms
mechanical damage
Emergency
IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 44
machinery rooms
General store rooms IP 22 - IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22
Pantries IP 22 - IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 44
Provision rooms IP 22 - IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22
Bathrooms and
- - - - IP 34 IP 44 IP 55
showers
Engine rooms and
boiler rooms below - - IP 44 - IP 34 IP 44 IP 55(3)
floor plates
Closed fuel oil or Danger of spraying
lubricating oil water and(or) increased IP 44 - IP 44 - IP 34 IP 44 IP 55(3)
separator rooms danger of mechanical
Ballast pump rooms, damage
bow thruster rooms
IP 44 - IP 44(6) IP 44 IP 34 IP 44 IP 55
and similar spaces
below load line
Refrigerated rooms - - IP 44 - IP 34 IP 44 IP 55
Galleys and laundries IP 44 - IP 44 IP 44 IP 34 IP 44 IP 44
Shaft or pipe tunnels Danger of jet water,
IP 55 - IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 IP 56
in double bottom existence of cargo dust
particle, serious
mechanical damage
Holds for general cargo - - - - IP 55 - IP 55
and(or) aggressive
fumes
Exposure to
Open decks IP 56 - IP 56 - IP 56 IP 56 IP 56
heavy seas
Exposure to
Bilge wells - - - - IP X8 - IP X8
submersion
(NOTES)
(1) It contains distribution boards, motor control centers and controllers.
(2) Accessories include switches, detectors, junction boxes, etc.
(3) Socket outlets are not to be installed in engine rooms, boiler rooms below floor plates, enclosed fuel and lu-
bricating oil separator rooms or spaces requiring certified safe equipment.
(4) Navigation bridge may be categorized as a "dry control room" and consequently, the installation of IP 20 equip-
ment would suffice therein provided that : (a) the equipment is located at to preclude being exposed to stream,
or dripping/spraying water emanating from pipe flanges, valves, ventilation ducts and outlets, etc., installed in its
vicinity, and (b) the equipment is placed to preclude the possibility of being exposed to sea or rain.
(5) Where the equipment is located within areas protected by local fixed pressure water spraying or water-mist fire
extinguishing system and its adjacent areas.
(6) Electric motors and starting transformers for thrusters shall be equipped with heating elements (space heater, etc)
for standstill heating. Provided the space will not be used as pump room for ballast, fuel oil, etc., the thrusters
motor may be accepted with IP 22 enclosure type.
(7) When applied to an electric propulsion unit, it is to be in accordance with Ch 1, 1605. of the Rules.
* “-” marks indicate installation of electrical equipment is not recommended., selection for explosion-protected con-
struction is to be in accordance with the relevant requirements of Pt 6, Ch 1 of the Rules.

12 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(B) Paint stores, battery rooms, acetylene stores and relevant ventilation ducts are classified as
"zone 1". Explosion protecting classes are not to be less than the followings in accordance
with IEC 60079.
(a) Paint store : Gas vapour group IIB, temperature class T3
(b) Battery room : Gas vapour group IIC, temperature class T1
(c) Acetylene store : Gas vapour group IIC, temperature class T2
(C) The areas on open deck within 1 m from ventilation openings of paint stores, battery rooms,
acetylene stores or 3 m from outlets of mechanical ventilation equipments is classified as
"zone 2".
(D) Electrical equipment installed in paint stores, battery rooms, acetylene stores and enclosed
spaces giving access to the paint store, battery room and acetylene store are to be in ac-
cordance with the followings.
(a) Electrical equipment installed in paint stores, battery rooms, acetylene stores and ven-
tilating ducts for the paint store, battery room and acetylene store are to be of ex-
plosion-protected type and cables of armoured type or installed in metallic conduits are
to be used.
(b) In the areas on open deck within 1 m of inlet and exhaust ventilation openings or within
3 m of exhaust mechanical ventilation outlets, the following electrical equipment is to be
installed:
(i) Electrical equipment with the same explosion-protected structure as permitted in
relevant enclosed spaces(zone 1) ; (2022)
(ii) Equipment of protection class Exn ; (2022)
(iii) Appliances which do not generate arcs in service and whose surface does not reach
unacceptably high temperature ; or (2022)
(iv) Appliances with simplified pressurized enclosures or vapour-proof enclosures
(minimum class of protection IP55) whose surface does not reach unacceptably high
temperature
(c) The enclosed spaces giving access to the paint store, battery room and acetylene store
may be considered as non-hazardous spaces, provided that :
(i) The door to the paint store, battery room and acetylene store is to be a gastight or
watertight door with self-closing devices without holding back arrangements ;
(ii) The paint store, battery room and acetylene store are provided with an acceptable,
independent, natural ventilation system ventilated from a safe area ; and (2022)
(iii) Warning notices are fitted adjacent to the paint store, battery room and acetylene
store entrance stating that the store contains flammable liquids.
(d) Switches, protective devices, and motor control gear of electrical equipment installed in
the paint store, battery room and acetylene store are to interrupt all poles or phases and
are to be located in non-hazardous space.
(3) In application to 201. 2 (9) of the Rules, when current not more than rated values of electrical
equipment and cables flows, deviation of magnetic compass needle not more than ±0.5° is not
considered as a bad effect. And the excessive effect happened at the time of circuit on and off
may not be considered, but the circuits switched on and off frequently are to be considered.
【See Rule】
2. Earthing of electrical equipment 【See Rule】
(1) In application to 201. 3 (2) of the Rules, the following exposed metal parts may not be earthen:
(A) Non-current-carrying metal parts of electrical equipment which are unlikely to be touched by
persons during their service
(B) Lamp caps
(C) Shades, reflectors and guards, supported on lampholders or lighting fittings constructed of, or
shrouded in non-conducting material
(D) Metal parts or screw separated by insulators from the current-carrying parts or from earthen
non-current-carrying parts which are not charged or earthen under normal service condition
(E) Bearing housing insulated to prevent circulation of current in the bearing
(F) Clips of fluorescent lighting tube
(G) Equipment supplied at safety voltage
(H) Cable clips
(2) Earthing may be made under the requirements as specified below:
(A) All earthing connections are to be made through copper or other corrosion resistance material
and to be securely installed to hull structure. All earthing conductors are to be protected,

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 13
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

where necessary, against mechanical damage and electrolytic corrosion.

(B) Where the metal frame or enclosure of electrical equipment is directly fitted to hull structure,
and the surface in contact are clean and free from rust, scales and paints, and bolted firmly,
no earthing conductors may be provided.
(C) Under any circumstances, a lead cable sheath is not to be used as a sole earthing means.
(D) Nominal cross-sectional areas of all copper earthing conductors are to be as given in Table
6.1.7 of the Guidance, In a case where earthing conductors other than copper are used,
their conductances are to be of more than that of copper conductors given in Table 6.1.7 of
the Guidance.
(E) Connections between earthing conductors and hull structure are to be made in an accessible
position, and to be secured by a screw of brass or other corrosion resistance material of di-
ameter not less than 4 mm which is to be used for this purpose only. In any case, the con-
tact faces are to have glossy metal surface when screws are tightened.
(3) In a power distribution system where one line of the system is earthen and normally of
non-current carrying line, the earthing connection is to be as specified in (2) above. However,
the upper limit value 64 mm of the cross-sectional area of the earthing conductor given in Table
6.1.7 of the Guidance does not apply.

Table 6.1.7 Sizes of Earthing Conductor

Conductor's
sectional area of
Kind of earthing conductor Minimum sectional area of copper earthing conductor
current-carrying
parts

100  of conductor's sectional area of

16 mm or less current-carrying parts
1. Earthing conductor in flexible
cables and flexible cords 50  of conductor's sectional area of current-carrying
Over 16 mm
parts, but minimum 16 mm

100  of conductor's sectional area of

16 mm or less
Insulated current-carrying parts, but minimum 1.5 mm
earthing con-
ductor 50  of conductor's sectional area of current-car-
2. Earthing Over 16 mm
conductor in rying parts, but minimum 16 mm
cable runs Bared earthing
secured 2.5 mm or less 1 mm
conductor
connected
directly with Over 2.5 mm
1.5 mm
lead sheath ~ 6 mm

100  of conductor's sectional area of current-carry-

(a) 3 mm or less ing parts, but minimum 1.5 mm in case of lead wire,
and minimum 3 mm in case of the others
3. Single earthing conductor
(b) Over 3 mm ~ 50  of conductor's sectional area of current-carrying
125 mm parts, but minimum 3 mm

(c) over 125 mm 64 mm

(4) In application to 201. 3 (3) of the Rules, portable electrical appliances are to be in accordance
with the followings.
(A) The non-current-carrying metal parts of portable electrical appliances are to be earthed
through plugs and receptacles by mean of earthing conductors provided in flexible cables or
cords.
(B) Portable electrical appliances insulated doubly may not be earthed.
(5) Aluminium superstructures
Methods of securing aluminium superstructures to the steel hull of a ship often include insulation
to prevent electrolytic corrosion between these materials. In such case, a separate bonding con-
nection is to be provided between superstructure and the hull which should be made in such a
manner that electrolytic corrosion is avoided and the points of connection may readily be

14 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

inspected.
3. Ambient conditions 【See Rule】
(1) In application to 201. 6 (1) of the Rules, "Ambient temperatures for electrical equipment installed
in environmentally controlled spaces" are in accordance with the followings.
(A) Where electrical equipment is installed within environmentally controlled spaces the ambient
temperature for which the equipment is to be suitable may be reduced from 45 °C and
maintained at a value not less than 35 °C provided:
(a) The equipment is not for use for emergency services.
(b) Temperature control is achieved by at least two cooling units so arranged that in the
event of loss of one cooling unit, for any reason, the remaining unit(s) is capable of sat-
isfactorily maintaining the design temperature.
(c) The equipment is able to be initially set to work safely within a 45 °C ambient temper-
ature until such a time that the lesser ambient temperature may be achieved; the cool-
ing equipment is to be rated for a 45 °C ambient temperature.
(d) Audible and visual alarms are provided, at a continually manned control station, to in-
dicate any malfunction of the cooling units.
(B) In accepting a lesser ambient temperature than 45 °C , it is to be ensured that electrical ca-
bles for their entire length are adequately rated for the maximum ambient temperature to
which they are exposed along their length.
(C) The equipment used for cooling and maintaining the lesser ambient temperature is to be
classified as a secondary essential service.
4. Clearance and creepage 【See Rule】
(1) Clearance and creepage are in accordance with 706. 2 of the Guidance.

202. Main source of electrical power (2019)

1. Capacity and arrangement of generating sets
(1) In application to 202. 1 of the Rules, the diversity factor can be taken into account when calcu-
lating the generator capacity.
(2) In application to 202. 1 (4) of the Rules, the shaft driven generator systems are to comply with
following requirements. 【See Rule】
(A) Forming part of the ship's main source of electrical power
(a) They are to be capable of operating under all weather conditions during sailing and during
maneuvering, also when the vessel is stopped, within the specified limits for the voltage
variation in 305. 4 and 306. 2 of the Rules and the frequency variation in 201. 5 (3)
Table 6.1.2 of the Rules.
(b) Their rated capacity is safeguarded during all operations given (A) above and is such that
in the event of any other one of the generators failing, the essential services and serv-
ices for habitability can be maintained.
(c) The short circuit current of the generator/generator system is sufficient to trip the gen-
erator/generator system circuit-breaker taking into account the selectivity of the pro-
tective devices for the distribution system. Protection is to be arranged in order to safe-
guard the generator/generator system in case of a short circuit in the main bus bar. The
generator/generator system is to be suitable for further use after fault clearance.
(d) Standby generators are automatically started.
(B) Not forming part of the ship's main source of electrical power
Generators and generator systems, having the ship's propulsion machinery as their prime
mover but not forming part of the ship's main source of electrical power may be used whilst
the ship is at sea to supply electrical services required for normal operational and habitable
conditions provided that:
(a) There are sufficient and adequately rated additional generators fitted, which constitute the
main source of electrical power required by 202. 1 (1), (2) and (3) of the Rules.
(b) Arrangements are fitted to automatically start one or more of the generators, constituting
the main source of electrical power required by 202. 1 (1), (2) and (3) of the Rules and
also upon the frequency variations exceeding ±10 % of the limits specified in (C) below.
(c) The specified limits for the voltage variations in 305. 4 and 306. 2 of the Rules and the
frequency variation in 201. 5 (3) Table 6.1.2 of the Rules can be met within the declared

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 15
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

operating range of the generators and/or generator systems.

(d) The short circuit current of the generator and/or generator system is sufficient to trip the
generator/generator system circuit-breaker taking into account the selectivity of the pro-
tective devices for the distribution system.
(e) Where considered appropriate, load shedding arrangements are fitted.
(f) On ships having remote control of the ship's propulsion machinery from the navigating
bridge means are provided, or procedures be in place, so as to ensure that supplies to
essential services are maintained during maneuvering conditions in order to avoid a
blackout situation.
(3) Provisions for maintaining or immediately restoring the electrical supply to equipment propulsion
and steering specified in 202. 1 (3) of the Rules are to comply with followings: 【See Rule】
(A) Where the electrical power is normally supplied by more than one generator set simulta-
neously in parallel operation, provision of protection, including automatic disconnection of suf-
ficient non-essential services and if necessary secondary essential services and those pro-
vided for habitability, is to be made to ensure that, in case of loss of any of these generat-
ing sets, the remaining ones are kept in operation to permit propulsion and steering and to
ensure safety.
(B) Where the electrical power is normally be supplied by one generator, the following require-
ments are to be complied with.
(a) provision is to be made, upon loss of power, for automatic starting and connecting to the
main switchboard of stand-by generator(s) of sufficient capacity with automatic restarting
of the essential auxiliaries, in sequential operation if required.
(b) The time for automatic starting and connecting to the main switchboard of a standby
generator specified in (A) above is to be preferably within 30 seconds, but in any case
not more than 45 seconds, after loss of power.
(4) In application to 202. 1 (3) of the Rules, preference tripping may be carried out in two or more
stages and the following services do not apply preference tripping:
(A) Emergency services in accordance with 203.
(B) Primary essential services
(C) Secondary essential services that, when disconnected, will:
(a) cause immediate disruption of systems required for safety and navigation of the vessel,
such as navigation lights, aids and signals, internal safety communication equipment,
lighting system.
(b) prevent services necessary for safety from being immediately reconnected when the
power supply is restored to its normal operating conditions, such as fire pumps and oth-
er fire extinguishing medium pumps, bilge pumps, ventilation fans for engine and boiler
rooms.
2. Transformers and Convertors
(1) Capacity and number of transformer 【See Rule】
(A) In application to 202. 2 (1) of the Rules, where 3 sets of single phase transformer are ar-
ranged with D circuit connection at each first and second stage, and sufficient capacity nec-
essary for essential services can be supplied in spite of arranging  circuit connection due
to failure of 1 set among them, a reserved transformer does not need to be installed
specially. But, where 3 phase transformer of Y-D circuit connection is used, a reserved 3
phase transformer is to be installed.
(B) Arrangement of transformers are to be as follows. (see Fig 6.1.1 of the Guidance)
(a) Each transformer is to be located as a separate unit with separate enclosure or equiv-
alent thereto.
(b) Each transformer is to be served by separate circuits on the primary and secondary side.
(c) Each primary circuit is to be provided with switch-gear and protection devices in each
phase.
(d) Each of the secondary circuits is to be provided with a multipole isolating switch.
(e) Transformers supplying bow thruster are excluded.

16 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Fig 6.1.1 Arrangement of Transformers

203. Emergency source of electrical power

1. Application 【See Rule】

(1) In application to 203. 1 (4) of the Rules, "exceptionally" whilst the vessel is at sea, means the
following:
(A) Blackout situation
(B) Dead-ship situation
(C) Routine use for testing
(D) Short-term parallel operation with the main source of electrical power for the purpose of
load transfer
(2) The emergency generator may be used during lay time in port for the supply of the ship mains,
provided the requirements as per items (A) and (B) below are complied with.
(A) Requirements
(a) To prevent the generator or its prime mover from becoming overloaded when used in
port, arrangements are to be provided to shed sufficient non-emergency loads to ensure
its continued safe operation.
(b) The prime mover is to be arranged with fuel oil filters and lubrication oil filters, monitor-
ing equipment and protection devices as required for the prime mover for main power
generation and for unattended operation.
(c) The fuel oil supply tank to the prime mover is to be provided with a low level alarm, ar-
ranged at a level ensuring sufficient fuel oil capacity for the emergency services for the
period of time as required by SOLAS.
(d) The prime mover is to be designed and built for continuous operation and should be
subjected to a planned maintenance scheme ensuring that it is always available and ca-
pable of fulfilling its role in the event of an emergency at sea.
(e) Fire detectors are to be installed in the location where the emergency generator set and
emergency switchboard are installed.
(f) Means are to be provided to readily change over to emergency operation.
(g) Control, monitoring and supply circuits, for the purpose of the use of the emergency
generator in port are to be so arranged and protected that any electrical fault will not
influence the operation of the main and emergency services. When necessary for the
safe operation, the emergency switchboard is to be fitted with switches to isolate the

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 17
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

circuits.
(B) Instructions are to be provided on board to ensure that when the vessel is under way all
control devices(e.g. valves, switches) are in a correct position for the independent emergency
operation of the emergency generator set and emergency switchboard. These instructions are
also to contain information on required fuel oil tank level, position of harbour/sea mode
switch if fitted, ventilation openings, etc.
2. Capacity of emergency source of power 【See Rule】
(1) The power supply period for the navigation lights (masthead lights, side lights and stern lights)
specified in 203. 2 (2) (C) of the Rules, may be reduces to 3 hours under the acceptance of the
domestic regulations of flag state of the ship.
(2) In application to 203. 2 (2) (E) (a) of the Rules, "Internal communication equipment" means the
following:
(A) Engine telegraph
(B) Communication equipment between the navigation bridge and the main engine control sta-
tions other than main control station
(C) Engineers′ alarm
(D) Communication other than general telephone between the navigation bridge and the steering
gear compartment
(E) Other internal communication equipment as deemed necessary by the Society
(a) In case of passenger ships, the following requirements are to be complied with.
(i) The means of communication which is provided between the officer of the watch and
the person responsible for closing any watertight door which is not capable of being
closed from a central control station.
(ii) The public address system or other effective means of communication which is pro-
vided throughout the accommodation, public and service spaces.
(iii) The means of communication which is provided between the navigating bridge and
the main fire control station.
(3) In application to 203. 2 (2) (E) (b) of the Rules, in case where domestic regulations of flag of
the ship accept, the capacity of emergency source of power may be in accordance with the fol-
lowing:
(A) Ships having gross tonnage 5000 tons or more may be reduced to the service period of rud-
der angle indicator specified in Pt 5, Ch 7, 206. (2) of the Rules.
(B) Ships having gross tonnage less than 5000 tons are to be in accordance with the followings:
(a) It is not required to supply emergency source the following navigation equipment.
(i) Gyro-compass
(ii) Echo-sounding device
(iii) Device to indicate speed and distance through the water
(iv) Rudder angle indicator, revolution meter of each propeller, propellers and the pitch
and operational mode of controllable pitch propellers
(b) Service period for navigation radar may be reduced to the period by domestic regulations
of flag of the ship (until 3 hours in case of having Korean flag ship).
(4) In case where domestic rules of flag of ship are accepted, the service period of the load in 203.
2 (2) (E) (d) and fire alarm system in 203. 2 (2) (E) (c) of the Rules may be reduced until 30
minutes.
3. Kind and performance of emergency source of electrical power
(1) In application to 203. 3 (2) (A) of the Rules, where the inverter or converter is connected to the
output circuit of the batteries (consumer side), the maximum permitted voltage fluctuations may
be taken as those specified in Table 6.1.2 (a) or (b) in 201. 5 of the Rules respectively, not-
withstanding the voltage drop on the battery. 【See Rule】
(2) Starting from dead ship condition 【See Rule】
In application to 203. 3 (4) of the Rules, the followings are to be complied with.
(A) The emergency generator and other means needed to restore the propulsion are to have a
capacity such that the necessary propulsion starting energy is available within 30 minutes of
blackout/dead ship condition. Emergency generator stored starting energy is not to be di-
rectly used for starting the propulsion plant, the main source of electrical power and/or other
essential auxiliaries(emergency generator excluded).
(B) For steam ships, the 30 minute time limit can be interpreted as time from blackout/dead
ship condition defined above to light-off of the first boiler.

18 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

4. Transitional source of emergency electrical power 【See Rule】

In application to 203. 4 (1) of the Rules, where the inverter or converter is connected to the output
circuit of the batteries(consumer side), the requirements specified in 203. 3 (1) may be applied.
5. Starting arrangements for emergency generating sets 【See Rule】
(1) The starting devices specified in 203. 6 (2) of the Rules are to be comply with the following re-
quirements:
(A) The source of stored energy is to be capable of starting the prime mover at least six times.
(B) In case where the automatic starting system is of the consecutive starts, the number of
starts is to be three or less.
(C) For the automatic starting system, means are to be provided to hold such an allowance of
source of energy capable of starting the prime mover three times further after making the
initial consecutive starts.

204. Distribution
1. Methods of distribution
(1) Insulation monitoring system 【See Rule】
(A) Distribution system is the circuit such as the followings.
(a) First stage distribution circuit connected with circuit of electric generator
(c) Second stage distribution circuit connected by way of insulation transformer from the first
stage distribution circuit in (a) above. But, as far as not specifying specially, second
stage distribution circuit of specific equipment (for example, Suez canal search light,
heater and lighting circuit for specific crane, etc.) is to be excluded.
(c) Lighting circuit using accumulator batteries as electrical source or main busbar of dis-
tribution boards connected to the circuit
(B) Alarm setting value of insulation monitoring device is used are 1/10 of insulation value at
normal condition of electrical circuit as a standard.
(C) Where insulation monitoring device is used with earth lighting, interlocking device between
them is to be provided.
(2) Hull return distribution 【See Rule】
(A) The term "Electrical circuit subjected to the approval of the Society in 204. 1 (4) (A) (d) of
the Rules" is the intrinsically safe circuit.
(B) The term "special precautions taken to the satisfaction of the Society in 204. 1 (4) (B) of the
Rules" is the followings.
(a) All final sub-circuit is to consist of two insulated wires, and the hull return circuit is to
be achieved by connecting directly to the hull one of the busbars of the distribution
board from which they originate
(a) Earth wires are to be installed in readily accessible locations to permit their examination
and disconnection for testing of insulation.
2. Shore connections 【See Rule】
(1) Protector of connection box
In application to 204. 3 (2) of the Rules, in case where portable means checking the phase se-
quence or polarity is provided on-board, means checking the phase sequence or polarity for
shore connection may be omitted.
3. Navigation light circuits 【See Rule】
(1) Installation of navigation light indicator
In application to 204. 6 (5) of the Rules, navigation light indicator is to be placed in both an ac-
cessible position on the navigation bridge and an easily accessible position for operating, and
alarm is to be provided for power failure of navigation lights and in case that navigation lights
are turned out due to short circuit, etc.
4. Feeder circuits for communication and signalling system, other lights 【See Rule】
(1) Daylight signalling lamp
In application to 204. 8 (3) of the Rules, the power supply of the daylight signalling lamps is to
comply with following requirements.
(A) Daylight signalling lamps are not to be solely dependent upon the ship's main or emergency

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 19
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

sources of electrical energy.

(B) Daylight signalling lamps are to be provided with a portable battery with a complete weight
of not more than 7.5 kg .
(C) The portable battery is to have sufficient capacity to operate the daylight signalling lamp for
a period of not less than 2 hours.
(D) The portable battery is to be charged from the ship's main or emergency sources of elec-
trical energy.

205. Protective devices

1. Protection against short-circuit 【See Rule】
(1) In application to 205. 5 of the Rules, the circuit-breakers approved by the Society are recognized
as the circuit-breaker having the following making capacity, but the case specified in 205. 5 (3)
of the Rules is excluded.
(A) d.c. circuit-breaker: value same as the rated short-circuit current
(B) a.c. circuit breaker: value specified in Table 6.1.8 of the Guidance
(2) In a.c. circuit breaker, short-circuit test is to be carried out by test circuit having power factor
different from the value specified in Table 6.1.8 of the Guidance, the value calculated by the
formula is to be used as a standard value for the making capacity of circuit-breaker passed the
test.

 

 


   ×   ,   
   sin ×  tan

 : Making current

 : Rated short-circuit current (effective value of short-circuit current in contrast to 1/2 cy-
cle after shorting the circuit)

Table 6.1.8 Making Current of a.c. Circuit Breaker

Power factor of
Rated short-circuit Making current circuit for
Kind   / 
current  (A )  (A ) short-circuit test

2,500 4,250
5,000 8,500
7,500 12,750
1.7 0.5
10,000 17,000
14,000 23,800
18,000 30,600

Moduled-case 22,000 48,400

circuit- breaker 25,000 55,000
30,000 66,000
35,000 77,000
42,000 92,400 2.2 0.2
50,000 110,000
65,000 143,000
85,000 187,000
100,000 220,000
10,000 20,000 2.0 0.3
20,000 44,000 2.2 0.2
Air circuit- breaker 40,000 92,000 2.3 0.15
70,000 161,000 2.3 0.15
90,000 207,000 2.3 0.15

20 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(3) In case where determination of cascade breaking capacity of breakers necessary for employing
for short-circuit protection is intended in accordance with 205. 5 (2) of the Rules, the test
method and criteria are to be as specified the followings.
(A) Test method
Back-up circuit breakers and fuses are to be connected in series with the circuit breakers on
load side, and short-circuit tests under an operating duty of O - 2 minutes* - CO 1 time for
one circuit breaker on load side are to be carried out.
Note: In case where the thermal trip reset time and fuse replacement time exceed 2 mi-
nutes, the time asterisked is the one deemed appropriate by the Society.
(B) Criteria after tests
The circuit breakers on load side are to satisfy the following requirements.
(a) No short-circuit is to be caused if the back-up circuit breaker is reclosed with the power
supply being connected, and no voltage is to be applied on the terminals of the circuit
breaker on load side.
(b) Circuit breaker can be safely and easily replaced with a spare.
(c) No damage is to be caused on the case body and cover.
(d) Maker and break of circuit is to be possible.
(e) High voltage test is to be carried out at a voltage 2 times the rated voltage, and to
prove that it resists the voltage.
(f) Insulation resistance is to be 0.5 M or over.
2. Protection of generator 【See Rule】
In application to 205. 6 of the Rules, protection of generator is to be in accordance with the
following.
(1) The trip current scale adjusting value of over-current trip device, with time delay, for generator
is to be selected as value protected at safety over-current according to heat capacity of gen-
erator and characteristics of over-current trip device, with time delay. And where kind and ad-
justing value of over-current trip device, with time delay (long delay and short delay), for
short-circuit protection device are selected, cooperation between protection devices is to be
considered.
(2) When parallel running of two sets or more of generators is capable, and selection trip device is
provided, the adjusting value and characteristics of over-current trip device, with time delay, are
so selected that over-current trip device of generator is not to operate with preference trip de-
vice at the same time. And when essential service motors are in danger of operating selection
trip device at starting, the device may be interlocked during operating the motors.
(3) The following adjusting values for reverse power protection device are standard value.
(A) Generator driven by turbine : 2 ~ 6 
(B) Generator driven by diesel engine : 6 ~ 15 
3. Protection of feeder circuits 【See Rule】
In application to 205. 9 of the Rules, rated current or trip current value of protection device used in
single motor circuit excluding circuit for steering gear motors and small motors of rated current val-
ue 6 A or less is, as possible as, to be not more than value specified in Table 6.1.9 of the
Guidance.

Table 6.1.9 Protection of feeder circuits

Rated current of fuse or

Kind of motor (starting method)
moduled-case circuit-breaker
d.c. motor
150
Winding type induction motor
Single phase, squirrel cage type, and synchronous motor
300
(full voltage, reactor and resistor starting)
Squirrel cage type and synchronous less than 30 A 250
motor (single winding transformer
starting), special squirrel cage type 30 A or over 200
motor

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 21
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

4. Protection of circuits 【See Rule】

(1) In application to 205. 2 (2) of the Rules, “where the Society may exceptionally permit” means
the followings.
(A) When it is impracticable, for example engine starting battery circuit
(B) For essential motors which are duplicated and thruster motor, the overload protection may be
replaced by an overload alarm
(C) For exceptional permission according to Pt 5, Ch 7, 207. 5 and 301. 2 (5) of the Rules.

22 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 3 Rotating Machinery

302. Prime movers for generators (2020) 【See Rule】

In application to 302. 2 (2) of the Rules Application of electrical load in more than 2 load steps can
only be permitted, if the conditions within the ship’s mains permit the use of such prime movers
which can only be loaded in more than 2 load steps (see Fig. 6.1.2 for guidance on 4-stroke diesel
engines expected maximum possible sudden power increase) and provided that this is already al-
lowed for in the designing stage. This is to be verified in the form of system specifications to be
approved and to be demonstrated at ship’s trials. In this case, due consideration is to be given to
the power required for the electrical equipment to be automatically switched on after black-out and
to the sequence in which it is connected. This applies analogously also for generators to be oper-
ated in parallel and where the power has to be transferred from one generator to another in the
event of any one generator has to be switched off.

Fig 6.1.2 Reference values for maximum possible sudden power increases as a function of brake mean
effective pressure, Pme, at declared power (four-stroke diesel engines)

Note)
Pme : declared power mean effective pressure
P : power increase referred to declared power at site conditions

However, in case where the above throwing-on method applies, the manufacturers or shipyards are
requested to submit a throw-on power calculation sheet demonstrating that the thrown load and
base load at each step of operation do not exceed the value determined by the formulae above un-
der any circumstances, to the Society for approval.
(1) At the time of power restoration after blackout
(2) At the time of sequential starting
(3) At the time of starting with a large start-up load
(4) At the time of instantaneous load transfer when one set of the generators fails (during parallel
running)

303. Rotating machinery shaft

1. Rotating machinery shaft 【See Rule】
(1) In application to 303. 1 of the Rules, The fillet radius on edge part is to be 0.08 times the
shaft's actual diameter to prevent the stress concentration. In a case where the filet radius is
less than 0.08 times the shaft's actual diameter, the shaft diameter is to be increased propor-
tionally according to the coefficient of stress concentration.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 23
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(2) “Where it is apprehended that the torque is remarkably greater than normal torque” means
where the auto synchronizing device is not installed. In this case the value of F is to be 120 %
of the value given in accordance with Table 6.1.4 of the Rules.

304. Temperature rise 【See Rule】

1. In application to 304. 1 of the Rules, temperature rising of bearing is to be in accordance with the
followings.
(1) Temperature rising limit of bearing (self-cooling type) is 35 ℃ when it measures at the surface,
and is 40 ℃ when it measures by keeping temperature sensor under the metal. However, where
heat-proof lubricating oil is used, it is 50 ℃ when it measures at the surface.
(2) Where rotating machinery used heat-proof insulation material of up-grade than F-Grade is diffi-
cult to apply to (1) above, data for heat-proof temperature rising limit is to be submitted to the
Society, and is to be approved by the Society.
2. Temperature measuring method for winding of rotating of machinery forced cooling type by air cool-
er is to be the method of keeping temperature sensor under the winding or bridge method.
3. When cooling water temperature of rotating machinery of forced cooling type by air cooler is over
32 ℃ , the temperature limit is to be in accordance with the discretion of the Society.

308. Welding 【See Rule】

1. The manufacturers are to submit the detailed data in connection with the welding work for exami-
nation of the Society if they plan to make coupling of generator shaft welded with flange for the
first time. And fatigue test is to be included in the welding process qualification test.
2. The manufacturers are to submit the following data in connection with the welding work for exami-
nation of the Society if they plan to make generator shaft welded with rib, etc.
(1) Standard design stress and strength calculation data for rib, etc. attached to the shaft by welding
(2) Standard for welding workmanship and details for control standard
(3) Welding process qualification test record. The test results carried out by means of the test
specimen manufactured according to the standard for welding workmanship specified in above
(2), are to be included to the record, and macro test, micro test and hardness distribution meas-
urement for welding parts are to be carried out.
3. The torque transmission parts such as spider(center of rotor), etc. with welded construction are to
be in accordance with 2 above.
4. Welding for electric motor shaft is to be in accordance with the followings.
(1) The essential auxiliary driving motors having output of 100 kW or over are to be in accordance
with 1 and 2 above.
(2) The motors having output less than 100 kW are to be in accordance with the followings.
(A) Shaft coupling flanges with welded construction are to be applied with appropriate mod-
ification of (1) above.
(B) For rib, etc. with welded construction, standard for welding workmanship only instead of (A)
above may be submitted.

309. Testing and inspection

1. Temperature test 【See Rule】
In application to 309. 3 of the Rules, temperature test of rotating machinery, as a general rule, is
carried out at actual load. But, in an unavoidable case, the zero power factor method or the tem-
perature deduction method may apply to synchronous machines, and the equivalent load method
may apply to induction machinery, such as the followings.
(1) Synchronous machines
(A) Zero power factor method
The rotating machinery is to be over-excited at unload condition by generator or motor, and
is to be tested by flowing current close to rated current of zero power factor at rated volt-
age and frequency. The zero power factor method is capable of applying to synchronous ma-
chines for compensating of power factor, but where the method applies to synchronous gen-

24 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

erator or motor, sufficient field current to get value close to rated output providing for the
case a hard to get the rated output by short of field current, is to flow at the test, and the
test result is to be corrected according to the followings.
(a) Temperature test is to be carried out for each rated voltage and no-load (armature open
circuit), and rising temperature  of armature winding and rising temperature  of iron
core of armature are to be get from the test.
(b) In zero power factor method
′ = rising temperature of windings at voltage  ′ , current  ′
′  = rising temperature of iron cores at voltage  ′ , current  ′
′  = rising temperature of field windings at field current  ′ 
(c) when rated voltage is  , Rising temperature can be calculated by the following formula.
 
Armature windings :     ′    × 
 


 

Iron core of armature :      ′     × 



 
Field windings :   ′  × 

The test voltage  ′ , as far as possible, is to be rated voltage, but voltage over than
90  of rated voltage.
(B) Temperature deduction
Whichever is available among the followings.
(a) The rising temperature of iron core at rated output is the rising temperature of iron core
when rotating machinery is operated at unload condition of terminal voltage equivalent to
110  of rated voltage, and the rising temperature of armature windings at rated output
is the rising temperature of armature windings when rotating machinery is operated at
short condition of all terminals carrying armature current equivalent to 125  of rated
output.
(b) Total rising temperature of iron cores and armature windings, in each case, measured fi-
nal temperature of iron core and armature windings when rotating machinery is operated
at unload condition of rated voltage or at short condition of all terminals carrying rated
current, is each rising temperature for rated output.
(c) The circulation current equivalent to rated current armature at d.c. or single phase source
is to be transmitted at the condition of that windings are connected by ring shape(tri-
angle) line connection type, and opened one side, the terminal voltage equivalent to rat-
ed voltage, rising temperature of armature iron cores and windings are almost same as
rated output when rotating machinery operates at rated speed through exciting to gen-
erate voltage of terminals equivalent to rated voltage. The current of field is to be cor-
rected by zero power factor method.
(2) Inductors
(A) First stage synthesizing equivalency load method
This method is test method carried out by increasing and decreasing the voltage and fre-
quency after synthesizing the voltage of main source and low voltage having frequency dif-
ferent from the voltage of main source when the inductor for testing connected such as Fig
6.1.3 of the Guidance operates at no-load condition, and in general, the method synthesizing
first stage current and total load current (current standard method), is used. The method
(loss standard method) that input is equalized with loss at rated load calculated from the cir-
cle diagram method for inductors of special squirrel cage, 2 pole machinery and large output.
(B) Second stage synthesizing load method
This method is test method transmitted full load current to first stage by increasing and de-
creasing the voltage and frequency after synthesizing the second stage voltage and low volt-
age having low frequency when the inductor for testing connected as Fig 6.1.4 of the
Guidance operates at no-load condition.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 25
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Fig 6.1.3 Fig 6.1.4

First stage synthesizing equivalency load method Second stage synthesizing load method

2. Over-current or excess torque test 【See Rule】

In application to 309. 4 of the Rules, excess torque test of special type motor may be carried out
as the following unless otherwise designated.
Single phase motor : excess torque of 33  during 15 seconds
Motor used for deck machinery : excess torque of 50  during 15 seconds
Synchronous induction motor : excess torque of 35  during 15 seconds
3. Over speed test 【See Rule】
In application to 309. 5 of the Rules, over speed test for 2 pole induction motor having 500 kW or
over, is to be carried out at 120  of synchronizing speed.
4. High voltage test 【See Rule】
In application to 309. 7 of the Rules, the term "as deemed appropriate by the Society" of notes 3
in the Table 6.1.6 means agreement between the manufacturer and purchaser.
5. Voltage regulation test 【See Rule】
(1) In application to 309. 8 of the Rules, voltage regulation test for generator, as a general rule, is
to be carried out at the condition that the generator is connected directly with prime mover.
Where the test is carried out by generator only, it is supposed that speed between no load and
full load is changed in a straight line, and the voltage regulation rate is 3.5  in the case of that
there is no data about speed variation of prime mover.
(2) In application to 309. 8 (2) of the Rules, In the absence of precise information concerning the
maximum values of the sudden loads, the following conditions may be assumed: 60  of the
rated current with a power factor of between 0.4 lagging and zero to be suddenly switched on
with the generator running at no load, and then switched off after steady-state conditions have
been reached. Subject to Classification Society's approval, such voltage regulation during transient
conditions may be calculated values based on the previous type test records, and need not to
be tested during factory testing of a generator. (2017)
6. Commutation test 【See Rule】
(1) In application to 309. 10 of the Rules, grade of spark between commutator and brush of d.c.

26 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

machinery is divided into 8 kinds specified in Fig 6.1.5 of the Guidance, the sparks of No.5
through No.8 are considered as harmful spark.
(2) Nevertheless (1) above, when surface of commutator after the temperature test and over-load
test becomes black or gets damaged depending on spark, or the brush wears down or gets
damaged, the spark is considered harmful spark.
(3) The spark of No.2 or No.1 are recommended as spark at load of rated output or less.

Fig 6.1.5 spark on surface of commutator

7. In application to 309. 11 of the Rules, in order to provide sufficient information to the party respon-
sible for determining the discrimination settings in the distribution system where the generator is
going to be used, the generator manufacturer is to provide documentation showing the transient
behaviour of the short circuit current upon a sudden short-circuit occurring when excited, and run-
ning at nominal speed. The influence of the automatic voltage regulator is to be taken into account,
and the setting parameters for the voltage regulator are to be noted together with the decrement
curve. Such a decrement curve is to be available when the setting of the distribution system’s
short-circuit protection is calculated. The decrement curve need not be based on physical testing.
The manufacturer’s simulation model for the generator and the voltage regulator may be used where
this has been validated through the previous type test on the same model. (2017) 【See Rule】
8. In application to 309. 16 of the Rules, “the Society's permission" of notes (8) in the table means
type approval, test report's confirmation, etc. 【See Rule】
9. In application to 309. 16 of the Rules, “the Society's permission" of notes (9) in the table means
type approval, design approval's confirmation, etc. 【See Rule】

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 27
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 4 Switchboards, Section Boards and Distribution Boards

401. General 【See Rule】

1. Locations
In application to 401. 1 (1) of the Rules, in a case where steam pipes, water pipes, oil pipes, etc.
are inevitably laid in the proximity of switchboards, flanges of these pipes are to be of welded
joints or means are to be so provided that no detrimental effects would be exerted on switchboards
if a leakage occurs.
2. In application 401. 1 (2) of the Rules, the followings are to be complied with.
(1) The main generating station is to be situated within the machinery space, i.e. within the ex-
treme main transverse watertight bulkheads.
(2) Any bulkhead between the extreme main transverse watertight bulkheads is not regarded as
separating the equipment in the main generating station provided that there is access between
the spaces.
(3) The main switchboard is to be located as close as practicable to the main generating station,
within the same machinery space and the same vertical and horizontal A-60 fire boundaries.
(4) Where essential services for steering and propulsion are supplied from section boards, these and
any transformers, converters and similar appliances constituting an essential part of electrical
supply system are also to satisfy the foregoing.
3. Safety spaces of operators
In application to 401. 2 of the Rules, where switchboards are constructed so that necessary oper-
ation and maintenance can be done from their front, the passageway at the rear side of switch-
boards may be omitted. (2018)
4. Safety precautions to operators
In application to 401. 3 of the Rules, insulating matting is to be in accordance with the dielectric
tests according to IEC 61111 or equivalent. (2020)

402. Construction 【See Rule】

1. Flame retardant test of insulation material is to be carried out at the normal temperature and the
condition of that there is no wind, and round bar or thin steel plate having minimum length 120
mm , breadth 10 mm and thickness 3 mm is to be used as a standard for test specimen. The speci-
men is to be so tied up with a fine wire that breadth becomes an angle of about 45° vertically and
length becomes horizontally. The test is to be used liquefied natural gas, and the flame is to be so
adjusted vertically in air that the height of flame becomes about 125 mm and blue area of the
flame becomes about 35 mm . The centerline of the flame is to become vertically, and the front of
blue area of the flame is to be attached 5 times every 15 seconds intervals during 15 seconds at
bottom of the specimen. It may be recognized that the specimen burns out after testing. Where
the damaged length of the specimen is 60 mm or less, it is recognized as flame retardant material.
2. Flame retardant test of sealing compound for penetration of cables through fire-proof bulkheads and
decks is to be applied with appropriate modifications of the requirements of 1 above. Where the
damaged length of the specimen is 60 mm or less, the material is recognized as flame retardant
compound (material equivalent to compound of non-combustible material).
3. The following devices which busbars can be split easily and safely may be regarded as the "other
approved means" specified in 402. 1 (2) of the Rules. However, bolted links, for example bolted
busbar sections, are not to be accepted. (2018)
(1) Circuit breaker without tripping mechanism
(2) Disconnecting link (2018)
(3) Switch (2018)

403. Busbars and equalizer connections 【See Rule】

1. Busbars and the contact faces of busbars and linking conductors are to be protected against corro-
sion or oxidization by means of silver plating, tin plating or dipping in solder bath, etc.

28 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

2. Current rating of busbars may generally be determined by Table 6.1.10 of the Guidance.

Table 6.1.10 Current Rating of Busbars

Type Current rating

In case where only one generator is 100  or more of the rated current of the gen-
feeding power to the busbars erator
Subdivided busbar For each busbar (including space circuits),
arrangement {(100  of the large capacity rated currents
In case where two (distribution systems (e.g. bow thruster, etc.)) + (75  of sum of the
For or more gen- consisting of multiple rated currents of the rest of feeding circuits)} or
Generator erators are feeding busbars) more
power at their full Single busbar
capacities to the arrangement {(100  of the rated current of one generator of
busbars (distribution system the largest capacity) + (80  of sum of the rated
consisting of single currents of the rest of generators)} or more
busbar)

75  of sum of the rated currents of the feeding

circuits (including spare circuits) or more, but
In case of general power feeding circuit
need be not more than the capacity of generator
For Power busbar
Feeding In case where the feeding circuit has only
one load circuit, or where power is fed to
The total rated current or more
a group of motors under continuous serv-
ice

404. Measuring instruments for switchboards 【See Rule】

1. Instrument scales
In application to 404. 3 of the Rules, instrument scales mean effective measuring range. And where
the scale of current meter for electrical motor needs to be extended for starting current, the ex-
tended scales do not apply with this requirement.

406. Testing and inspection

1. Switchboards of same type are those manufactured by same method at the same factory, and are
to comply with the following. 【See Rule】
(1) External dimension, internal capacity and ventilating method of generator panel having synchron-
izer panel are to be about the same.
(2) Type and rated values of generator circuit-breaker are to be same, and dimension, and arrange-
ment of busbar and construction of terminal for connection are to be about the same.
(3) Load currents of busbar are to be about the same or less than the current.
(4) The arrangements of attached components in panels adjoined with heat source such as relay,
fuse, resistor, etc. are to be about the same, and their total consumption power is to be about
the same or less than the power.
(5) Construction and arrangement of terminals excluding maneuvering circuit, circuit for instrument,
etc. are to be about the same.
2. Temperature test 【See Rule】
In application to 406. 2 of the Rules, where coil is used with Class F insulation or Class H in-
sulation, temperature rising limit of the coil is in accordance with the Table 6.1.11 of the Guidance.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 29
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.11 Temperature Rising Limit of the Coil (°C) (Based on ambient temperature of 45°C)

Test method
Thermometer method Resistance method
Kind of insulation
Class F insulation 95 115
Class H insulation 120 140

3. High voltage test 【See Rule】

(1) In 406. 4 of the Rules, auxiliary apparatus means connected indicating lamp, small transformer,
relay, etc. between different poles or each phase
(2) When high voltage test for distribution boards is carried out according to 406. 4 of the Rules,
instrument and auxiliary apparatus are to be removed. But the high voltage test for a unit of
each apparatus is to be carried out for a unit of each apparatus and to comply with 406. 4 of
the Rules.
(3) Electronic equipment or installations which is assembled within distribution boards, but are not
connected directly with essential circuits of distribution boards or main circuits of supply and
distribution on board, excluding special cases, do not apply to the Rules.

30 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 5 Cables

501. General 【See Rule】

1. IIn application to 501. of the Rules, the term “consideration” means following IEC 60092 series or
standards considered as equivalent thereto. (2022)
(1) IEC 60092-350:2020
(2) IEC 60092-352:2005
(3) IEC 60092-353:2016
(4) IEC 60092-354:2020
(5) IEC 60092-360:2014
(6) IEC 60092-370:2019
(7) IEC 60092-376:2017
2. Cables manufactured and tested to standards other than those specified in Par 1 above or 501. of
the Rules will be accepted provided they are in accordance with an acceptable and relevant interna-
tional or national standard and are of an equivalent or higher safety level than those listed in Par 1
above. However, cables such as flexible cable, fibre-optic cable, etc. used for special purposes may
be accepted provided they are manufactured and tested in accordance with the relevant standards
accepted by the Society. (2017)

502. Application of cables

1. In application to 502. 2 (2) of the Rules, "except where specially approved by the Society regarding
mechanical damages" means that it is able to use un-armoured cables as long as the following
tests are satisfied. 【See Rule】
(1) Tensile testing is to be either of the followings.
(A) Tensile strength of inner sheath is to be 20 Nmm and above, tensile strength of outer
sheath is to be 13 Nmm and above. Fracture elongation of inner or outer sheath is to be
250 % and above.
(B) Tensile strength of inner & outer sheath is to be 17 Nmm and above. Fracture elongation
of inner or outer sheath is to be 400 % and above.
(2) Impact testing and wear resistant testing
Testing method and contents are to be approved by the Society.
(3) Compression testing
Insulation is not to be destructed by force of 1ton.
2. In application to 502. 3 of the Rules, flame retardant and fire resisting cables are to satisfy the fol-
lowings; 【See Rule】
(1) Flame retardant cable : IEC 60332 series
(2) Fire resistant cable : IEC 60331 series

503. Current rating of cable 【See Rule】

1. Voltage drop In application to 503. 2 of the Rules, calculation of voltage drop is to complying with
the following formulae as the standard :
(1) In the case of d.c. circuit
 ×  ×  ×  × 
Voltage drop(  ) = 

(2) In the case of a.c. circuit
· Single phase a.c. circuit
 ×  ×  ×  × 

Voltage drop(  ) =  × 
 
· Three phase a.c. circuit
 ×  ×  ×  × 

Voltage drop(  ) =  ×  × 
  

 : Length of cable for single passage ( m )
 : Maximum load current ( A )

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 31
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

 : Circuit voltage ( V )
 : d.c. resistance at 20 ℃ ( m )
 : Temperature factor at the maximum allowable temperature of conductor
(60 ℃ : 1.16, 75 ℃ : 1.22, 80 ℃ : 1.24, 85 ℃ : 1.26)
 : Factor of voltage drop (Refer to Table 6.1.12 and Table 6.1.13 of the Guidance)
2. In circuits of electric motors, voltage drop is to be calculated by taking into account the starting
current of an electric motor with the largest capacity. Further, in circuits of generators, approx-
imately 115  of the rated current is to be regarded as the maximum load thereby it is recom-
mended that voltage drop is to be controlled to 1  or less as far as practicable. Also, voltage drop
in circuits of accumulator batteries, shore connection, etc. is to be controlled to 2  or less as far
as practicable.

Table 6.1.12 Factor of a.c. Voltage Drop in Rubber Insulated Cables (d)

Nominal sectional Power factor (  ) Inductance ( mHkm )

area of conductor
( mm ) 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 660 V 250 V

325 1.15 1.51 1.61 1.68 1.72 1.74 1.75 0.244

250 1.10 1.37 1.45 1.49 1.51 1.52 1.52 0.246
200 1.06 1.26 1.31 1.34 1.34 1.34 1.33 0.248
150 1.04 1.19 1.22 1.22 1.22 1.21 1.18 0.249
125 1.03 1.13 1.14 1.14 1.12 1.10 1.07 0.254
100 1.02 1.10 1.09 1.08 1.06 1.03 1.00 0.254
80 1.01 1.06 1.05 1.03 1.00 0.99 0.94 0.258
60 1.01 1.04 1.02 1.00 0.97 0.93 0.90 0.262
50 1.00 1.02 1.00 0.96 0.93 0.89 0.86 0.268
38 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.94 0.90 0.87 0.82 0.272 0.217
30 1.00 0.99 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.84 0.80 0.276 0.221
22 1.00 0.98 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.77 0.280 0.227
14 1.00 0.97 0.93 0.89 0.84 0.80 0.75 0.294 0.239
8 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.87 0.83 0.78 0.73 0.312 0.255
5.5 1.00 0.96 0.91 0.87 0.82 0.77 0.72 0.330 0.265
3.5 1.00 0.96 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.76 0.72 0.354 0.279
2.0 1.00 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.76 0.71 0.388 0.309
1.25 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.81 0.76 0.71 0.428 0.343

Table 6.1.13 Factor of a.c. Voltage Drop in Mineral Insulated Cables ()

Nominal sectional Power factor (  )

area of conductor Inductance ( mHkm )
( mm ) 100 95 90 85 80 75 70

1.0 1.000 0.953 0.904 0.855 0.805 0.756 0.706 0.428

1.5 1.000 0.954 0.905 0.857 0.807 0.758 0.709 0.401
2.5 1.000 0.956 0.908 0.860 0.811 0.763 0.714 0.368
4 1.000 0.959 0.912 0.865 0.817 0.769 0.720 0.344
6 1.000 0.962 0.917 0.871 0.821 0.776 0.728 0.321
10 1.001 0.969 0.927 0.882 0.837 0.791 0.744 0.298
16 1.001 0.980 0.941 0.899 0.856 0.811 0.766 0.279
25 1.002 0.994 0.961 0.923 0.883 0.841 0.799 0.265
35 1.005 1.011 0.983 0.950 0.913 0.874 0.834 0.254
50 1.009 1.034 1.016 0.988 0.956 0.922 0.885 0.245
70 1.016 1.071 1.059 1.040 1.014 0.984 0.952 0.237
95 1.026 1.106 1.110 1.101 1.088 1.060 1.033 0.231
120 1.040 1.150 1.168 1.168 1.157 1.140 1.119 0.226
150 1.046 1.204 1.237 1.248 1.246 1.150 1.221 0.223

32 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

504. Installation of cables 【See Rule】

1. Precaution against fire protection
(1) In application to 504. 3 (1) of the Rules, "special precautions" means the installation work of
cables in the enclosed space or semi-enclosed space in ships meets either of the following
requirements. However, the works (B) (iii) below are to be approved by the Society in
accordance with the requirements in Pt 3, Sec 22 of the「Guidance for Approval of
Manufacturing Process and Type Approval, etc.」
(A) One cable is installed independently. Where the distance between those cables is to be of 5
times or more the diameter of the larger cable, the distance between one cable and
bunched cables is to be of 5 times or more the diameter of the largest (the minimum value:
the width of bunched cables or more), or an adequate fire stop is to be provided between
one independently installed cable and others, they may be installed independently.
(B) In a case where bunched cables are installed, the following requirements are to be complied
with:
(a) Flame retardant cables in a bunched condition which have passed the test of Category A,
IEC 60332-3-22:2018 in accordance with the requirements in Pt 3, Sec 21 2108 of the
「Guidance for Approval of Manufacturing Process and Type Approval, etc.」are to be used.
(2022)
(b) In case where cables other than those specified in (a) above are used, the following
means are to be taken (Refer to Fig 6.1.6 of the Guidance).
(i) Fire stops having at least B-0 penetrations fitted as follows:
ㆍcable entries at the main and emergency switchboard,
ㆍwhere cables enter engine control rooms,
ㆍcable entries at centralized control panels for propulsion machinery and essential
auxiliaries,
ㆍat each end of totally enclosed cable trunks (additional fire stops do not need to
be installed inside totally enclosed cable trunks); and
(ii) Cable runs in non-totally-enclosed trunks and open cable runs are to comply with
the following:
ㆍto have fire protection coating applied to at least 1m in every 14 m and to entire
length of vertical runs, or
ㆍto be fitted with fire stops having at least B-0 penetrations every second deck or
approximately 6 m for vertical runs and at every 14 m for horizontal runs.
(iii) The cable penetrations are to be installed in steel plates of at least 3 mm thick-
ness(see Fig 6.1.6 (3) of the Guidance), but need not extend through ceilings, decks,
bulkheads or solid sides of trunk. In cargo area, fire stops need only be fitted at the
boundaries of the spaces.
(c) In case where the effect of the proposed means for preventing flame propagation are
considered to be compatible with or better than that available with those specified in (b)
above, such method may be used.
(2) In (1) above, in case where cables are taken additional measures, the additional measures are
not to have a bad effect on the cables, and be of heat-resistance materials considered as
equivalent to the cables.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 33
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Fig 6.1.6 Flame propagation prevention measures

34 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(3) In application to 504. 3 (3) of the Rules, the followings are to be complied with.
(A) Electrical services required to be operable under fire conditions are as follows:
(a) Control and power systems to power-operated fire doors and status indication for all fire
doors
(b) Control and power systems to power-operated watertight doors and their status in-
dication
(c) Emergency fire pump
(d) Emergency lighting
(e) Fire and general alarms
(f) Fire detection systems
(g) Fire-extinguishing systems and fire-extinguishing media release alarms
(h) Low location lighting
(i) Public address systems
(j) Remote emergency stop/shutdown arrangements for systems which may support the
propagation of fire and/or explosion
(B) In application to 504. 3 (3) of the Rules, the followings are to be complied with.
(a) Cables being of a fire resistant type complying with IEC 60331-1:2018 for cables of greater
than 20 overall diameter, otherwise IEC 60331-21:1999+AMD1:2009 or IEC 60331-2:2018
for cables with an overall diameter not exceeding 20 mm, are installed and run continuous to
keep the fire integrity within the high fire risk area. (see Fig 6.1.7 of the Guidance) (2022)
(b) At least two-loops/radial distributions run as widely apart as is practicable and so ar-
ranged that in the event of damage by fire at least one of the loops/radial distributions
remains operational.
Systems that are self monitoring, fail safe or duplicated with cable runs as widely separated
as is practicable may be exempted.

Fig 6.1.7 Example for Application of Fire Resistant Cables

(C) The electrical cables to the emergency fire pump are not to pass through the machinery
spaces containing the main fire pumps and their source(s) of power and prime mover(s).
They are to be of a fire resistant type, in accordance with above (B) (a), where they pass
through other high fire risk areas.
(D) The definition for “high fire risk areas” is the following:
(a) Machinery spaces as defined by Pt 8, Ch 1, 103. 30 of the Rules, except spaces having
little or no fire risk as defined by Pt 8, Ch 7, 102. 3 (2) (B) ⑩ of the Rules.
(b) Spaces containing fuel treatment equipment and other highly flammable substances
(c) Galley and Pantries containing cooking appliances
(d) Laundry containing drying equipment
(e) Spaces as defined by Pt 8, Ch 7, 102. 3 (2) (B) ⑧, ⑫, ⑭ of the Rules for ships carrying
more than 36 passengers

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 35
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(E) Fire resistant type cables are to be easily distinguishable.

(F) For special cables, requirements in the following standards may be used:
(a) Electric data cables : IEC 60331-23:1999 (2022)
(b) Optical fibre cables : IEC 60331-25:1999 (2022)
(4) The interconnecting cable between a generator and the main switchboard is to be routed clear
fuel oil purifier spaces, above the other generator engines and fuel oil purifiers except the cables
are;
(A) subdivided into at least two groups separated throughout their length as widely as practi-
cable,
(B) fire resisting cables which have passed the test specified in IEC 60331, or
(C) protected by means deemed appropriate by the Society.
2. The wording "a fire in an adjacent space" in 504. 3 (2) of the Rules generally means the fire from
which standard time-temperature curves are obtainable in the standard fire test defined in regulation
II-2/3.47 of Annex to SOLAS Convention.
3. Cables in refrigerated spaces In application to 504. 7 of the Rules, in case where non-metallic
sheaths such as PVC or polychloroprene are used for cables installed in refrigerated spaces, materi-
als which are not affected at the lowest temperature of refrigerated spaces are to be selected and
the cables are to be installed in such a manner that they are not subjected to mechanical damage.
4. In case where installation of cables specified in 501. 1 of the Guidance in the space specified in
504. 3 of the Rules is unavoidable, these cables are to be installed in insulated steel pipes or steel
ducts equivalent to A-60 or more, or fire resisting cables which have passed the test specified in
IEC 60331 are to be used.
5. Cables in dangerous spaces
Where cables are installed in dangerous spaces worried over fire or explosion due to electrical acci-
dent, the cable are to be protected properly.
(1) Dangerous spaces generally mean the following areas:
(A) Dangerous spaces specified in Pt 7, Ch 1, Sec 11 of the Rules, Rules for Ships Carrying
Liquefied Gases in Bulk (Pt 7, Ch 5 of the Rules), and Rules for Ships Carrying Dangerous
Chemical in Bulk (Pt 7, Ch 6 of the Rules).
(B) Cargo holds specified in Pt 7, Ch 3, Sec 9 of the Rules
(C) Battery rooms, paint store and flammable gas bottle room such as acetylene gas bottle stor-
age room
(2) Protections for cables to be installed in the dangerous spaces specified in (1) above are to com-
ply with the following requirements:
(A) Cables to be installed in dangerous spaces specified in (1) (A) above may be regarded to
have the protection by this requirement if the relevant requirements in Pt 7, Ch 1, Sec 11
of the Rules, Rules for Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (Pt 7, Ch 5 of the Rules), and
Rules for Ships Carrying Dangerous Chemical in Bulk (Pt 7, Ch 6 of the Rules) are complied
with.
(B) Cables to be installed in cargo holds specified in (1) (B) above may be respectively regarded
to have the protection by this requirement if the relevant requirements in Pt 7, Ch 3, Sec 9
of the Rules are complied with.
(C) The protections for cables to be installed in each compartment specified in (1) (C) above are
to comply with the following requirements:
(i) Cables are, in principle, to be of the metal armoured ones.
(ii) Protections for preventing mechanical damage to cables are to be provided as necessary.

506. Earthing 【See Rule】

1. Earthing of Metallic Coverings

In application to 506. 1 of the Rules, earthing of metallic coverings of cables may comply with the
requirements as specified below:
(1) Cable sheaths and armours may be earthen with earthing glands so designed as to allow effec-
tive earthing. Glands are to be installed in such a manner that they are securely fixed to the
earthen metal structure with good electrical contact.
(2) Conduits may be earthen by being screwed into a metal enclosure, or by nuts on both sides of

36 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

the wall of a metallic enclosure, provided the surfaces in contact are clean and free from rust,
scale or paint and that the enclosure is securely earthen. The connection is to be painted imme-
diately after assembly in order to inhibit corrosion.
(3) Cable sheaths and armour, and conduits may be earthen by means of clamps or clips of corro-
sion resistant materials making effective contact with sheath or armour and earth metal in lieu of
the procedures specified in (1) and (2) above.
(4) All contacts of metal conduits, ducts and metal sheaths of cables used for earth continuity are
to be soundly made and, where necessary, to be protected against corrosion.

507. Securing of cables 【See Rule】

1. Clips, support and accessories

(1) In application to 507. 3 of the Rules, in case where non-metal cable bands and supports are
used, their specification of material, dimension, property and manner is to be submitted to the
society for obtaining approval. However, that those used for the interior of switchboards, etc.
may be excluded from this requirement.
(2) In application to 507. 3 (4) of the Rules, the wording 'special considerations are to be given in
order to prevent the release of the cable means the reinforcement by metal cable bands. Metal
cable bands are to be arranged at intervals of 1 to 2 m considering the outside diameter of the
cable.

508. Penetration of bulkheads and decks

1. Maintenance of the water-tightness and gas-tightness 【See Rule】
In application to 508. 1 of the Rules, in maintenance of the water-tightness and gas-tightness at
the cable penetrations, the construction and characteristics of materials of the cables are to be
considered.
2. Penetration through fireproof bulkheads and decks 【See Rule】
In application to 508. 2 of the Rules, penetration of bulkheads and decks is to be in accordance
with the followings:
(1) The cable penetrations through A class bulkheads or decks are to be approved by the Society in
accordance with the requirements of Ch 3 of the「Guidance for Approval of Manufacturing
Process and Type Approval, etc.」
(2) In case where cable glands are used those in the cable penetration through A class bulkheads
or decks are to be filled with the non-combustible compound approved by the Society at least
to a thickness of 25 mm or more may be accepted notwithstanding the requirements specified
above. In this case, except A-0 class divisions, thermal insulation material is to be fitted addi-
tionally according to the class of fire protection as in other cases.
(3) The compound used in the cable penetrations through B class bulkheads or decks is to be of
the non-combustible compound approved by the Society. In case where the compound is used
to fill the sealing box or coaming, the length of the filled part is to be at least 50 mm or more.
(4) The compound approved to be used at the cable penetrations through A class bulkheads or
decks under the requirements specified in (1) above may be regarded as the non-combustible
compound meeting the requirements in (2) and (3) above.

510. Cables for alternating current

1. In application to 510. (5) of the Rules, distance between cable and steel bulkhead, as far as possi-
ble, is to be 50 mm or over. 【See Rule】
2. "Large cross section" in 510. (6) of the Rules means conductor having section area 185 mm or over.
【See Rule】

511. Joints and branch circuits 【See Rule】

1. In application to 511. 2 of the Rules, "propulsion cable" means the cable of entire length between
generators and electric motors for propulsion in electric propulsion ships.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 37
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

512. Testing and inspection 【See Rule】

1. For each product of cables passed type approval test according to 103. 1 (2) of the Rules, and each
product of cables approved by 103. 6 of the Rules, material test for cable component may be
omitted.
2. PVC sheathed cables to be installed in refrigerated spaces below -10 ℃ are to pass the cold bend-
ing test of cooling temperature which is -5 ℃ below the lowest temperature of a refrigerated space.
A figure in an unit not exceed 5 is considered as 5 and that exceeding 5 is considered as 10 of
the test temperature.
3. In case where the cables specified in 2 above are used with polychloroprene rubber sheath, the ca-
bles are to pass the cold bending test for PVC sheathed cables. But the test may be omitted in
case where the lowest temperature of a refrigerated space is -30°C or over.
4. Cables are to be tested by Ch 3, Sec 21 of the「Guidance for Approval of Manufacturing Process
and Type Approval, etc.」, and are to be passed.

38 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 6 Transformers for Power and Lighting

602. Construction 【See Rule】

1. Transformer for accommodation

In application to 602. 1 of the Rules, the box and cover of dry type transformer are to be of metal
and be of drip-proof type excluding where transformers are installed in switchboard or control panel
having enclosure of appropriate construction. And the opening is to be of gab not more than 12 mm
or to have grating not entered rounding bar of diameter 12 mm or over, and is to be of construction
which a mouth, etc. cannot enter into the opening.

605. Testing and inspection

1. General 【See Rule】
In application to 605. 1 of the Rules, "transformer which is produced in series having identical type"
is a transformer of identical capacity, voltage, current, major dimensions, cooling method and in-
sulation grade, and manufactured by same manufacturing method at same factory.
2. Voltage variation test 【See Rule】
In application to 605. 3 of the Rules, rate of voltage variation by calculation formula in is accordance
with the following.

Rate of voltage variation =    

 : Voltage drop by resistance ( % )
 
․ In case of single phase :    ×  or    × 
 
 
․ In case of 3 phase :    ×  or    × 
    

 : Voltage drop by reactance   × 

 : Loss against rated capacity at t°C ( W )
 : Loss against rated capacity calculated in terms of 75°C ( W )
 : Loss against rated capacity calculated in terms of 115°C ( W )
 : impedance voltage ( V ), i.e. voltage between first stage terminals when  is measured.
 : Reactance voltage ( V )

․ In case of single phase :      
  


․ In case of 3 phase :       
  

 : Rated first stage voltage ( V )
 : Rated first stage current ( A )
And P75 in calculation formula above apply to  ,  and  grade insulation,  apply to  and
 grade insulation.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 39
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 7 Control-gears for Motors and Magnetic Brakes

701. Construction 【See Rule】

1. Magnetic contactor and over-current relay for electric motor

In application to 701. 5 of the Rules, thermal relays or magnetic over-current relays for electric
motor are to comply with the following at environmental temperature of 45 ℃ .
(1) To be operated within 2~30 seconds under the condition of flowing the current of 600  of the
full load.
(2) To be operated within 4 minutes under the condition of flowing the current of 200  of the
current value after passing the current corresponding to the full load of electric motor until satu-
rated temperature.
(3) To be not operated under the condition of flowing the current of 100  of the full load, and to
be operated within 2 hours under the condition of flowing the current of 125  of the current
value after saturated temperature.

703. Emergency stopping apparatus 【See Rule】

In application to 703. of the Rules, emergency stopping apparatus of equipments installed in machi-
nery spaces are to be installed at the outside of machinery spaces.

706. Clearance and creepage distance of control appliances 【See Rule】

1. The rated insulating voltage means the voltage having no difficulty in use as standard insulating
voltage for design of control-gear, and the rated insulating voltage is the rated voltage or over.
2. Minimum creepage distances in 706. (2) of the Rules are to be in accordance with Table 6.1.15 and
Table 6.1.16 of the Guidance according to the grades specified in Table 6.1.14 of the Guidance.
3. Clearance and creepage distance of control-gear is to be in accordance with the following (refer to
Table 6.1.17 of the Guidance). Grade C in the following means degree of protection and ambient
condition specified in 706. (1) of the Rules.
(1) Clearance is to be decided on the minimum distance between bare live parts, minimum value of
Grade C is the value specified in Table 6.1.17 of the Rules, and minimum value of Grade A and
B is the value specified in Table 6.1.15 and 6.1.16 of the Guidance.
(2) Creepage is to be decided on the minimum distance adjoining the surface of insulating material
inserted between bare live parts, minimum value of Grade C is the value specified in Table
6.1.17 of the Rules, and minimum value of Grade A and B is the value specified in Table 6.1.15
and 6.1.16 of the Guidance. But the space such as the following existing in the surface of in-
sulating material is to be decided to be no space.
(A) Breadth or depth of space less than 1 mm in Grade B rated insulating voltage 125 V over
and Grade C rated insulating voltage 250 V or less
(B) Breadth or depth of space less than 2 mm in Grade C rated insulating voltage 250 V over
(3) In (1) and (2) above, where insulating material is divided by metal between bare live parts, cree-
page distance of control-gear is to comprise one of the followings.
(A) The maximum value among the divided insulation material is to be decided on, in case of
Grade C, the value specified in Table 6.1.17 of the Rules or more, and in case of Grade A
and B, the each value specified in Table 6.1.15 and 6.1.16 of the Guidance or more.
(B) The sum of two higher values among the divided insulation material is to be, in case of
Grade C, the value specified in Table 6.1.17 of the Rules or more, and in case of Grade A
and B, the each value specified in Table 6.1.15 and 6.1.16 of the Guidance or more. But the
divided insulation materials less than 1mm in Grade B rated insulating voltage 125 V over
and Grade C rated insulating voltage 250 V or less, and those less than 2 mm in Grade C
rated insulating voltage 250 V or less are excluded.

40 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Table 6.1.14 Class for Protection Condition and Environmental Condition

Minimum
Class Protection condition Environmental condition
value
Inside of control-gear protected enough to be not Control gear using at excellent envi-
Table affected with environmental condition such as mois- ronmental condition which has noth-
A
6.1.15 ture, dust, etc. Example: Inside of dust-protection ing to worry about pollution Example:
type relay, plated printing distribution board. Air-conditioning clean room
Control-gear protected enough to be not affected
Control gear using at good environ-
Table with environmental condition such as moisture, dust,
B mental condition Example: Clean
6.1.16 etc. Example: Small relay for control device, exclusive
electrical equipment room
use socket, not plated printing distribution board.

Table 6.1.15 Minimum Clearance and Creepage Distance for Class A Control Appliances

Class A
Rated insulating voltage V
Clearance mm 
Creepage mm
(d.c., a.c.)          
Not exceeding 12 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
Exceeding 12 to 30 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
Exceeding 30 to 60 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Exceeding 60 to 125 0.5 0.5 0.5 1
Exceeding 125 to 250 1 1 1 1.5
Exceeding 250 to 380 1.5 1.5 1.5 2
Exceeding 380 to 500 2 2 2 3

Table 6.1.16 Minimum Clearance and Creepage Distance for Class B Control Appliances

Class B
Rated insulating voltage V
Clearance mm 
Creepage mm
(d.c., a.c.)          
Not exceeding 12 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
Exceeding 12 to 30 1 1 1 1.5
Exceeding 30 to 60 1 1 1 2
Exceeding 60 to 125 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5
Exceeding 125 to 250 2 3 2 3
Exceeding 250 to 380 3 3 3 4
Exceeding 380 to 500 4 4 4 6
(NOTES)
(1) "    " applies to clearance between bare live parts, and between live part and earthen metal part.
(2) "    " applies to clearance between live part and metal part which accidently becomes dangerous.
(3) Creepage distance is to be determined by type and shape of insulation. a applies to ceramic insulator
(steatite and porcelain), and comparable other insulator which is particularly safe against leaked elec-
tricity provided with ribbed construction or vertical partitions proved to be equally effective as ceramic
insulator through experiments having a tracking index greater than 140 e.g., phenol resins formed
items. "  " applies to other insulation materials.
(4) In case where "    " is greater than the corresponding creepage "  " or "  ", the creepage distance be-
tween bare live parts and insulated metals which operator may readily touch and which becomes live
parts by the deterioration of insulation are to be "    " or more.
(5) Current value is to be expressed by the rated current-carrying value.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 41
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

42 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 43
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(4) In (1) and (2) above, where rib exists in the surface of insulating material inserted between bare
live parts, the creepage and clearance are to be decided on the values excluded the height such
as the followings.
(A) Height of rib less than 1 mm in Grade B rated insulating voltage 125 V over and Grade C
rated insulating voltage 250 V or less
(B) Hight of rib less than 2 mm in Grade C rated insulating voltage 250 V over
(5) In (1) and (2) above, where the other rib inserted in insulating material between bare live parts,
and the inserted distance is less than the depth of space of insulation material, creepage is to
be decided on minimum distance along the line of the inserted rib.
(6) In (5) above, where the rib of material able to see as same insulating material is inserted, cree-
page and clearance are to be decided on minimum distance along the line of surface of the rib.
(7) Creepage to earth and clearance to earth are to be decided on minimum distance according to
(1) and (2) above.
(8) The insulation distance of those having insulating metal which becomes bare live part by deteri-
oration is to be decided according to (3) above.

707. Testing and inspection

1. General [See Rule]
In application to 707. 1 of the Rules, the term “subject to the Society's permission” means type ap-
proval, test report's confirmation, etc. and the term “control-gear which is produced in series having
identical type” is a control-gear manufactured by same manufacturing method at same factory and
complying with the followings.
(1) External dimension of panel, box, etc., internal capacity and ventilating method are to be about
the same.
(2) Type and rated values of circuit-breaker, magnetic contactor of main circuit are same, and di-
mension and arrangement of main circuit conductor and construction of terminal for connection
are to be about the same.
(3) Load currents of main circuit are to be about the same or less than the current.
(4) The arrangement of attached components in panel adjoined with heat source such as relay, fuse,
resistor, etc. are to be about the same, and their total consumption power is to be about the
same or less than the power.
2. High voltage test 【See Rule】
In 707. 4 of the Rules, the high voltage test is to be in accordance with 406. 4 of the Rules.

44 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 8 Fuses, Circuit-breakers and Electromagnetic Contactors

801. General 【See Rule】

1. Korean Industrial Standards or equivalent are the followings. And where products made by manu-
facturer other than Korean flag, the standard established by the nation may apply according to the
discretion of the Society. However, the standards are to be updated. And where these standards are
not standard for ship's store, the products are to be considered with ship's environmental condition
(to comply with Pt 6, Ch 1, Sec 2 of the Rules).
(1) Fuse : IEC 60269
(2) Circuit breaker : IEC 60947-2
(3) Electromagnetic contactor : IEC 60947-4-1

Section 9 Explosion-protected Electrical Equipment

901. General
1. Material 【See Rule】
"Material which minimizes the risk of spark by friction" in 901. 5 (2) of the Rules means material
which does not occur explosion owing to spark caused by friction or impact between metals. That
means material identified anti-ignition tested by using the drop tester specified in KS E 3903.
2. Construction 【See Rule】
Pressurized protected and intrinsically safe electrical equipment are to be indicated the followings in
addition to requirements specified in 901. 6 (5) of the Rules.
(1) Pressurized protected electrical equipment
Ventilating type and sealing type are to be indicated the followings.
(A) Internal capacity of equipment
(B) Required wind pressure and wind capacity at the protection gas inlet of equipment
(C) Required wind pressure at the protection gas outlet of equipment (ventilating type only)
(D) Permissible maximum wind pressure of container
(2) Intrinsically safe electrical equipment
(A) The followings are to be indicated. But for detector, etc. the requirements (a) through (c)
may be omitted.
(a) Rated value of intrinsically safe circuit
(b) Rated value of non-intrinsically safe circuit
(c) Useful condition
(B) Where a non-intrinsically safe circuit in incorporated equipment is not explosion- protected
type, the followings are to be indicated in addition to (A) above.
(a) Caution for prohibition from installing in dangerous spaces
(b) Caution for prohibition from alteration, modification for component of equipment, wiring,
etc.
(C) A intrinsically safe circuit in incorporated equipment is to be indicated clearly with the purport
at terminals. Wiring diagram of equipment is to be attached and seen inside cover of
equipment.
3. Simple apparatus 【See Rule】
In application to 901. 7 of the Rules, simple apparatus is to comply with the following.
(1) Passive components, for example switches, junction boxes, resistors and simple semiconductor
devices
(2) sources of generated energy which do not generate more than 1.5 V, 100 mA and 25 mW.

902. Special requirements 【 See Rule】

The wording “as deemed appropriate by the Society” in 902. of the Rules means the followings.
1. Flameproof type electrical equipment

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 45
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

(1) Where flameproof lighting fittings are fitted with bulkheads penetrated through, they are to be
so installed as not to impair the integrity of the bulkheads.
(2) In case where a drain discharging devices is provided to the enclosure of flameproof con-
struction, it is to be so constructed as not to impair the flameproof characteristics even with the
device in the open position.
(3) In case where a waterproof packing is provided to the flameproof construction, it is to be so
constructed as not to impair the flameproof joints, such as length of flame path and gaps etc.,
caused by the water intrusion.
(4) In case where a cable is connected to a terminal box by the cable pipe connecting method,
sealing fittings are to be provided near the terminal box.
(5) When installing equipment, its flameproof joints are not to be installed within the distance
specified in the following table with respect to a bulkhead or solid object.

Minimum distance
Gas group
mm

llA 10

llB 30

llC 40

(6) Flameproof joints are to be protected against corrosion with suitable non-hardening grease.
2. Intrinsically safe type electrical equipment
(1) Intrinsically safe electrical equipment is to be installed independently against general electrical
equipment. Where the combined installation with general equipment is necessary, earthed metal-
lic partitions are to be provided between these equipment.
(2) The wires for intrinsically safe circuits are to be measured to discriminate easily against those
for other circuits. And the wires are also to be screens or separated 50 mm or more from those
for other circuits to avoid adverse effects by external electric or magnetic fields. (2018)
(3) Connection terminal for intrinsically safe circuit and non-intrinsically safe circuit under the com-
bined installation are to comply with either of the followings.
(A) Connection terminals for the both circuits are to be installed in individually circuit boards
separated from 50 mm each other.
(B) Earthed metallic partitions having efficient mechanical strength and insulation are to be pro-
vided between the connection terminals for the both circuits.
(4) Even if an electrical fault for general circuit other than intrinsically safe circuits is happened, the
function of a safety barrier is to be kept operating.
(5) Safety barriers are to be located in non-hazardous areas.
(6) Safety barriers are to be structured by at least two same components unless one component
specified below is used. In case where one of the components is broken, an explosion protect-
ing performance is to be maintained.
(A) Power Transformers
The insulation between first and second field windings is to be ensured by earthed partitions
made by copper. And each field winding is to have an efficient insulation performance.
(B) Current Limitation Resistors
The surface of the resistors is to be covered by a synthetic resin or the resistors are to be
embedded in a formed resin.
(C) Blocking Condensers
The condenser is to be structured by two solid dielectric type capacitors connected with
each other in series which have high reliability. Electrolytic capacitors including tantalum type
are not to be used.
(7) Each unused core in a multi-core cable is to be adequately insulated from earth and from each
other at both ends by the use of suitable terminations.
3. Increased safety type electrical equipment
(1) Enclosures of increased safety lighting fittings are to be of a robust construction made of
non-hygroscopic flame-retardant or incombustible material, and also they are to be of watertight
construction or equivalent thereto.
(2) In case where an increased safety type motor or transformer is used, the efficient protection for

46 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

overload and overheat is to be provided. Especially for a squirrel cage induction motor, the addi-
tional protection is to be provided not so as to use it over an allowable restraint time and ab-
normal temperature rise is not to be occurred under the restraint condition of the rotor.
(3) In case where there is a limitation for use in order to maintain an explosion protecting perform-
ance, the approval for use by the Society is to be necessary.
(4) To avoid the risk of short-circuits between adjacent conductors in terminal blocks, the insulation
of each conductor is to be maintained up to the metal of the terminal.
4. Pressurized protected type electrical equipment
(1) When air is used as the pressurized medium, the air inlet is to be located in a safe space.
(2) Where air or inert gas is used as the pressurized medium, an interlock device is to be provided
to ensure a displacement of air within the apparatus of at least 10 times the free volume of its
enclosure and thus to obtain the required pressure before it can be energized.
(3) Pressurized protected electrical equipment is to be automatically disconnected from the source of
electrical power in the event of the loss of pressure within its enclosure. However, if this ar-
rangement increases the hazard to the ship, it may be permitted for loss of pressure to operate
an alarm device only.
5. Powder filling type electrical equipment
(1) The enclosure is to be at least IP54 or higher. If it is IP55 or higher grade, a breathing device
is to be provided.
(2) A powder material filled in the enclosure is to be quartz or solid glass particles and have an ef-
ficient insulation performance.
(3) The total stored energy of all capacitors in an enclosure is not to exceed 20 J in normal
operation.
(4) In case where there is a limitation for use in order to maintain an explosion protecting perform-
ance, the approval for use by the Society is to be necessary.
6. Oil immersion type electrical equipment
(1) The oil level indicating device is to be provided so that the liquid level can easily checked in
service.
(2) Live parts of the electrical equipment are to be immersed to a depth of not less than 25 mm
below the surface of protective liquid.
(3) Where connecting cables are dipped into protective liquid, they are to be of oil resistant type.
(4) In case where there is a limitation for use in order to maintain an explosion protecting perform-
ance, the approval for use by the Society is to be necessary.
7. Encapsulation type electrical equipment
(1) Where some protection components are installed in order to limit a temperature rise, the setting
value is not to be changed.
(2) In case where there is a limitation for use in order to maintain an explosion protecting perform-
ance, the approval for use by the Society is to be necessary.
8. Non-sparking type electrical equipment
(1) Non-sparking type electrical equipment applied to electrical equipment such that, in normal oper-
ation and in certain specified regular expected occurrences, it is not capable of igniting a sur-
rounding explosive gas atmosphere.
(2) It shall not produce an operational arc or spark unless that arc or spark is prevented from caus-
ing ignition of a surrounding explosive gas atmosphere separately.
(3) Degree of protection is to be more than either of the followings
(A) IP 54 where there are bare live parts, or IP 44 where there are insulated live parts
(B) IP 4X where there are bare live parts, or IP 2X where there are insulated live parts where
the equipment is intended for installation only in locations providing adequate protection
against the entry of solid foreign objects or water capable of impairing safety.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 47
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 10 Lighting Fittings, Heating Appliances, Wiring Accessories and

Miscellaneous Equipment

1001. General 【See Rule】

Lighting fitting, heating appliances, etc., as a rule, are to comply with Korean Industrial Standard or
equivalent thereto.

1002. Lighting fittings

1. Construction and location 【See Rule】
In application to 1002. 1 (3) of the Rules, a guard for globes made by materials other than glass
materials may be omitted according to the discretion of the Society.
2. In application to 1002. 2 (4) and 3 of the Rules, the following requirements shall be complied with.
However type approval may be omitted subject to the Society's permission, in this case, they are to
comply with KS or equivalent thereto. 【See Rule】
(1) Application standard
(A) IEC 60092-306
(B) KS C 8100
(C) KS standard or equivalent thereto for safety and function requirements of LED lighting in
ships.
(D) In application to the above (A) and (B), in case that there are different contents about the
same requirements, IEC 60092-306 shall be complied with.
(E) Other equivalent KS or IEC standard
(2) Test (2019)
Test is to be carried out in accordance with Sec 31 of Guidance for Approval of Manufacturing
Process and Type Approval, etc. However, test may be partly exempted when the Society con-
siders necessary.

1003. Heating appliances 【See Rule】

1. Protection guard for heating elements is to be fixed firmly and to be prevented from touching the
live parts, and an opening parts of protection guard are to be minimized for preventing standard test
finger from touching the heating elements.
2. Live parts of cooking heater are to be prevented cooking appliances from touching cooking
appliances.
3. Where the heating element is employed in liquid, it is to be protected by anti-corrosive metal
sheath.
4. In case of heating appliance used for a bath, heating elements are to be arranged to avoid electrical
shock in bath, and operating switches are to be of multi pole connection type and to be provided
with indicating lamp and name plate.
5. Portable cooking heaters are to be of construction not falling over sideways.

48 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 11 Internal Communications

1102. Essential internal communication systems 【See Rule】

1. Essential internal communication and signal systems are to be inclusive of the followings.
(1) Navigation lights, signalling lamps and signal alarms required in International Convention
(2) Internal communications
(A) Communications between the following
(a) Between navigation bridge and main engine control station
(b) Between navigation bridge and steering gear room
(c) Engineer's alarm
(d) Available communications between navigation bridge, centralized control room, engine
control station and engineer's accommodation at failure of main power.
(3) Internal signal alarms
(A) General emergency alarm
(B) Fire alarm
(C) CO2 release alarm
(4) Steering gear control system and rudder angle indicator
(5) Navigation equipment required in International Convention as deemed necessary by the Society
(6) Other internal communications, signal alarms and navigation equipment

1105. General emergency alarm system 【See Rule】

Where circuit breakers for overcurrent protection are provided for feeder circuits of general emer-
gency alarm system, the notice of "To be always kept 'ON'" is to be posted. It is, however, not
necessary to post the notice if protected by fuses.

1106. Public address system 【See Rule】

1. A public address system is not be required in the spaces such as under deck passage way, bosun's
locker, hospital and pump room.
2. Where an individual loudspeaker has a device for local silencing, an override arrangement from the
control stations, including the navigating bridge, shall be in place
3. In application to 1106. 6 (1) of the Rules, the sound pressure levels for cabin and state rooms shall
be attained as required, during sea trials.
4. In application to 1106. 7 of the Rules, the method to minimize the effect of a single failure is as
follows :
(1) The use of multiple amplifiers
(2) The use of segregated cable routes from each amplifier to public rooms, alleyways, stairways
and control stations
(3) The use of more than one device for generating electronic sound signals
(4) The use of electrical protection for individual loudspeakers against short circuits.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 49
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 12 Semi-Conductor Converters (2021)

1204. Rectifiers
1. General 【See Rule】
In application to 1204. 7 (1) of the Rules, the term “subject to the Society's permission” means
type approval, test report's confirmation, etc.
2. Temperature test 【See Rule】
In application to 1204. 7 (2) of the Rules, the appropriateness for requirements in 1204. 4 of the
Rules may be identified by temperature measuring of cooling pin, case, refrigerant, etc. But, where
the temperature rising limit for cooling pin, case, refrigerant, etc. is in the limit, it is presumed the
temperature of joining parts as the designated case not exceeded the allowable maximum
temperature.
3. Operation test 【See Rule】
In application to 1204. 7 (3) of the Rules, operation test for protection devices means interlocking
test between cooling fan and switch, and destructive test such as protection fuse test for rectifier
elements may be omitted.

Section 13 Accumulator Batteries

1301. General 【See Rule】

1. In case where accumulator batteries are made by foreign manufacturer, the accumulator batteries
are to comply with the standards recognized by the nation and to comply with ship's stores.
2. Accumulator batteries of an adequate discharge rate are to be selected according to their application.
3. In case where alkali batteries are used, the specification including the construction, performance,
method of installation, etc. is to be submitted at each time to the Society for obtaining approval.

1303. Location 【See Rule】

1. In application to 1303. 4 of the Rules, the followings are to be complied with.

(1) The term "large batteries" means the accumulator batteries connected to battery charging facili-
ties with an output of 2 kW or more. The output of battery charging facilities is to be the prod-
uct of the rated current of the rectifier and nominal voltage of battery group.
(2) Accumulator batteries connected to battery charging facilities with a capacity in a range from 0.2
kW to 2 kW are to be placed in a battery box installed within a battery compartment or on the
upper deck or upward. Where the accumulator batteries are unable to be placed in such areas,
one of the following requirements is to be complied with;
(A) To be placed in a storage box or locker installed at an adequate area.
(B) To be placed in an open state within the machinery space.
(C) To be placed in a compartment with good air ventilation.
(3) Accumulator batteries connected to battery charging facilities with a capacity in a range 0.2 kW
or less may be installed in open states at adequate areas or may be installed in battery boxes.
(4) The output of the battery charging facility is to be of the value obtained by the following for-
mula or more. (2019)

P = U ×  (W)

P (W) : Calculated battery charging power

U (V) : Rated battery voltage
I (A) : Charging current

2. In application to 1303. 4 of the Rules, valve-regulated sealed batteries may be located in compart-

50 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

ments with standard marine or industrial electrical equipment provided that the following ventilation
requirements are complied with.
(1) Equipment that may produce arcs, sparks or high temperatures in normal operation is not to be
in close proximity to battery vent plugs or pressure relief valve outlets.
(2) Where valve-regulated sealed batteries are installed, the charging facilities are to incorporate in-
dependent means such as overvoltage protection to prevent gas emission in excess of the man-
ufacturer's design quantity.
(3) Boost charge facilities, where provided, are to be arranged such that they are automatically dis-
connected when the battery compartment ventilation system fail.

1304. Electrical installation in battery compartment 【See Rule】

Explosion protecting classes of the explosion-protected electrical equipment installed in the battery
rooms for lead acid and alkaline batteries are to be higher than at least the classes specified in
201. 1 (2) (B) (b) of the Guidance.

1305. Protection against corrosion 【See Rule】

In application to 1305. (3) of the Rules, it may be exempted in case the entire floor and all walls up
to 150 mm high of battery rooms are to be lined with lead-sheet and the linings are to be
watertight.

1306. Ventilation 【See Rule】

1. The capacity of exhaust ventilation of a battery compartment with vented type batteries is to be of
the value obtained by the following formula or more. However, the ventilation rate for compartments
containing valve-regulated sealed batteries may be reduced to 25 % of that given by the following
formula. (2018)

Q = 110 ×  ×  ( lh )

Q : Exhaust capacity
 (A) : Maximum current delivered by the charging equipment during gas formation, but not
less than 25 % of the maximum obtainable charging current in amperes
 : Number of cells in series

2. The minimum cross-sectional area of ventilation ducts is to be of the value obtained by the follow-
ing formula or more. (2019)

A = 5.6/1000 ×  ( Cm )

Air velocity : Assuming 0.5(m/s)

3. It is recommended that the ventilation system for a compartment containing accumulator batteries
connected to battery charging facilities with an output of 2 kW or more is to be of the mechanical
exhaust-ventilation.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 51
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 15 High Voltage Electrical Installations

1501. General 【See Rule】

1. The supply voltages and frequency specified in the followings are recognized as a standard.

System nominal voltage (kV) Commercial frequency (Hz)

3(3.3) 50 or 60
6(6.6) 50 or 60
10(11) 50 or 60
15 50 or 60

1502. System design 【See Rule】

1. Standards applied to high voltage equipment

The following equipment is to comply with the relevant IEC Pub. or equivalent and above.
(A) Circuit breakers : IEC 62271-100
(B) Switches : IEC 60265
(C) Fuses : IEC 60282
(D) Contactors : IEC 60470
(E) Current transformers for instruments : IEC 60044
(F) Voltage transformers for instruments : IEC 60044
(G) Relays : IEC 60255
(H) Rotating machinery : IEC 60529 and 60034-5
2. In application to 1502. 2 (2), (3) of the Rules, equipment located in machinery spaces are to be
considered as being accessible to qualified personnel only. The equipment located in other compart-
ments are to be considered as being accessible to qualified personnel only when the equipment are
to be kept locked under the responsibility of the ship's officers.
3. In application to 1502. 3 (1) of the Rules, the term "subject to the Society's permission" means that
sufficient insulating performance is confirmed according to clause 4.2 of IEC 62271-1.

1505. Cables 【See Rule】

1. Application
In application to 1505. of the Rules, IEC 60183 may apply.

1506. Switchgear and controlgear assemblies 【See Rule】

1. In application to 1506. 4 of the Rules, the high voltage test procedure is to be in accordance with
the IEC 62271-200, or equivalent and above, data proving that the assembly will withstand an in-
ternal arc is to be submitted to the Society for information service.(e.g. testing in accordance with
Appendix A of IEC 62271-200)

1507. Installation 【See Rule】

In application to 1507. 1 (3) of the Rules, “safe and effective measures” means the followings.
(1) Pressure-release flaps are to be installed.
(2) Ducts of sufficient cross-section are to be provided.
(3) Combustible materials and electrical equipments are not admissible in the area of coming out
gases.

52 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 1 Electrical Equipment Pt 6, Ch 1

Section 16 Electric Propulsion Unit

1604. Control gear 【See Rule】

1. In application to 1604. 4 (7) of the Rules, “machines" mean transformers directly used to electric
propulsion unit.
2. Remote control devices for electric propulsion unit
(1) For the remote control station for propulsion motors, alarm devices activating on the following
cases are to be provided in addition to those specified in Ch 2, 202. 2 (1) of the Guidance:
(A) Insulation resistance drop of supply circuits
(B) An abnormal stopping of cooling fan for semi-conductor electric power converter
(C) Pressure drop of cooling water for semi-conductor electric power converter (temperature ris-
ing or stopping of cooling water pump)
(D) Starting of semi-conductor safety devices for semi-conductor electric power converter
(2) Visual alarm specified in (1) above is to be capable of identifying kind of abnormal conditions
and the related equipment. However, in case of ships remote-controlled in bridge and the other
space, visual alarm installed in bridge does not apply this requirement. And visual alarms dis-
criminated easily by the other gauges and meters in engine room do not apply this requirement.

Section 18 Spare Parts, Tools and Instruments

1801. Spare parts 【See Rule】

1. For the kind and quantity of spare parts, the requirements of this section are for general guidance
purpose and in general are not mandatory for classification. Kind and quantity of spare parts speci-
fied in this section may be added or reduced when deemed appropriate by the Society in consid-
eration of the design, recommendations of the manufacturer, the discussion with owner, production
records and maintenance method. (2017)
2. For the electric or electro-hydraulic steering gears equipped with two or more steering gear motors
or motor generators, the spare armature or stator specified in 1801. 1 (4) of the Rules may be
omitted.
3. The requirements in 1801. 1 (4) of the Rules do not apply to electric motors for steering control
systems.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 53
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

CHAPTER 2 CONTROL SYSTEMS

Section 1 General

101. General 【See Rule】

1. Application
(1) In application to 101. 1 (1) of the Rules, for control system of the electric generation sets(in-
cluding prime movers) in electric propulsion ship, the requirements to "204. Control system in
electric generation sets" of the Rules are to be applied.

Section 2 System and Control

201. System design (2017) 【See Rule】

1. In application to 201. 4 (7) of the Rules, the term "other measures considered appropriate by the
Society" means the acceptance in accordance with Pt 1, Ch 1, 104. of the Rules. (2020)

202. Automatic and remote control of main engines or controllable pitch propellers 【See Rule】
1. Application
In case where the local control handle fitted to main propulsion machinery is moved to the main
control station, the requirements in 202. of the Rules may not apply except the following case:
(1) when the main control station is provided outside the space where main propulsion machinery is
installed.
(2) When the main control station is provided inside the space where main propulsion machinery is
installed, and environmental enclosure.
2. Remote control devices for main engines or controllable pitch propellers
(1) At the remote control station for the main propulsion machinery, alarm devices which come into
action on the following cases is to be provided.
(A) Lubricating oil low pressure
(B) Cooling fresh water low pressure (or high temperature, cooling water pump stop, etc.)
(C) Low pressure of hydraulic oil or air for remote control system, or failure of electrical source
(D) Starting of emergency stopping devices.
(2) Visual alarm specified in (1) above is to be capable of identifying kind of abnormal conditions
and the related equipment. However, in case of ships remote-controlled in bridge and the other
space, visual alarm installed in bridge does not apply this requirement. And visual alarms dis-
criminated easily by the other gauges and meters in engine room do not apply this requirement.
(3) For the remote control system of main propulsion steam turbine, means for automatic opening
of astern intermediate valves at the operation into astern maneuvering are to be provided.
(4) In case where control devices specified in above 1 (2) are installed, the local control equipment
for the main engine can be omitted. However, in case where control equipment is installed in
main control station, it is recommended that the emergency local control equipment for main
propulsion machinery be installed.
(5) Countermeasure for the event of failure of the source (electric power, pneumatic pressure and
hydraulic pressure) for remote control system due to the failure of main engine remote control
system is to be provided.
(6) Main engine starting by remote control system for main propulsion machinery and starting air
low pressure alarm are in accordance with the followings:
(A) In case where the low pressure alarm activate after satisfying the number of starting speci-
fied in Pt 5, Ch 6, 1101. 1 of the Rules, startings after this are be controlled at the main
control station.
(B) In case where the low pressure alarm activate before satisfying the number of starting
specified in Pt 5, Ch 6 1101. 1 of the Rules, the next startings is to be capable at the re-

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 55
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

mote control station and the number of starting is to be satisfied in the requirements.
3. Bridge Control Devices
(1) It is recommended that the operating handle (or button) of the bridge control devices is linked
with the engine room telegraph.
(2) In application to 202. 3 (3) of the Rules, where override may result in total failure of the engine
and/or propulsion equipment within a short time is as followings.
(A) All diesel engines
(a) Overspeed
(b) Failure of lubricating oil system
(c) Crankcase explosive condition
(B) All steam turbine
(a) Failure of lubricating oil system
(b) Overspeed
(c) Back-pressure for auxiliary turbines
(C) All boiler
(a) Failure of flame
(b) Failure of flame scanner
(c) Low water level
(d) Failure of forced draft pressure
(e) Failure of control power
(D) All reduction gears
Shutdown prime movers upon failure of reduction gear lubricating oil system
(E) Generators
For generators fitted with forced lubrication system only: shutdown prime movers upon fail-
ure of generator lubricating oil system
(F) Electric propulsion system
(a) Short-circuit in electrical propulsion system
(b) Overspeed of electrical propulsion d.c. motor
4. Safety Measures
For the remote control devices for the main propulsion machinery, inter-locking devices are to be
provided so as not to allow main propulsion machinery to start on the following conditions:
(1) When the turning gear is engaged.
(2) When the lubricating oil pressure is low.

203. Automatic and remote control of boilers

1. General 【See Rule】
In application to 203. 1 (3) of the Rules, the term "considered in each case" means the acceptance
in accordance with Pt 1, Ch 1, 104. of the Rules. (2020)
2. Automatic combustion control systems
(1) In application to 203. 2 (2) (F) of the Rules, the term "where approved by the Society" means
the acceptance in accordance with Pt 1, Ch 1, 104. of the Rules. (2020) 【See Rule】
(2) In application to 203. 2 (4) of the Rules, the term "considered in each case by the Society"
means the acceptance in accordance with Pt 1, Ch 1, 104. of the Rules. (2020) 【See Rule】

56 Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022
Pt 6 Electrical Equipment and Control Systems
Ch 2 Control Systems Pt 6, Ch 2

Section 3 Tests (2017)

301. Shop tests 【See Rule】

1. Type approval
(1) In application to 301. 1 of the Rules, "automatic equipment" to be type-approved are, in princi-
ple, as follows:
(A) Alarm and monitoring systems
(B) Control systems for, main engine, generators, boilers and essential auxiliary machinery, etc.
(C) Computer-based systems
(D) Fire detection systems
(E) Gas detection systems
(F) Electronic governor systems
(G) Speed and shaft horsepower sensing equipment
(H) Controller
(I) Sensors(including Transmitters or Switches for flow, level, limit, pressure, temperature detection)
(J) Oil mist detectors
(K) UPS
(L) Electrical and electronic indicators
(M) Electric power converters(including frequency converter) for electric propulsion unit and es-
sential auxiliary (2020)
(N) Optical sensors and optical application device applied to the above (A) ∼ (M)
(O) Those considered necessary by the Society
(2) "Test methods approved by the Society" specified in 301. 1 of the Rules means the require-
ments specified in Ch 3, Sec 23 of the「Guidance for Approval of Manufacturing Process and
Type Approval, etc.」
2. Shop tests of automation system
(1) In application to 301. 2 (1) (C) of the Rules, test products including the circuits (electronic prod-
ucts or PCB card, etc), for which applying test voltage is undesirable, are allowed to be tested
after isolating the relevant circuits. However, in case that the relevant circuits' construction is
difficult to be isolated, insulation resistance test and high voltage test may be exempted by ad-
mitting the record of type approval test.
(2) In application to 301. 2 of the Rules, where the Society permits that the control logic is simple
and failure mechanism is easy to understand when it is type approved, shop tests of automatic
system may be omitted.
(3) In application to 301. 2 (1) (E) of the Rules, the term "other tests considered necessary by the
Society" means the acceptance in accordance with Pt 1, Ch 1, 104. of the Rules. (2020)

302. On-board tests 【See Rule】

(1) In 302. of the Rules, the confirmations of the machinery and equipment's operation in case of fail-
ures of control systems as deemed necessary by the Society, in general, are to include followings:
(A) The confirmation that the rotational speed of propeller and direction of thrust are maintained
as before failure, in case of failure of remote control devices for main propulsion machinery
or controllable pitch propellers specified in 202. 2 of the Rules.
(B) The confirmation that the boilers burning systems cease burning in case of failure of auto-
matic and remote control system of boilers specified in 203. of the Rules.
(C) The confirmation that the burning systems cease burning in case of failure of automatic and
remote control system of thermal oil installations specified in 205. 3 of the Rules.
(2) Following conditions, at least, are to be included as assumed failure conditions of control system.
(A) Power failure of control systems
(B) Malfunction of computer for control use

303. Sea trials 【See Rule】

1. Main propulsion machinery and controllable pitch propellers
(1) As for the test procedures specified in 303. 1 of the Rules to test the main engine or control-
lable pitch propellers by bridge control devices, those according to Pt 9, Ch 3, 206 of the Rules
are to be considered as the standard practice.
(2) In application to 303. 1 (3) of the Rules, the term "considered appropriate by the Society" means
the case satisfied with Pt 9, Ch 3, 305. 2 (3) of the Rules.

Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships 2022 57
 Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships
Guidance Relating to the Rules for the Classification
of Steel Ships

PART 6 Electrical Equipment and

Control Systems

Published by
KR
36, Myeongji ocean city 9-ro, Gangseo-gu,
BUSAN, KOREA
TEL : +82 70 8799 7114
FAX : +82 70 8799 8999
Website : http://www.krs.co.kr

CopyrightⒸ 2022, KR
Reproduction of this Rules and Guidance in whole or in
parts is prohibited without permission of the publisher.